Canon | EOS RP | User guide | Canon EOS RP User guide

Canon EOS RP User guide
zz This manual is for the EOS RP with firmware
version 1.2.0 or later installed.
ENGLISH
Advanced User Guide
Introduction
Before Starting to Shoot, Be Sure to Read the Following
To avoid shooting problems and accidents, first read the “Safety Instructions”
(=25–=27) and “Handling Precautions” (=28–=30). Also,
read this manual carefully to ensure that you use the camera correctly.
Refer to This Manual while Using the Camera to Further
Familiarize Yourself with the Camera
While reading this manual, take a few test shots and see how they come
out. You can then better understand the camera. Be sure to store this
manual safely, too, so that you can refer to it again when necessary.
Testing the Camera Before Use and Liability
After shooting, play images back and check whether they have been
properly recorded. If the camera or memory card is faulty and the images
cannot be recorded or downloaded to a computer, Canon cannot be held
liable for any loss or inconvenience caused.
Copyrights
Copyright laws in some countries prohibit the unauthorized use of images
recorded with the camera (or music/images with music transferred to the
memory card) for purposes other than personal enjoyment. Also be aware
that certain public performances, exhibitions, etc. may prohibit photography
even for private enjoyment.
2
Item Check List
Before starting, check that all the following items are included with your
camera. If anything is missing, contact your dealer.
Camera
(with body cap)
Battery Pack LP-E17
(with protective cover)
Battery Charger
LC-E17E*
Strap
* Battery Charger LC-E17E comes with a power cord.
oo The camera does not come with a memory card (=10), interface cable, or HDMI
cable.
oo For details on the Advanced User Guide and Instruction Manuals, see the next page.
oo If you purchased a Lens Kit, check that the lenses are included.
oo Be careful not to lose any of the above items.
oo When you need Lens Instruction Manuals, download them from the Canon
website (=4).
oo The Lens Instruction Manuals (PDF files) are for lenses sold individually. Note
that when purchasing the Lens Kit, some of the accessories included with the
lens may not match those listed in the Lens Instruction Manual.
3
Instruction Manuals
The Instruction Manual included with the camera provides
basic instructions for the camera and Wi-Fi functions.
The Advanced User Guide (this PDF file), which provides
complete instructions, can be downloaded from the Canon
website to a computer or other device.
Downloading the Advanced User Guide/Instruction Manuals
The Advanced User Guide and Instruction Manuals for lenses and software
(PDF files) can be downloaded from the Canon website to a computer or
other device.
zzDownload site
www.canon.com/icpd
Advanced User Guide
Lens Instruction Manual
Software Instruction Manual
oo To view the PDF files, an Adobe PDF viewing software such as Adobe
Acrobat Reader DC (most recent version recommended) is required.
oo Adobe Acrobat Reader DC can be downloaded for free from the Internet.
oo Double-click the downloaded PDF file to open it.
oo To learn how to use PDF viewing software, refer to the software’s Help section
or the like.
4
Instruction Manuals
Downloading the Advanced User Guide/Instruction Manuals
Using QR Code
The Advanced User Guide and Instruction Manuals for lenses and software
(PDF files) can be downloaded to a smartphone or tablet using the QR
code.
www.canon.com/icpd
oo A software app is required to read the QR code.
oo Select your country or region of residence, then download the Advanced User
Guide/Instruction Manuals.
oo Select [5: Manual/software URL] to display the QR code on the camera
screen.
5
Quick Start Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
Insert the battery (=42).
zz Upon purchase, charge the battery
to start using (=40).
Insert the card (=42).
zz With the card’s label facing toward
the back of the camera, insert it into
the card slot.
Attach the lens (=48).
zz Align the red mount index on the
lens with the red mount index on
the camera to attach the lens.
zz Make sure the lens’s focus mode
switch is set to <2> (=48).
Set the power switch to <1>
(=46).
Flip out the screen (=45).
zz When the date/time/zone setting
screen is displayed, see =374.
Quick Start Guide
6
7
8
9
Set the Mode dial to <A>
(=68).
zz All the necessary camera settings
will be set automatically.
Focus on the subject (=54).
zz <p> (an AF point) appears over
any face detected.
zz Press the shutter button halfway,
and the camera will focus on the
subject.
Take the picture (=54).
zz Press the shutter button completely
to take the picture.
Review the picture.
zz The image just captured will be
displayed for approx. 2 sec. on the
screen.
zz To display the image again, press
the <x> button (=296).
zz To view the images captured so far, see “Image Playback” (=296).
zz To delete images, see “Erasing Images” (=314).
7
About This Manual
Icons in this Manual
<6>
<5>
<W><X><Y><Z>
<T>
<0>
*
: Indicates the Main dial.
: Indicates the Quick control dial.
: Indicates the corresponding direction on the <V>
cross keys.
: Indicates the lens control ring.
: Indicates the Setting button.
: Indicates the duration (in * seconds) of the operation
for the button you pressed, as timed after you
release the button.
* In addition to the above, the icons and symbols used on the camera’s buttons and
displayed on the screen are also used in this manual when discussing relevant
operations and functionality.
M (in page titles) : Functions only available in Creative Zone modes
(<t>, <d>, <s>, <f>, <a>, or <F> mode) or
for movies recorded with manual exposure.
: Reference page numbers for more information.
=***
: Warning to prevent shooting problems.
: Supplemental information.
: Tips or advice for better shooting.
: Troubleshooting advice.
8
About This Manual
Basic Assumptions for Operational Instructions, Sample
Photos
zz Before following any instructions, make sure the power switch is set to
<1> and the Multi-function lock feature is off (=46, =58).
zz It is assumed that all the menu settings and Custom Functions are set to
their defaults.
zz The illustrations in this manual show the camera attached with the RF24105mm F4 L IS USM lens as an example.
zz The sample photos displayed on the camera and used in this manual are
for instructional purposes only.
zz In references to using EF or EF-S lenses, it is assumed that a mount
adapter is used.
9
Compatible Cards
The following cards can be used with the camera regardless of capacity.
If the card is new or was previously formatted (initialized) by another
camera or computer, format the card with this camera (=367).
zzSD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards
UHS-II and UHS-I cards supported.
Cards that Can Record Movies
When recording movies, use a high-capacity card with ample performance
(fast enough writing and reading speeds) for the movie recording size. For
details, see =586.
In this manual, “card” refers to SD memory cards, SDHC memory
cards, and SDXC memory cards.
* The camera does not come with a card for recording photos/
movies. Please purchase it separately.
10
Chapters
Introduction
2
Preparation and Basic Operations
39
Basic Shooting
67
Creative Zone
95
Shooting
109
Playback
293
Set-up
357
Wi-Fi (Wireless Communication) Functions
415
Custom Functions / My Menu
523
Reference
553
11
Contents
Introduction
2
Item Check List.......................................................................................3
Instruction Manuals.................................................................................4
Quick Start Guide....................................................................................6
About This Manual..................................................................................8
Compatible Cards.................................................................................10
Chapters...............................................................................................11
Contents................................................................................................12
Index to Features..................................................................................21
Safety Instructions................................................................................25
Handling Precautions............................................................................28
Part Names...........................................................................................31
Preparation and Basic Operations
39
Charging the Battery.............................................................................40
Inserting/Removing the Battery and Card.............................................42
Using the Screen..................................................................................45
Turning on the Power............................................................................46
Attaching and Detaching a Lens...........................................................48
Attaching and Detaching EF/EF-S Lenses...........................................50
Using the Viewfinder.............................................................................52
Basic Operations...................................................................................53
Menu Operations and Settings.............................................................60
Touch-Screen Operation.......................................................................64
Quick Control........................................................................................65
12
Contents
Basic Shooting
67
Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)................................68
Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto).......................................71
Special Scene Mode.............................................................................75
Shooting Portraits.................................................................................77
Shooting Group Photos.........................................................................78
Shooting Landscapes...........................................................................79
Shooting Moving Subjects....................................................................80
Photographing Children........................................................................81
Panning.................................................................................................82
Shooting Close-ups...............................................................................84
Shooting Food.......................................................................................85
Shooting Night Portraits (With a Tripod)...............................................86
Shooting Night Scenes (Handheld).......................................................87
Shooting Backlit Scenes.......................................................................88
Shooting Quiet Scenes.........................................................................89
Cautions for the <SCN> Modes............................................................90
Creative Zone
95
Program AE...........................................................................................96
Shutter-Priority AE................................................................................98
Aperture-Priority AE............................................................................100
Manual Exposure................................................................................102
Flexible-Priority AE..............................................................................104
Long (Bulb) Exposures.......................................................................106
13
Contents
Shooting
Shooting Still Photos
109
110
Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting......................................................... 111
Setting Image Quality..........................................................................116
Setting Cropping/Aspect Ratio............................................................119
Setting the Image Review Time..........................................................122
Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical Characteristics...........123
Setting the Desired Exposure Compensation.....................................128
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)........................................................129
Setting the ISO Speed for Still Photos................................................131
Auto Correction of Brightness and Contrast.......................................136
Highlight Tone Priority.........................................................................137
Setting the Metering Timer..................................................................138
Exposure Simulation...........................................................................139
Setting the White Balance...................................................................140
White Balance Correction...................................................................145
Setting the Color Space......................................................................147
Selecting a Picture Style.....................................................................148
Customizing a Picture Style................................................................152
Registering a Picture Style..................................................................155
Setting Noise Reduction.....................................................................157
Appending Dust Delete Data..............................................................161
Shooting with the Touch Shutter.........................................................163
Multiple Exposures..............................................................................165
14
Contents
HDR (High Dynamic Range) Shooting................................................171
Interval Timer Shooting.......................................................................176
Reducing Flicker.................................................................................179
Selecting the Display Speed for High-Speed Continuous Shooting...181
Card Reminder....................................................................................182
Setting Touch & Drag AF.....................................................................183
Selecting the AF Operation.................................................................185
Selecting the AF Method.....................................................................188
Focusing on People’s Eyes.................................................................198
Setting Continuous AF........................................................................199
Setting Lens Electronic MF.................................................................200
Setting AF-Assist Beam Firing............................................................201
Focus Bracketing................................................................................202
Selecting the Drive Mode....................................................................206
Using the Self-Timer ..........................................................................209
Selecting the Metering Mode..............................................................211
Locking the Exposure for Shooting (AE Lock)....................................213
Focusing Manually..............................................................................214
Remote Control Shooting....................................................................217
Using a Remote Switch.......................................................................219
Flash Photography..............................................................................220
Setting the Flash Function..................................................................222
General Notes on Still Photo Shooting...............................................231
15
Contents
Recording Movies
235
Tab Menus: Movie Recording.............................................................236
Recording Movies...............................................................................239
Recording HDR Movies......................................................................247
Setting the Movie Recording Size.......................................................249
Movie Cropping...................................................................................256
Setting the Sound Recording..............................................................257
Movie Digital IS...................................................................................260
Recording Time-lapse Movies.............................................................262
Recording Video Snapshots................................................................274
Setting Movie Servo AF......................................................................280
Other Menu Functions........................................................................285
General Movie Recording Cautions....................................................291
Playback
293
Tab Menus: Playback..........................................................................294
Image Playback..................................................................................296
Magnifying Images..............................................................................299
Index Display (Multiple-Image Display)...............................................300
Playing Back Movies...........................................................................301
Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes.............................................304
Grabbing a Frame from 4K Movies or 4K Time-Lapse Movies...........306
Playback on a TV................................................................................308
Protecting Images...............................................................................310
Rotating Images..................................................................................313
16
Contents
Erasing Images...................................................................................314
Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)......................................................318
Specifying Images for a Photobook....................................................322
Processing RAW Images with the Camera.........................................325
Applying Your Favorite Effects (Creative Assist).................................331
Selecting the Type of RAW Image Processing...................................333
Editing Video Snapshot Albums..........................................................334
Cropping JPEG Images......................................................................337
Resizing JPEG Images.......................................................................339
Setting Ratings....................................................................................340
Slide Show (Auto Playback)................................................................343
Filtering Images for Playback..............................................................345
Jump Display (Jumping Through Images)..........................................347
Customizing Playback Information Display.........................................349
Displaying the Highlight Alert..............................................................351
Displaying AF Points...........................................................................352
Displaying a Grid.................................................................................353
Specifying Initial Image Display When Playback Begins....................354
Setting the Initial Magnification Ratio and Position.............................355
Set-up
357
Tab Menus: Set-up..............................................................................358
Creating and Selecting a Folder.........................................................361
File Numbering Methods.....................................................................363
Setting the Auto Rotation of Vertical Images.......................................366
17
Contents
Formatting Memory Cards..................................................................367
Displaying the Shooting Mode Guide..................................................369
Displaying the Feature Guide.............................................................370
Setting Eco Mode................................................................................371
Setting Power-Saving Features..........................................................372
Adjusting the Screen Brightness.........................................................373
Setting the Date, Time, and Time Zone..............................................374
Setting the Interface Language...........................................................377
Setting the Video System....................................................................378
Setting the Touch Control Response..................................................379
Disabling Beeps for Camera Operations............................................380
Checking the Battery Information........................................................381
Sensor Cleaning.................................................................................382
Setting the HDMI Output Resolution...................................................386
RAW Playback on an HDR TV............................................................387
Customizing Information Displayed When Shooting...........................388
Setting a Priority for Shooting Display Performance...........................393
Setting the Viewfinder Display Format................................................393
Setting the Display Mode....................................................................394
Customizing Shutter Button Functionality for Movie Recording..........395
Help.....................................................................................................396
Setting Wireless Features...................................................................398
Geotagging Images.............................................................................402
Setting the Multi-Function Lock...........................................................407
18
Contents
Registering Custom Shooting Modes.................................................408
Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings....................................410
Setting Copyright Information.............................................................411
Checking Other Information................................................................413
Wi-Fi (Wireless Communication) Functions
415
What You Can Do via Wi-Fi (Wireless Communication) Functions.....416
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi...............................................419
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi...................................................453
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi........................................................461
Sending Images to a Web Service......................................................473
Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points...................................................488
Reconnecting via Wi-Fi.......................................................................493
Changing or Deleting Connection Settings.........................................496
Clearing Wireless Communication Settings to Default.......................498
View Info Screen.................................................................................499
Responding to Error Messages..........................................................500
Wireless Communication Function Notes...........................................511
Security...............................................................................................513
Checking Network Settings.................................................................514
[Wireless communication settings] Screen....................................515
[Wi-Fi settings] Screen......................................................................516
Virtual Keyboard Operation.................................................................517
Setting the IP Address Manually.........................................................518
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Status Display...........................................................520
19
Contents
Custom Functions / My Menu
523
Tab Menus: Customization..................................................................524
Setting Custom Functions...................................................................525
Custom Function Settings...................................................................526
Clearing Custom Function Settings....................................................546
Tab Menus: My Menu..........................................................................547
Registering My Menu..........................................................................548
Reference
553
Software Overview..............................................................................554
Importing Images to a Computer........................................................556
Charging a Battery in the Camera......................................................558
Using an Extension Grip.....................................................................560
Troubleshooting..................................................................................562
Error Codes.........................................................................................581
Performance Data...............................................................................582
Information Display.............................................................................591
Index...................................................................................................605
20
Index to Features
Power
Viewfinder
zz Charging the battery (=40)
zz Dioptric adjustment (=52)
zz Battery level (=47)
zz Information display in viewfinder
(=389)
zz Checking battery information
(=381)
zz Eco mode (=371)
zz Power saving (=372)
Cards
zz Viewfinder vertical display (=390)
zz Viewfinder display format (=393)
Screen
zz Vari-angle (=45)
zz Formatting (=367)
zz Touch control (=64)
zz Releasing shutter without card
(=182)
zz Display settings (=394)
zz Cards compatible with movie
recording (=585)
Lens
zz Attaching (=48, =50)
zz Detaching (=49, =51)
zz Releasing shutter without lens
(=544)
Basic Settings
zz Language (=377)
zz Date/Time/Zone (=374)
zz Beeper (=380)
zz Copyright information (=411)
zz Brightness (=373)
zz Electronic level (=388)
zz Help (=396)
AF
zz AF operation (=185)
zz AF method (=188)
zz AF point selection (=193)
zz Eye Detection AF (=198)
zz Continuous AF (=199)
zz Touch & drag AF (=183)
zz MF peaking settings (=216)
zz Manual focusing (=214)
zz Electronic manual focus (=200)
zz Clear all camera settings (=410)
21
Index to Features
Metering
zz Metering mode (=211)
Drive
Shooting
zz Shooting mode (=34)
zz HDR mode (=171)
zz Multiple exposures (=165)
zz Drive mode (=206)
zz Bulb timer (=107)
zz Self-timer (=209)
zz Depth-of-field preview (=101)
zz Maximum burst (=118)
Image Recording Settings
zz Creating/Selecting a folder
(=361)
zz File numbering (=363)
Image Quality
zz Image quality (=116)
zz Still photo cropping/aspect ratio
(=119)
zz ISO speed (still photos) (=131)
zz Picture Style (=148)
zz White balance (=140)
zz Auto Lighting Optimizer (=136)
zz Noise reduction for high ISO
speeds (=157)
zz Noise reduction for long exposures
(=159)
zz Highlight tone priority (=137)
zz Lens aberration correction
(=123)
zz Reducing flicker (=179)
zz Color space (=147)
22
zz Remote switch (=219)
zz Remote control (=217)
zz Quick Control (=65)
zz Touch Shutter (=163)
zz Magnified view (=195)
zz Grid display (=390)
zz Shooting information display
(=388)
zz Display settings (=394)
zz Multi-function lock (=58)
zz Error codes (=581)
Exposure
zz Exposure compensation (=128)
zz Exposure compensation with
M+ISO Auto (=103)
zz AEB (=129)
zz AE lock (=213)
zz Safety shift (=529)
zz Exposure simulation (=139)
Index to Features
Flash
Playback
zz External flash (=220)
zz Image review time (=122)
zz Flash exposure compensation
(=220)
zz Single-image display (=296)
zz FE lock (=220)
zz Shooting information display
(=597)
zz Flash function settings (=225)
zz Grid display (=353)
zz Flash Custom Function settings
(=230)
zz Touch playback (=298)
Movie Recording
zz Autoexposure recording (=239)
zz Manual exposure recording
(=241)
zz Playback information display
(=349)
zz Index display (=300)
zz Image browsing (Jump display)
(=347)
zz ISO speed (movie) (=286)
zz Setting image search conditions
(=345)
zz Movie Servo AF (=280)
zz Magnified view (=299)
zz Movie Servo AF tracking sensitivity
(=282)
zz Protect (=310)
zz Image rotation (=313)
zz Movie Servo AF speed (=283)
zz Rating (=340)
zz Movie recording size (=249)
zz Movie playback (=301)
zz Movie cropping (=256)
zz HDR movie (=247)
zz Editing a movie’s first and last
scenes (=304)
zz Time-lapse movie (=262)
zz Frame Grab (4K) (=306)
zz Video snapshot (=274)
zz Slide show (=343)
zz Sound recording (=257)
zz Microphone (=258)
zz Viewing images on a television
(=308)
zz Wind filter (=257)
zz Erasing (=314)
zz Attenuator (=258)
zz Auto slow shutter (=288)
zz Av 1/8-stop increments (=289)
zz HDMI output (=290)
zz Remote control shooting (=285)
23
Index to Features
Image Editing
Wireless Features
zz RAW image processing (=325)
zz Connect to smartphones (=419)
zz Resizing JPEGs (=339)
zz Auto send images to smartphones
(=439)
zz Cropping JPEGs (=337)
Print Order
zz Print order (DPOF) (=318)
zz Photobook Set-up (=322)
Customization
zz Custom Functions (C.Fn) (=524)
zz Customizing operations (=537)
zz My Menu (=548)
zz Custom shooting mode (=408)
Sensor Cleaning and Dust Reduction
zz Sensor cleaning (=382)
zz Appending Dust Delete Data
(=161)
zz Manual sensor cleaning (=384)
Software
zz Downloading and Installing
(=554)
zz Software Instruction Manuals
(=555)
24
zz Remote control (EOS Utility)
(=453)
zz Auto send images to computers
(=458)
zz Print from Wi-Fi printers (=461)
zz Upload to Web services (=473)
zz Clear wireless settings (=498)
Safety Instructions
Be sure to read these instructions in order to operate the product safely.
Follow these instructions to prevent injury or harm to the operator of the
product or others.
WARNING:
Denotes the risk of serious injury or death.
oo Keep the product out of the reach of young children.
A strap wrapped around a person’s neck may result in strangulation.
The parts or provided items of cameras or accessories are dangerous if
swallowed. If swallowed, seek immediate medical assistance.
The battery is dangerous if swallowed. If swallowed, seek immediate medical
assistance.
oo Use only power sources specified in this instruction manual for use with the product.
oo Do not disassemble or modify the product.
oo Do not expose the product to strong shocks or vibration.
oo Do not touch any exposed internal parts.
oo Stop using the product in any case of unusual circumstances such as the presence
of smoke or a strange smell.
oo Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol, benzine or paint thinner to clean the
product.
oo Do not get the product wet. Do not insert foreign objects or liquids into the product.
oo Do not use the product where flammable gases may be present.
This may cause electric shock, explosion or fire.
oo Do not leave a lens or a camera with a lens attached, exposed without the lens cap
attached.
The lens may concentrate the light and cause fire.
oo Do not touch the product connected to a power outlet during lightning storms.
This may cause electric shock.
oo Observe the following instructions when using commercially available batteries or
provided battery packs.
• Use batteries/battery packs only with their specified product.
• Do not heat batteries/battery packs or expose them to fire.
• Do not charge batteries/battery packs using non-authorized battery chargers.
• Do not expose the terminals to dirt or let them come into contact with metallic pins
or other metal objects.
• Do not use leaking batteries/battery packs.
• When disposing of batteries/battery packs, insulate the terminals with tape or other
means.
This may cause electric shock, explosion or fire.
If a battery/battery pack leaks and the material contacts your skin or clothing,
flush the exposed area thoroughly with running water. In case of eye contact,
flush thoroughly with copious amounts of clean running water and seek
immediate medical assistance.
25
Safety Instructions
oo Observe the following instructions when using a battery charger or AC adapter.
• Periodically remove any dust buildup from the power plug and power outlet using a
dry cloth.
• Do not plug in or unplug the product with wet hands.
• Do not use the product if the power plug is not fully inserted into the power outlet.
• Do not expose the power plug and terminals to dirt or let them come into contact
with metallic pins or other metal objects.
oo Do not touch the battery charger or AC adapter connected to a power outlet during
lightning storms.
oo Do not place heavy objects on the power cord. Do not damage, break or modify the
power cord.
oo Do not wrap the product in cloth or other materials when in use or shortly after use
when the product is still warm in temperature.
oo Do not unplug the product by pulling the power cord.
oo Do not leave the product connected to a power source for long periods of time.
oo Do not charge batteries/battery packs at temperatures outside the range of 5–40 °C
(41–104 °F).
This may cause electric shock, explosion or fire.
oo Do not allow the product to maintain contact with the same area of skin for extended
periods of time during use.
This may result in low-temperature contact burns, including skin redness and
blistering, even if the product does not feel hot. The use of a tripod or similar
equipment is recommended when using the product in hot places and for people
with circulation problems or less sensitive skin.
oo Follow any indications to turn off the product in places where its use is forbidden.
Not doing so may cause other equipment to malfunction due to the effect of
electromagnetic waves and even result in accidents.
26
Safety Instructions
CAUTION:
Denotes the risk of injury.
oo Do not fire the flash near the eyes.
It may hurt the eyes.
oo Do not look at the screen or through the viewfinder for prolonged periods of time.
This may induce symptoms similar to motion sickness. In such a case, stop using
the product immediately and rest for a while before resuming use.
oo Flash emits high temperatures when fired. Keep fingers, any other part of your body,
and objects away from the flash unit while taking pictures.
This may cause burns or malfunction of the flash.
oo Do not leave the product in places exposed to extremely high or low temperatures.
The product may become extremely hot/cold and cause burns or injury when
touched.
oo Strap is intended for use on the body only. Hanging the strap with any product
attached on a hook or other object may damage the product. Also, do not shake the
product or expose the product to strong impacts.
oo Do not apply strong pressure on the lens or allow an object to hit it.
This may cause injury or damage to the product.
oo Only mount the product on a tripod that is sufficiently sturdy.
oo Do not carry the product when it is mounted on a tripod.
This may cause injury or may result in an accident.
oo Do not touch any parts inside the product.
This may cause injury.
27
Handling Precautions
Camera Care
zz This camera is a precision instrument. Do not drop it or subject it to
physical shock.
zz The camera is not waterproof and cannot be used underwater.
zz To maximize the camera’s dust- and drip- resistance, keep the terminal
cover, battery compartment cover, card slot cover, and all other covers
firmly closed.
zz This camera is designed to be dust- and drip- resistant, in order to help
prevent sand, dust, dirt, or water that falls on it unexpectedly from getting
inside, but it is impossible to prevent dirt, dust, water, or salt from getting
inside at all. As far as possible, do not allow dirt, dust, water, or salt to get
on the camera.
zz If water gets on the camera, wipe it off with a dry and clean cloth. If dirt,
dust, or salt gets on the camera, wipe it off with a clean, well-wrung wet
cloth.
zz Using the camera in a location with large amounts of dirt or dust may
cause a malfunction.
zz Cleaning the camera after use is recommended. Allowing dirt, dust, water,
or salt to remain on the camera may cause a malfunction.
zz If you accidentally drop the camera into water or are concerned that
moisture (water), dirt, dust, or salt may have gotten inside it, promptly
consult the nearest Canon Service Center.
zz Never leave the camera near anything having a strong magnetic field
such as a magnet or electric motor. Also, avoid using or leaving the
camera near anything emitting strong radio waves, such as a large
antenna. Strong magnetic fields can cause camera malfunction or destroy
image data.
zz Do not leave the camera in excessive heat, such as in a car in direct
sunlight. High temperatures can cause the camera to malfunction.
zz The camera contains precision electronic circuitry. Never attempt to
disassemble the camera yourself.
28
Handling Precautions
zz Do not block shutter curtain operation with your finger or other objects.
Doing so may cause a malfunction.
zz Use only a commercially available blower to blow away dust when it
adheres to the lens, viewfinder, etc. Do not use cleaners that contain
organic solvents to clean the camera body or lens. For stubborn dirt, take
the camera to the nearest Canon Service Center.
zz Do not touch the camera’s electrical contacts with your fingers. This is
to prevent the contacts from corroding. Corroded contacts can cause
camera malfunction.
zz If the camera is suddenly brought in from the cold into a warm room,
condensation may form on the camera and internal parts. To prevent
condensation, first put the camera in a sealed plastic bag and let it adjust
to the warmer temperature before taking it out of the bag.
zz If condensation forms on the camera, to avoid damage, do not use the
camera or remove the lens, card, or battery.
Turn the camera off and wait until the moisture has fully evaporated
before resuming use.
Even after the camera is completely dry, if it is still internally cold, do not
remove the lens, card, or battery until the camera has adjusted to the
ambient temperature.
zz If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery
and store the camera in a cool, dry, well-ventilated location. Even while
the camera is in storage, press the shutter button a few times once in a
while to check that the camera is still working.
zz Avoid storing the camera where there are chemicals that result in rust
and corrosion such as in a chemical lab.
zz If the camera has not been used for an extended period, test all its
functions before using it. If you have not used the camera for some time
or if there is an important shoot such as a foreign trip coming up, have
the camera checked by your nearest Canon Service Center or check the
camera yourself and make sure it is working properly.
zz The camera may become hot after repeated continuous shooting or still
photo/movie shooting over an extended period. This is not a malfunction.
zz If there is a bright light source inside or outside the image area, ghosting
may occur.
29
Handling Precautions
Screen and Viewfinder
zz Although the screen and viewfinder are manufactured with very high
precision technology with over 99.99% effective pixels, 0.01% or fewer
of the pixels may be dead, and there may also be spots of black, red,
or other colors. This is not a malfunction. They do not affect the images
recorded.
zz If the screen is left on for a prolonged period, screen burn-in may occur
where you see remnants of what was displayed. However, this is only
temporary and will disappear when the camera is left unused for a few
days.
zz The screen display may seem slightly slow in low temperatures or
may look black in high temperatures. It will return to normal at room
temperature.
Cards
To protect the card and its recorded data, note the following:
zz Do not drop, bend, or wet the card. Do not subject it to excessive force,
physical shock, or vibration.
zz Do not touch the card’s electronic contacts with your fingers or anything
metallic.
zz Do not affix any stickers, etc. on the card.
zz Do not store or use the card near anything that has a strong magnetic
field, such as a television, speakers, or magnets. Also avoid places prone
to having static electricity.
zz Do not leave the card in direct sunlight or near a heat source.
zz Store the card in a case.
zz Do not store the card in hot, dusty, or humid locations.
Lens
zz After detaching the lens from the camera, put down
the lens with the rear end up and attach the rear lens
cap to avoid scratching the lens surface and electrical
contacts (1).
30
(1)
Part Names
(1)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(5)
(6)
(16)
(7)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(8)
(9)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
<V> Focal plane mark
<6> Main dial
<B> Multi-function button
Shutter button
Movie shooting button
AF-assist beam/Self-timer/
Remote control lamp
Grip (Battery compartment)
Contacts
Lens mount
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
Flash sync contacts
Hot shoe
RF lens mount index
Power switch
Strap mount
Microphone
Image sensor
Lens release button
Lens lock pin
Body cap
31
Part Names
(1)
(2)
(3)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(4)
(9)
(14)
(10)
(15)
(11)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(12)
(13)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
32
Eyecup
Viewfinder eyepiece
Dioptric adjustment knob
Terminal cover
Mode dial
<5> Quick control dial
<R> Multi-function lock switch
<p> AF start button
Viewfinder sensor
<B> Info button
(11) Access lamp
(12) <Q/0> Quick Control/Setting
button
(13) <M> Menu button
(14) <F> Remote control terminal
(15) <D> HDMI mini OUT
terminal
(16) <Y> External microphone IN
terminal
(17) <g> Digital terminal
(18) <n> Headphone terminal
Part Names
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
Accessory positioning hole
Screen
Tripod socket
<W><X><Y><Z>: <V> cross
keys
Serial number
Accessory positioning hole
Speaker
<A> AE lock/FE lock button
<S/u> AF point/Index/Magnify/
Reduce button
(11)
(12)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
Strap mount
Card slot
Battery compartment
Card slot/Battery compartment
cover lock
(14) Card slot/Battery compartment
cover
(15) <L> Erase button
(16) <x> Playback button
33
Part Names
Mode Dial
The Mode dial includes Basic Zone modes, Creative Zone modes, and
movie recording mode.
(1)
(1) Basic Zone
All you do is press the shutter button. The camera sets everything to suit the
subject or scene for shooting.
A : Scene Intelligent Auto (=68)
8 : Special scene (=75)
34
2
Portrait (=77)
4
Close-up (=84)
q
Group Photo (=78)
P
Food (=85)
3
Landscape (=79)
6
Night Portrait (=86)
5
Sports (=80)
F
Handheld Night Scene (=87)
C
Kids (=81)
G
HDR Backlight Control (=88)
r
Panning (=82)
I
Silent Mode (=89)
Part Names
(2)
(3)
(4)
(2) Creative Zone
These modes give you more control for shooting various subjects as
desired.
t
Flexible-priority AE (=104)
d
Program AE (=96)
s
Shutter-priority AE (=98)
f
Aperture-priority AE (=100)
a
Manual exposure (=102)
F
Bulb (=106)
(3) Custom shooting modes
You can assign <t>, <d>, <s>, <f>, <a>, <F>, AF operation,
menu functions, and more to <w>, <x>, or <y> (=408).
(4) k: Movie recording (=239)
35
Part Names
Viewfinder Information Display
Information displayed varies depending on
camera status.
36
Part Names
Battery Charger LC-E17E
Charger for Battery Pack LP-E17 (=40).
(4)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Battery pack slot
Full-charge lamp
Charge lamp
Power cord
Power cord socket
(5)
37
Part Names
Attaching the Strap
Pass the end of the strap through the
camera’s strap mount eyelet from the bottom.
Then pass it through the strap’s buckle as
shown in the illustration. Pull the strap to take
up any slack and make sure the strap will not
loosen from the buckle.
38
Preparation and Basic
Operations
This chapter describes preparatory steps before you start shooting
and the basic camera operations.
39
Charging the Battery
the protective cover
1 Detach
provided with the battery.
insert the battery in the
2 Fully
charger.
zz Do the opposite to remove the battery.
the battery.
3 Recharge
zz Connect the power cord to the charger
and insert the plug into a power outlet.
gg Recharging starts automatically and the
charge lamp (1) lights up in orange.
gg When the battery is fully recharged, the
full-charge lamp (2) will light up in green.
zz It takes approx. 2 hr. to fully charge
a completely exhausted battery at
room temperature (23°C / 73°F). The
time required to charge the battery will
vary greatly depending on the ambient
temperature and the battery’s remaining
capacity.
zz For safety reasons, charging in low
temperatures (5–10°C / 41–50°F) will
take longer (up to approx. 4 hr.).
40
Charging the Battery
zzUpon purchase, the battery is not fully charged.
Charge the battery before use.
zzCharge the battery on the day before or on the day it is to be
used.
Even during storage, a charged battery will gradually drain and lose its
capacity.
zzAfter charging the battery, remove it and disconnect the
charger from the power outlet.
zzWhen not using the camera, remove the battery.
If the battery is left in the camera for a prolonged period, a small amount
of power current will keep being released, resulting in excess discharge
and shorter battery life. Store the battery with the protective cover
attached. Storing the battery when it is fully charged may lower the
battery performance.
zzThe battery charger can also be used in foreign countries.
The battery charger is compatible with a 100 V AC to 240 V AC 50/60 Hz
power source. If necessary, attach a commercially available plug adapter
for the respective country or region. Do not attach any portable voltage
transformer to the battery charger. Doing so may damage the battery
charger.
zzIf the battery becomes exhausted quickly even after having
been fully charged, the battery has reached the end of its
service life.
Check the battery’s recharge performance (=381) and purchase a new
battery.
oo After disconnecting the charger’s power plug, do not touch the prongs for
approx. 5 sec.
oo The provided charger cannot charge any battery other than Battery Pack LPE17.
41
Inserting/Removing the Battery and Card
Insert a fully charged Battery Pack LP-E17 into the camera. The camera
can use SD, SDHC, or SDXC memory cards (sold separately). UHS-II/
UHS-I SDHC and SDXC cards are also supported. The captured images
are recorded onto the card.
oo Make sure the card’s write-protect switch (1) is set upward to enable
writing and erasing.
Insertion
the card slot/battery
1 Slide
compartment cover lock and open
the cover.
the battery.
2 Insert
zz Insert the end with the electrical
contacts.
zz Insert the battery until it locks in place.
the card.
3 Insert
zz Insert the card with the label facing the
(1)
back of the camera as shown until it
clicks in place.
the cover.
4 Close
zz Press the cover until it snaps shut.
42
Inserting/Removing the Battery and Card
oo You cannot use batteries other than the Battery Pack LP-E17.
oo After opening the card slot/battery compartment cover, be careful not to swing
it back any further. Otherwise, the hinge may break.
Removal
the card slot/battery
1 Open
compartment cover.
(1)
zz Set the power switch to <2>.
zz Check that the access lamp (1) is off,
then open the cover.
zz If [Saving...] is displayed on the screen,
close the cover.
the battery.
2 Remove
zz Press the battery lock lever as shown by
the arrow and remove the battery.
zz To prevent short-circuits, always attach
the included protective cover (=40)
to the battery.
the card.
3 Remove
zz Gently push in the card, then let it go to
eject.
zz Pull the card straight out.
the cover.
4 Close
zz Press the cover until it snaps shut.
43
Inserting/Removing the Battery and Card
Formatting the Card
If the card is new or was previously formatted (initialized) by another camera
or computer, format the card with this camera (=367).
oo The number of possible shots varies depending on the remaining capacity of
the card, the settings of image quality, ISO speed, etc.
oo Setting [z: Release shutter without card] to [Disable] will prevent you from
forgetting to insert a card (=182).
oo When the access lamp is lit or blinking, it indicates that images are
being written to, read from, or erased from the card, or data is being
transferred. Do not open the card slot/battery cover compartment. Also,
never do any of the following while the access lamp is lit or blinking.
Otherwise, it can damage the image data, card, or camera.
• Removing the card.
• Removing the battery.
• Shaking or striking the camera.
• Unplugging and connecting a power cord (when household power outlet
accessories (sold separately) are used).
oo If the card already contains recorded images, the image number may not start
from 0001 (=363).
oo If a card-related error message is displayed on the screen, remove and
reinsert the card. If the error persists, use a different card.
If you can transfer images on the card to a computer, transfer all the images
and then format the card with the camera (=367). The card may then return
to normal.
oo Do not touch the card’s contacts with your fingers or metal objects. Do not
expose the contacts to dust or water. If smudges adhere to the contacts,
contact failure may result.
oo Multimedia cards (MMC) cannot be used. (Card error will be displayed.)
oo Use of UHS-II microSDHC/SDXC cards with a microSD to SD adapter is not
recommended. When using UHS-II cards, use SDHC/SDXC cards.
44
Using the Screen
You can change the direction and angle of the screen.
out the screen.
1 Flip
zz Hold at the top and bottom and pull out
as shown.
the screen.
2 Rotate
zz When the screen is swung out, you can
180°
90°
175°
rotate it up, down, or over 180° to face
the subject.
zz The indicated angle is only approximate.
it toward you.
3 Face
zz Normally, use the camera with the
screen facing you.
oo Be careful not to forcefully rotate the screen, putting much power on the
rotating axis (hinge).
oo When a cable is connected to a camera terminal, the rotation angle range of
the flipped-out screen will be limited.
oo When not using the camera, close the screen facing inward. You can protect
the screen.
oo A mirror image (right/left reversed) of subjects is displayed when the screen
faces subjects in front of the camera.
45
Turning on the Power
zz <1>
The camera turns on.
zz <2>
The camera is turned off and does not
function. Set the power switch to this
position when not using the camera.
Setting the Date, Time, and Time Zone
If you turn on the power switch and the date/time/zone setting screen
appears, see =374 to set the date/time/zone.
Changing the Interface Language
To change the interface language, see =377.
Automatic Sensor Cleaning
zz Sensor cleaning, which may make a small noise, is performed
automatically whenever you set the power switch to <2> or attach
or detach lenses. To enable automatic sensor cleaning when the power
switch is set to <1> as well, you can set this in [5: Sensor cleaning]
(=383).
oo If you set the power switch to <2> while an image is being recorded to
the card, [Saving...] will be displayed and the power will turn off after the
recording finishes.
46
Turning on the Power
Battery Level Indicator
: Battery level is sufficient.
: Battery level is low, but the camera
can still be used.
: Battery will be exhausted soon.
(Blinks)
: Charge the battery.
oo Doing any of the following will exhaust the battery faster:
• Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.
• Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture.
• Using the lens’s Image Stabilizer.
• Using the Wi-Fi function or Bluetooth function.
oo The number of possible shots may decrease depending on the actual shooting
conditions.
oo The lens operation is powered by the camera’s battery. Certain lenses may
exhaust the battery faster than others.
oo In low ambient temperatures, shooting may not be possible even with a
sufficient battery level.
oo See [5: Battery info.] to check the battery status (=381).
47
Attaching and Detaching a Lens
Attaching a Lens
the caps.
1 Remove
zz Remove the rear lens cap and the body
cap by turning them as shown by the
arrows.
the lens.
2 Attach
zz Align the red mount index on the lens
with the red mount index on the camera
and turn the lens as shown by the arrow
until it clicks in place.
the lens’s focus mode switch
3 Set
to <AF>.
zz <AF> stands for autofocus.
zz <MF> stands for manual focus.
Autofocus will not operate.
zz For RF lenses without a focus mode
switch, set to [AF] or [MF] in the camera
menu, in [z: Focus mode].
4 Remove the front lens cap.
48
Attaching and Detaching a Lens
Detaching the Lens
While pressing the lens release
button, turn the lens as shown by
the arrow.
zz Turn the adapter until it stops, then
detach it.
zz Attach the rear lens cap to the detached
lens.
oo Do not look at the sun directly through any lens. Doing so may cause loss of
vision.
oo When attaching or detaching a lens, set the camera’s power switch to <2>.
oo If the front part (focusing ring) of the lens rotates during autofocusing, do not
touch the rotating part.
oo For instructions on how to use the lens, refer to the Lens Instruction Manual
(=4).
Tips for Avoiding Smudges and Dust
When changing lenses, do it quickly in a place with minimal dust.
When storing the camera without a lens attached, be sure to attach the body
cap to the camera.
Remove dust on the body cap before attaching it.
49
Attaching and Detaching EF/EF-S Lenses
All EF and EF-S lenses can be used by attaching the optional Mount
Adapter EF-EOS R. The camera cannot be used with EF-M lenses.
Attaching a Lens
the caps.
1 Remove
zz Remove the rear lens cap and the body
cap by turning them as shown by the
arrows.
(1)
(2)
the lens to the adapter.
2 Attach
zz Align the red or white mount index on
the lens with the corresponding mount
index on the adapter and turn the lens
as shown by the arrow until it clicks into
place.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Red index
White index
the adapter to the camera.
3 Attach
zz Align the red mount indexes (3) on the
adapter and camera and turn the lens
as shown by the arrow until it clicks into
place.
50
Attaching and Detaching EF/EF-S Lenses
the lens’s focus mode switch
4 Set
to <AF>.
zz <AF> stands for autofocus.
zz <MF> stands for manual focus.
Autofocus will not operate.
5 Remove the front lens cap.
Detaching the Lens
pressing the lens release
1 While
button, turn the adapter as shown
by the arrow.
zz Turn the adapter until it stops, then
detach it.
the lens from the adapter.
2 Detach
zz Hold down the lens release lever
on the adapter and turn the lens
counterclockwise.
zz Turn the lens until it stops, then detach
it.
zz Attach the rear lens cap to the detached
lens.
oo For lens precautions, see =49.
51
Using the Viewfinder
Look through the viewfinder to activate it. You can also restrict display to
either the screen or viewfinder (=394).
Adjusting the Viewfinder Clarity
Turn the dioptric adjustment knob.
zz Turn the knob left or right to make the
viewfinder display look sharp.
oo The viewfinder and screen cannot be activated at the same time.
52
Basic Operations
Holding the Camera
zzViewing the Screen as You Shoot
As you shoot, you can tilt the screen to adjust it. For details, see =45.
Normal angle
Low angle
High angle
zzShooting Through the Viewfinder
To obtain sharp images, hold the camera still to minimize camera shake.
Horizontal shooting
Vertical shooting
1. Wrap your right hand around the camera grip firmly.
2. Hold the lens bottom with your left hand.
3. Rest your right index finger lightly on the shutter button.
4. Press your arms and elbows lightly against the front of your body.
5. To maintain a stable stance, place one foot slightly ahead of the other.
6. Press the camera against your face and look through the viewfinder.
53
Basic Operations
Shutter Button
The shutter button has two steps. You can press the shutter button halfway.
Then you can further press the shutter button completely.
Pressing Halfway
This activates autofocusing and the
automatic exposure system that sets the
shutter speed and aperture.
The exposure setting (shutter speed and
aperture) is displayed on the screen or in
the viewfinder for approx. 8 sec. or as set
for the metering timer.*
* By default, the metering timer is set to 8 sec.
Pressing Completely
This action shoots.
zzPreventing Camera Shake
Hand-held camera movement during the moment of exposure is called
camera shake. It can cause blurred pictures. To prevent camera shake,
note the following:
Hold the camera steady.
Press the shutter button halfway to autofocus, then slowly press the
shutter button completely.
oo If you press the shutter button completely without pressing it halfway first, or if
you press the shutter button halfway and then press it completely immediately,
the camera will take a moment before it takes the picture.
oo Even during menu display or image playback, you can go back to shootingready state by pressing the shutter button halfway.
54
Basic Operations
<p> AF Start Button
In Creative Zone modes, has the same
effect as pressing the shutter button
halfway.
<B> Multi-Function Button
By pressing the <B> button and turning
the <5> dial, you can set the ISO speed,
drive mode, AF operation, white balance,
and flash exposure compensation.
55
Basic Operations
<6> Main Dial
(1) After pressing a button, turn the
<6> dial.
Press a button such as <B>, then turn
the <6> dial.
If you press the shutter button halfway,
the camera will go back to shooting-ready
state.
(2) Turn only the <6> dial.
While looking at the screen or viewfinder,
turn the <6> dial.
Use this dial to set the shutter speed,
aperture, etc.
oo Step (1) can be performed even when controls are locked with the Multifunction lock (=58).
56
Basic Operations
<5> Quick Control Dial
(1) After pressing a button, turn the
<5> dial.
Press a button such as <B>, then turn
the <5> dial.
If you press the shutter button halfway,
the camera will go back to shooting-ready
state.
(2) Turn only the <5> dial.
While looking at the screen or viewfinder,
turn the <5> dial.
Use this dial to set the exposure
compensation amount, the aperture setting
for manual exposures, etc.
oo Step (1) can be performed even when controls are locked with the Multifunction lock (=58).
57
Basic Operations
<R> Multi-Function Lock Switch
To avoid accidentally changing settings from the Main dial, Quick control
dial, control ring, or touch-screen panel, configure [5: Multi function lock]
and set the <R> switch to <R>.
For [5: Multi function lock] details, see =407.
<T> Control Ring
By default, the aperture value can be set
by turning the control ring of RF lenses or
mount adapters while pressing the shutter
button halfway in <t>, <f>, <a>, or
<F> mode. Otherwise, you can assign
a different function to the control ring by
customizing operations in [C.Fn III-6:
Customize dials] (=542).
58
Basic Operations
INFO Button
Each press of the <B> button changes
the information shown.
The following sample screens are for still
photos.
59
Menu Operations and Settings
(1)
(2)
(3)
(6) (7)
(5)
(4)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
<M> button
<B> button
Screen
<V> cross keys
(5)
(6)
(7)
<0> button
Quick control dial
Main dial
Basic Zone Modes Menu Screen
* In Basic Zone modes, some tabs and menu items do not appear.
60
Menu Operations and Settings
Creative Zone Modes Menu Screen
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(1)
(2)
(9)
(3)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Main tabs
Secondary tabs
Menu items
z : Shooting
3 : Playback
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
5 : Set-up
8 : Custom Functions
9 : My Menu
Menu settings
Menu Setting Procedure
the menu screen.
1 Display
zz Press the <M> button.
a tab.
2 Select
zz Press the <B> button to switch
between main tabs.
zz Turn the <6> dial to select a
secondary tab.
61
Menu Operations and Settings
an item.
3 Select
zz Turn the <5> dial to select an item,
then press <0>.
an option.
4 Select
zz Turn the <5> dial to select an option.
zz The current setting is indicated in blue.
an option.
5 Set
zz Press <0> to set it.
the setting.
6 Exit
zz Press the <M> button to finish and
prepare for shooting.
oo The description of menu functions hereafter assumes that you have pressed
the <M> button to display the menu screen.
oo You can also tap on the menu screen or press the <V> cross keys to operate
the menu.
oo To cancel the operation, press the <M> button.
62
Menu Operations and Settings
Dimmed Menu Items
Example: Highlight tone priority
Dimmed menu items cannot be set. The
menu item is dimmed if another function
setting is overriding it.
You can see the overriding function by
selecting the dimmed menu item and
pressing <0>.
If you cancel the overriding function’s
setting, the dimmed menu item will become
settable.
oo You may not be able to see the overriding function for certain dimmed menu
items.
oo With [5: Clear all camera settings], you can reset the menu functions to the
default settings (=410).
63
Touch-Screen Operation
You can operate the camera by tapping or dragging on the screen (touchscreen panel) with your finger.
Tap
Sample screen (Quick Control)
zz Use your finger to tap on (touch briefly
and then remove your finger from) the
screen.
zz For example, when you tap on [Q],
the Quick Control screen appears. By
tapping on [2], you can return to the
preceding screen.
Drag
Sample screen (Menu screen)
zz Slide your finger while touching the
screen.
oo If [5: Beep] is set to [Touch ], the beep will not sound for touch operations
(=380).
oo Touch control responsiveness can be adjusted (=379).
64
Quick Control
You can directly select and set the settings displayed on the screen. This is
called Quick Control (except in <A> mode).
1 Press the <Q> button (7).
a setting item.
2 Select
zz Press the <W> <X> keys for selection.
zz When the screen at left is displayed,
press the <W> <X> <Y> <Z> keys for
selection.
an option.
3 Select
zz Turn the <6> or <5> dial, or press
the <Y> <Z> keys to change the
setting. There are also functions that are
set by pressing a button following these
operations.
zz Press <0> to finalize the setting and
return to the previous screen.
oo You can also tap on the screen for Quick Control settings (=64).
65
66
Basic Shooting
This chapter describes how to use the Basic Zone modes on the
Mode dial for best results.
With Basic Zone modes, all you do is point and shoot, and the
camera sets everything automatically.
67
Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent
Auto)
<A> is a fully automatic mode. The camera analyzes the scene
and sets the optimum settings automatically. It can also adjust focus
automatically on either the still or moving subject by detecting the motion of
the subject (=71).
1 Set the Mode dial to <A>.
<0>.
2 Press
zz Read the message and select [OK].
the camera at what you will
3 Aim
shoot (the subject).
zz A frame may be displayed around the
subject, under some shooting conditions.
zz When an AF point is displayed on the
screen, aim it over the subject.
68
Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)
on the subject.
4 Focus
zz Press the shutter button halfway to
focus.
zz You can also focus by touching a
person’s face or another subject on
the screen (Touch AF) when [z:
Continuous AF] is set to [Disable].
zz Under low light, the AF-assist beam
(=201) is automatically activated if
needed.
gg For stationary subjects, the AF point is
displayed in green when the subject is in
focus, and the camera beeps (One-Shot
AF).
gg For moving subjects, the AF point is
displayed in blue and tracks subject
movement. The camera does not beep
(Servo AF).
the picture.
5 Take
zz Press the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
gg The image just captured will be
displayed for approx. 2 sec. on the
screen.
oo Subject movement (whether subjects are still or moving) may not be detected
correctly for some subject or shooting conditions.
oo If you normally prefer to shoot with One-Shot AF, set [z: A Auto servo] to
[Disable].
oo AF operation (One-Shot AF or Servo AF) is set automatically when you press
the shutter button halfway. Note that AF operation cannot be switched during
shooting.
oo The <A> mode makes the colors look more impressive in nature, outdoor,
and sunset scenes. If you do not obtain the desired color tones, change the
mode to a Creative Zone mode (=35) and select a Picture Style other than
<D>, then shoot again (=148).
69
Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)
Minimizing Blurred Photos
zz Use a sturdy tripod that can bear the weight of the shooting equipment.
Mount the camera securely on the tripod.
zz Using a remote switch (sold separately, =219) or a wireless remote
control (sold separately, =217) is recommended.
FAQ
zzFocusing is not possible (indicated by an orange AF point).
Aim the AF point over an area with good contrast, then press the shutter
button halfway (=54). If you are too close to the subject, move away
and shoot again.
zzMultiple AF points are displayed simultaneously.
If multiple AF points are displayed simultaneously, all of these positions
are in focus. As long as one AF point is displayed on the subject, you can
take the picture.
zzPressing the shutter button halfway does not focus the
subject.
If the focus mode switch on the lens is set to <MF> (manual focus), set it
to <AF> (autofocus).
zzThe shutter speed display is blinking.
Since it is too dark, taking the picture may result in a blurred subject due
to camera shake. Using a tripod or a Canon EL/EX series Speedlite (sold
separately, =220) is recommended.
zzWhen the external flash was used, the bottom part of the
picture came out unnaturally dark.
If a hood is attached to the lens, it may obstruct the flash light. If the
subject is close, detach the hood before taking the picture with flash.
70
Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent
Auto)
Recomposing the Shot
Depending on the scene, positioning the subject toward the left or right
to include a balanced background will result in a picture with better
perspective.
Pressing the shutter button halfway to focus on a still subject will lock the
focus on that subject. Recompose the shot while keeping the shutter button
pressed halfway, and then press the shutter button completely to take the
picture. This is called “focus lock”.
Shooting a Moving Subject
After you press the shutter button halfway and a blue AF point appears, the
camera detects subject movement and focuses using Servo AF. Keep the
subject on the screen as you hold down the shutter button halfway, and at
the decisive moment, press the shutter button completely.
If you prefer to shoot with One-Shot AF, set [z: A Auto servo] to
[Disable].
71
Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)
Scene Icons
The camera detects the scene type and
sets everything automatically to suit the
scene. The detected scene type is indicated
on the upper left of the screen. For icon
details, see =595.
Adjusting Settings by Touching the Screen
By touching icons, you can adjust settings
for drive mode, image quality, Touch
Shutter, and Creative Assist.
72
Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)
Shooting with Effects Applied (Creative Assist)
You can shoot with your selected effects applied.
the <Q> button.
1 Press
zz Read the message and select [OK].
an effect.
2 Select
zz Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select an
effect, then press <0>.
the effect level and other
3 Select
details.
zz Use the <Y> <Z> keys to set it, then
press <0>.
zz To reset the setting, press the <A>
button, then select [OK].
Creative Assist Effects
zz[
] Preset
zz[
] Background blur
Select one of the preset effects.
Note that [Saturation], [Color tone 1], and [Color tone 2] are not
available with [B&W].
Adjust background blur. Choose higher values to make backgrounds
sharper, or lower values to make them blurrier. [Auto] adjusts background
blurring to match the brightness. Depending on lens brightness (f/ number),
some positions may not be available.
73
Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)
zz[
] Brightness
zz[
] Contrast
zz[
] Saturation
Adjust image brightness.
Adjust contrast.
Adjust the vividness of colors.
zz[
] Color tone 1
zz[
] Color tone 2
zz[
] Monochrome
Adjust amber/blue color tone.
Adjust green/magenta color tone.
Set the toning effect for monochrome shooting. Set to [Off] to shoot in
color. [Saturation], [Color tone 1], and [Color tone 2] are not available
with options other than [Off].
oo [Background blur] is not available when the flash is used.
oo These settings are reset when you switch shooting modes or set the power
switch to <2>. To save the settings, set [z: Retain Creative Assist data]
to [Enable].
Saving Favorite Settings
To save the current setting to the camera, press the <B> button on the
Creative Assist setting screen, then select [OK]. Up to three presets can be
saved as [USER*]. After three have been saved, an existing [USER*] preset
must be overwritten to save a new one.
74
Special Scene Mode
The camera will automatically choose the appropriate settings when you
select a shooting mode for your subject or scene.
* <8> stands for Special Scene.
1 Set the Mode dial to <8>.
2 Press the <0> button.
a shooting mode.
3 Select
zz Press the <W> <X> keys to select the
shooting mode, then press <0>.
zz You can also select the shooting mode
by turning the <6> or <5> dial.
oo Cautions on each shooting mode are listed together (=90). Read the
cautions before shooting.
oo The Quick Control screen appears after step 2 when [5: Mode guide] is set
to [Disable]. Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select the shooting mode.
75
Special Scene Mode
Available Shooting Modes in the 8 Mode
Shooting mode
2
Portrait
Page
=77
Shooting mode
4
Close-up
Page
=84
q Group Photo
=78
P
Food
=85
3 Landscape
=79
6
Night Portrait
=86
5 Sports
=80
F
Handheld Night Scene
=87
=81
G
HDR Backlight Control
=88
=82
I
Silent Mode
=89
C
Kids
r Panning
oo You can also set the shooting mode from [z: Shooting mode] after setting
the Mode dial to <8>.
76
Shooting Portraits
The <2> (Portrait) mode blurs the background to make the human subject
stand out. It also makes skin tones and hair look softer.
Shooting Tips
zzSelect the location where the distance between the subject
and the background is the farthest.
The further the distance between the subject and background, the more
blurred the background will look. The subject will also stand out better
against an uncluttered dark background.
zzUse a telephoto lens.
If you have a zoom lens, use the telephoto end to fill the frame with the
subject from the waist up.
zzFocus on the face.
As you focus, make sure the AF point on the face is lit in green before
you shoot. When shooting close-ups of the face, you can set [z: Eye
Detection AF] to [Enable] to shoot with the subject’s eyes in focus.
oo The default setting is <i> (Low-speed continuous shooting). If you keep
holding down the shutter button, you can shoot continuously to capture
changes in the subject’s facial expression and pose.
77
Shooting Group Photos
Use the <q> (Group Photo) mode to shoot group photos. You can take a
picture in which both the people in the front and people in the back are all in
focus.
Shooting Tips
zzUse a wide-angle lens.
When using a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end to make it easy to get
all the people in the group in focus at once, from the front row to the back.
Also, if you place a little distance between the camera and the subjects (so
that the subjects’ entire bodies are in the shot), the focus range increases
in depth.
zzTake multiple shots of the group.
It is recommended to shoot multiple photos in case some people close
their eyes.
oo When shooting indoors or in low-light, hold the camera steady or use a tripod
to prevent camera shake.
78
Shooting Landscapes
Use the <3> (Landscape) mode for expansive scenery or to have
everything in focus from near to far. For vivid blues and greens, and very
sharp and crisp images.
Shooting Tips
zzWith a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end.
When using a zoom lens, set the lens to the wide-angle end to make the
objects near and far in focus. It also adds breadth to landscapes.
zzShooting night scenes.
Shooting with <3> while handholding the camera may cause camera
shake. Using a tripod is recommended.
79
Shooting Moving Subjects
Use the <5> (Sports) mode to shoot a moving subject, such as a running
person or a moving vehicle.
(1)
Shooting Tips
zzUse a telephoto lens.
Use of a telephoto lens is recommended to enable shooting from a
distance.
zzTrack the subject with the Area AF frame.
By default, [z: AF method] is set to [u+Tracking]. An Area AF frame (1)
appears when you press the shutter button halfway. Once the subject is
in focus, the AF point turns blue.
zzShoot continuously.
The default setting is [o] (High-speed continuous shooting). At the
decisive moment, press the shutter button completely to take the shot. To
track the subject and capture changes as it moves, keep holding down
the shutter button to shoot continuously.
80
Photographing Children
To photograph the children running around, use <C> (Kids). Skin tones will
look healthy.
(1)
Shooting Tips
zzTrack the subject with the Area AF frame.
By default, [z: AF method] is set to [u+Tracking]. An Area AF frame (1)
appears when you press the shutter button halfway. Once the subject is
in focus, the AF point turns blue.
zzShoot continuously.
The default setting is [o] (High-speed continuous shooting). At the
decisive moment, press the shutter button completely to take the shot.
To track the subject and capture changes in facial expression and
movement, keep holding down the shutter button to shoot continuously.
81
Panning
If you want to take a picture with the feel of speed and a blurred motion
effect on the subject’s background, use <r> (Panning). If you use a
lens supporting the <r> mode, subject blur is detected, corrected, and
reduced.
Shooting Tips
zzTurn the camera to follow the moving subject.
When shooting, turn the camera smoothly as you track the moving
subject. Aim the AF point over the part of the moving subject where you
want to focus, then press the shutter button halfway and keep holding
it down as you turn the camera to match the subject’s speed and
movement. Press the shutter button completely while moving the camera
to take the picture. Keep tracking the subject with the camera.
82
Panning
zzSet the level of background motion blur.
With [Effect], you can set the level of background motion blur. The [Max]
setting will set a slower shutter speed to increase the background motion
blur around the subject. If the subject blur is noticeable, set [Effect] to
[Med] or [Min] to reduce the blur.
oo For details on lenses compatible with <r> mode, visit the Canon website.
oo With lenses that support <r> mode, the camera automatically corrects
subject blur and (based on the [Effect] setting) adjusts shutter speed,
regardless of the lens IS setting.
oo The AF method can only be set to [1-point AF] or [Zone AF]. By default, it is
set to [Zone AF], with the zone in the center of the screen selected.
oo To prevent camera shake, it is recommended that you hold the camera with
both hands, tighten your arms close to your body, and track the subject’s
movement smoothly to take pictures.
oo This effect is most effective with trains, cars, etc. that move at a constant
speed in one direction.
oo Taking test shots or checking the image by playing it back immediately after
shooting is recommended.
oo By default, <i> (Low-speed continuous shooting) is set. At the decisive
moment, press the shutter button completely to take the picture. You can track
moving subjects by panning the camera as you keep holding down the shutter
button to shoot continuously.
83
Shooting Close-ups
When you want to shoot flowers or small things up close, use the <4>
(Close-up) mode. To make small things appear much larger, use a macro
lens (sold separately).
Shooting Tips
zzUse a simple background.
A simple background makes small objects such as flowers stand out
better.
zzMove in as close as possible to the subject.
Check the lens for its minimum focusing distance. The lens minimum
focusing distance is measured from the <V> (focal plane) mark on the
top of the camera to the subject. Focusing is not possible if you are too
close.
zzWith a zoom lens, use the telephoto end.
If you have a zoom lens, using the telephoto end will make the subject
look larger.
84
Shooting Food
When you want to take pictures of food, use <P> (Food). The photo will
look bright and appetizing. Also, depending on the light source, the reddish
tinge will be suppressed in the pictures taken under tungsten lights, etc.
Shooting Tips
zzChange the color tone.
You can change [Color tone]. To increase the food’s reddish tinge, set it
toward [Warm]. Set it toward [Cool] if it looks too red.
85
Shooting Night Portraits (With a Tripod)
When you want to photograph people at night and obtain a natural-looking
night scene in the background, use the <6> (Night Portrait) mode. Note
that an external Speedlite is required for shooting. Using a tripod is
recommended.
Shooting Tips
zzUse a wide-angle lens and a tripod.
When using a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end to obtain a wide night
view. Also, since camera shake is prone to occur with handheld shooting,
use a tripod.
zzCheck the image brightness.
Note that it is recommended to play back the captured image on location
to check the image brightness. If the subject looks dark, move nearer and
shoot again.
zzAlso shoot in other shooting modes.
Since camera shake is prone to occur with night shots, shooting also with
<A> and <F> is recommended.
oo If you use the self-timer together with an external Speedlite, the self-timer
lamp will light up briefly after the picture is taken.
86
Shooting Night Scenes (Handheld)
Using a tripod when shooting a night scene gives the best results. However,
the <F> (Handheld Night Scene) mode enables you to shoot night scenes
even while handholding the camera. In this shooting mode, four shots are
taken consecutively for each picture, and the resulting one image with
reduced camera shake is recorded.
Shooting Tips
zzHold the camera firmly.
During shooting, hold the camera firmly and steadily. In this mode, four
shots are aligned and merged into a single image. However, if there is
significant misalignment in any of the four shots due to camera shake,
they may not align properly in the final image.
zzFor portraits, use an external Speedlite.
If you are to include people in the picture, use an external Speedlite.
To take a nice portrait, the first shot will use flash. Tell the subject not to
move until all four consecutive shots are taken.
87
Shooting Backlit Scenes
When shooting a scene having both the bright and dark areas, use the
<G> (HDR Backlight Control) mode. When you take one picture in this
mode, three consecutive shots are taken at different exposures. This results
in one image, with a wide tonal range, that has minimized the clipped
shadows caused by backlighting.
* HDR stands for High Dynamic Range.
Shooting Tips
zzHold the camera firmly.
During shooting, hold the camera firmly and steadily. In this mode, three
shots are aligned and merged into a single image. However, if there is
significant misalignment in any of the three shots due to camera shake,
they may not align properly in the final image.
88
Shooting Quiet Scenes
Where silence is needed, you can shoot without beeps such as shutter
release sounds.
Shooting Tips
zzTake some test shots.
It is recommended to take a few test shots in advance, because under
some shooting conditions, lens aperture adjustment may be audible.
oo As you shoot, a white frame is momentarily displayed around the screen.
oo The drive mode can only be set to <u>, <m>, or <l>.
89
Cautions for the <SCN> Modes
q: Group Photo
oo The angle of view changes slightly, due to distortion correction.
oo Depending on the shooting conditions, focus may not be attained for everyone
from the front to the back of the image.
5: Sports
oo Under low light where camera shake tends to occur, the shutter speed value in
the lower left will blink. Hold the camera steady and shoot.
oo Using an external Speedlite will decrease the continuous shooting speed.
C: Kids
oo Using an external Speedlite will decrease the continuous shooting speed.
r: Panning
oo The shutter speed will become slower. Therefore, this mode is not suitable for
any shooting except for panning.
oo By default, <i> is set. Note that <o> cannot be selected.
oo External Speedlites cannot be used. (It will not fire.)
oo Although lens IS is applied to images captured with lenses supporting <r>
mode, the effect is not shown on the screen as you shoot. (IS and subject blur
correction are activated when you shoot, regardless of the lens IS setting.)
oo If the lens does not support the <r> mode, subject blur will not be corrected.
However, the automatic shutter speed adjustment alone will take effect
according to the setting of [Effect].
oo When shooting under bright light such as a sunny summer day or when
shooting a slow subject, the set degree of panning effect may not be obtained.
90
Cautions for the <SCN> Modes
r: Panning (continued)
oo With a lens supporting the <r> mode, subject blur may not be corrected
properly when shooting the following subjects or under the following shooting
conditions.
• Subjects with very low contrast.
• Subjects in low light.
• Strongly backlit or reflective subjects.
• Subjects with repetitive patterns.
• Subjects with less patterns or monotonous patterns.
• Subjects with reflections (images reflected in glass, etc.).
• Subjects smaller than the Zone AF frame.
• When there are multiple subjects moving within the Zone AF frame.
• Subjects moving in irregular directions or at irregular speeds.
• Subjects whose movements are partly irregular. (For example, the vertical
movement of a runner.)
• Subjects whose speed changes dramatically. (For example, right after the
start of movement or while turning along a curve.)
• When you move the camera too fast or too slow.
• When the camera’s movement does not match the subject’s movement.
P: Food
oo The warm color cast of subjects may fade.
oo When multiple light sources are included in the scene, the warm color cast of
the picture may not be reduced.
oo If you use an external Speedlite, [Color tone] will be set to Standard.
oo If there are people in the picture, the skin tone may not be reproduced
properly.
91
Cautions for the <SCN> Modes
6: Night Portrait
oo Tell subjects to remain still for a moment after the flash fires.
oo Focusing may be difficult when subject faces look dark. In this case, set the
lens’s focus mode switch to <MF> and focus manually.
oo Autofocusing at night or in dark scenes may be difficult when points of light lie
within the AF point. In this case, set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF> and
focus manually.
oo Shots will look slightly different from the image as displayed on the screen.
F: Handheld Night Scene
oo Compared to other shooting modes, the image area will be smaller.
oo RAW image quality cannot be set.
oo Autofocusing at night or in dark scenes may be difficult when points of light lie
within the AF point. In this case, set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF> and
focus manually (=48, =51).
oo Shots will look slightly different from the image as displayed on the screen.
oo If you use an external Speedlite and the subject is close, overexposure may
result.
oo If you use an external Speedlite for a night scene with limited lighting, the
shots may not align correctly. This may result in a blurry picture.
oo If you use an external Speedlite with a human subject close to the background
that is also illuminated by the flash, the shots may not align correctly. This may
result in a blurry picture. Unnatural shadows and unsuitable colors may also
appear.
oo Flash coverage angle with an external Speedlite:
• When using a Speedlite with automatic flash coverage setting, the zoom
position will be fixed to the wide (wide-angle) end regardless of the lens’s
zoom position.
• When using a Speedlite requiring manual flash coverage setting, set the
flash head to the normal position.
92
Cautions for the <SCN> Modes
F: Handheld Night Scene (continued)
oo If you shoot a moving subject, the subject’s movement may leave afterimages
or the surrounding area of the subject may become dark.
oo The image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns (lattice,
stripes, etc.), flat or single-tone images, or images significantly misaligned due
to camera shake.
oo It takes some time to record images to the card since they are merged after
shooting. [BUSY] is displayed as images are processed, and shooting is not
possible until processing is finished.
G: HDR Backlight Control
oo Compared to other shooting modes, the image area will be smaller.
oo RAW image quality cannot be set.
oo External Speedlites cannot be used. (It will not fire.)
oo Note that the image may not be rendered with a smooth gradation and may
look irregular or have significant noise.
oo HDR Backlight Control may not be effective for excessively backlit scenes or
extremely high-contrast scenes.
oo When shooting subjects that are sufficiently bright as they are, for example for
normally lit scenes, the image may look unnatural due to the HDR effect.
oo If you shoot a moving subject, the subject’s movement may leave afterimages
or the surrounding area of the subject may become dark.
oo The image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns (lattice,
stripes, etc.), flat or single-tone images, or images significantly misaligned due
to camera shake.
oo It takes some time to record images to the card since they are merged after
shooting. [BUSY] is displayed as images are processed, and shooting is not
possible until processing is finished.
I: Silent Mode
oo Be responsible when using silent shooting, and respect subject privacy and
portrait rights.
oo Images of fast-moving subjects may look distorted.
oo Bands of light may be displayed and stripes from differences in brightness
may be captured in images if you shoot in Silent Mode under flickering light
sources (such as fluorescent lights) or when another camera’s flash fires.
oo Continuous shooting and flash photography are not available.
93
94
Creative Zone
Creative Zone modes give you the freedom
to shoot in a variety of ways by setting your
preferred shutter speed, aperture value,
exposure, and more.
zz To clear the shooting mode description displayed when you turn
the Mode dial, press <0> (=369).
oo Make sure the Multi-function lock feature is off.
95
Program AE
The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture to suit the
subject’s brightness. This is called Program AE.
* <d> stands for Program.
* AE stands for Auto Exposure.
1 Set the Mode dial to <d>.
on the subject.
2 Focus
zz Aim the AF point over the subject and
press the shutter button halfway.
gg Once the subject is in focus, the AF
point turns green (with One-Shot AF).
gg The shutter speed and aperture are set
automatically.
the display.
3 Check
zz As long as the exposure value is not
blinking, standard exposure will be
obtained.
the picture.
4 Take
zz Compose the shot and press the shutter
button completely.
96
Program AE
oo If the “30"” shutter speed and the lowest f/number blink,
it indicates underexposure.
Increase the ISO speed or use flash.
oo If the “1/4000” shutter speed and the highest f/number
blink, it indicates overexposure.
Lower the ISO speed or use an ND filter (sold
separately) to reduce the amount of light entering the
lens.
Differences Between <d> and <A> Modes
oo In <A> mode, many functions, such as the AF method and metering mode,
are set automatically to prevent spoiled shots. The functions you can set
are limited. On the other hand, with <d> mode, only the shutter speed and
aperture are set automatically. You can freely set the AF method, metering
mode, and other functions.
Program Shift
oo In <d> mode, you can freely change the shutter speed and aperture
combination (Program) set automatically by the camera while maintaining the
same exposure. This is called Program shift.
oo To shift the program, press the shutter button halfway, then turn the <6> dial
until the desired shutter speed or aperture is displayed.
oo Program shift will be canceled automatically when the metering timer ends
(exposure setting display turns off).
oo Program shift cannot be used with flash.
97
Shutter-Priority AE
In this mode, you set the shutter speed and the camera automatically sets
the aperture to obtain the standard exposure matching the brightness of the
subject. This is called shutter-priority AE. A faster shutter speed can freeze
the action of a moving subject. A slower shutter speed can create a blurred
effect, giving the impression of motion.
* <s> stands for Time value.
Blurred motion
(Slow speed: 1/30 sec.)
Frozen motion
(Fast speed: 1/2000 sec.)
1 Set the Mode dial to <s>.
the desired shutter speed.
2 Set
zz Turn the <6> dial to set it.
on the subject.
3 Focus
zz Press the shutter button halfway.
gg The aperture is set automatically.
the display and shoot.
4 Check
zz As long as the aperture is not blinking,
the standard exposure will be obtained.
98
Shutter-Priority AE
oo If the lowest f/number blinks, it indicates underexposure.
Turn the <6> dial to set a slower shutter speed until
the aperture stops blinking or set a higher ISO speed.
oo If the highest f/number blinks, it indicates overexposure.
Turn the <6> dial to set a faster shutter speed until
the aperture stops blinking or set a lower ISO speed.
Shutter Speed Display
oo For example, “0"5” indicates 0.5 sec. and “15"”, 15 sec.
99
Aperture-Priority AE
In this mode, you set the desired aperture and the camera sets the shutter
speed automatically to obtain the standard exposure matching the subject
brightness. This is called aperture-priority AE. A higher f/number (smaller
aperture hole) will make more of the foreground and background fall within
acceptable focus. On the other hand, a lower f/number (larger aperture
hole) will make less of the foreground and background fall within acceptable
focus.
* <f> stands for Aperture value (aperture opening).
Blurred background
Sharp foreground and background
(With a low aperture f/number: f/5.6) (With a high aperture f/number: f/32)
1 Set the Mode dial to <f>.
the desired aperture.
2 Set
zz Turn the <6> dial to set it.
on the subject.
3 Focus
zz Press the shutter button halfway.
gg The shutter speed is set automatically.
the display and shoot.
4 Check
zz As long as the shutter speed is not
blinking, the standard exposure will be
obtained.
100
Aperture-Priority AE
oo If the “30"” shutter speed blinks, it indicates
underexposure.
Turn the <6> dial to set a larger aperture (lower
f/number) until the shutter speed blinking stops or set a
higher ISO speed.
oo If the “1/4000” shutter speed blinks, it indicates
overexposure.
Turn the <6> dial to set a smaller aperture (higher
f/number) until the shutter speed blinking stops or set a
lower ISO speed.
Aperture Value Display
oo The higher the f/number, the smaller the aperture opening will be. The
f/number displayed varies depending on the lens. If no lens is attached to the
camera, “F00” will be displayed for the aperture.
Depth-of-Field PreviewM
Press the button you have assigned to depth-of-field preview (using [8C.
Fn III-5: Customize buttons], (=537)) to stop down the lens to the
current aperture setting and check the area in focus (depth of field).
oo The larger the aperture value, the wider the area in focus, from the foreground
to the background.
oo Exposure is locked (AE lock) as you hold down the button assigned to depthof-field preview.
101
Manual Exposure
In this mode, you set both the shutter speed and aperture as desired.
To determine the exposure, refer to the exposure level indicator or use
a commercially available exposure meter. This method is called manual
exposure.
* <a> stands for Manual.
1 Set the Mode dial to <a>.
the ISO speed (=131).
2 Set
zz With ISO Auto, you can set exposure
compensation (=103).
the shutter speed and aperture.
3 Set
zz To set the shutter speed, turn the <6>
dial. To set the aperture, turn the <5>
dial.
(1)
(2)
on the subject.
4 Focus
zz Press the shutter button halfway.
gg The exposure setting will be displayed.
zz Check the exposure level mark <s> to
see how far the current exposure level is
from the standard exposure level.
(1)
(2)
Standard exposure index
Exposure level mark
the exposure and take the
5 Set
picture.
zz Check the exposure level indicator
and set the desired shutter speed and
aperture.
102
Manual Exposure
Exposure Compensation with ISO Auto
If the ISO speed is set to [AUTO] for manual exposure shooting, you can
set exposure compensation (=128) as follows:
Touch the exposure level indicator
[z: Expo.comp./AEB]
Quick Control screen
oo If ISO Auto is set, the ISO speed setting will change to obtain the standard
exposure with the set shutter speed and aperture. Therefore, you may
not obtain the desired exposure effect. In this case, set the exposure
compensation.
oo With the camera set to the <a> mode + ISO Auto + <q> (Evaluative
metering) and [8C.Fn I-7: AE lock meter. mode after focus] set to the
default setting (=529), holding down the shutter button halfway will lock the
ISO speed after focus is achieved with One-Shot AF.
oo When ISO Auto is set, you can press the <A> button to lock the ISO speed.
oo To compare the current exposure to the exposure when you pressed the
<A> button initially with a manually set ISO speed, press the <A> button,
recompose the shot, and check the exposure level indicator.
oo With ISO Auto set and [8C.Fn I-1: Exposure level increments] set to [1/2stop], any 1/2-stop exposure compensation will be implemented with the ISO
speed (1/3 stop) and shutter speed. However, the shutter speed displayed will
not change.
103
Flexible-Priority AE
In this mode, you can set shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed manually
or automatically and combine these settings with your choice of exposure
compensation. Shooting in <t> mode, with control over each of these
parameters, is equivalent to shooting in <d>, <s>, <f>, or <a>
mode.
* <t> stands for Flexible value.
1 Set the Mode dial to <t>.
the shutter speed, aperture,
2 Set
and ISO speed.
zz Turn the <5> dial to select an item to
set. A [6] icon appears to the left of
the selected item.
zz Turn the <6> dial to set the option.
zz To reset the setting to [AUTO], press the
<W> or <Z> key.
the amount of exposure
3 Set
compensation.
zz Turn the <5> dial and select the
exposure level indicator. A [6] icon
appears to the left of the exposure level
indicator.
zz Turn the <6> dial to set the option.
zz To reset the setting to [±0], press the
<W> or <Z> key.
104
Flexible-Priority AE
Combinations of Functions in <t> Mode
Shutter
Speed
Aperture
Exposure
Compensation
Shooting Mode
Available
Similar to <d>
Available
Similar to <s>
Manual
selection
Available
Similar to <f>
[AUTO]
Available
Manual
selection
–
ISO Speed
[AUTO]
[AUTO]
[AUTO]
Manual
selection
[AUTO]
[AUTO]
Manual
selection
Manual
selection
Manual
selection
Manual
selection
[AUTO]
Manual
selection
[AUTO]
Similar to <a>
oo Blinking values indicate that the values set will cause underexposure or
overexposure. Adjust the exposure until the value stops blinking.
oo Slow-sync shooting is not used under low light when you have set up <t>
mode to resemble <f> or <d> mode, even when [Slow synchro] in [z:
External Speedlite control] is set to [1/180-30sec. auto].
oo Values for shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed that are set to [AUTO] are
underlined.
oo You can set shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed to [AUTO] and exposure
compensation to [±0] in steps 2 or 3 by pressing the <X> or <Y> key.
105
Long (Bulb) Exposures
In this mode, the shutter stays open as long as you hold down the shutter
button completely, and closes when you let go of the shutter button. This
photographic technique is called “bulb exposure”. Use bulb exposures for
night scenes, fireworks, the heavens, and other subjects requiring long
exposures.
1 Set the Mode dial to <F>.
the desired aperture.
2 Set
zz Turn the <6> dial to set it.
the picture.
3 Take
zz The exposure will continue for as long
as you keep the shutter button pressed
completely.
gg The elapsed exposure time will be
displayed on the screen.
oo Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an
intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the
camera’s internal components.
oo Long bulb exposures produce more noise in the image than usual.
oo If ISO Auto is set, ISO 400 will be set (=582).
oo When shooting bulb exposures with the self-timer instead of the bulb timer,
keep pressing the shutter button completely (for the self-timer time and bulb
exposure time).
106
Long (Bulb) Exposures
oo With [z Long exp. noise reduction], you can reduce the noise generated
during long exposures (=159).
oo For bulb exposures, using a tripod and bulb timer is recommended.
oo You can also shoot bulb exposures by using Remote Switch RS-60E3 (sold
separately, =219).
oo You can also use Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold separately) for bulb
exposures. When you press the remote control’s transmit button, the bulb
exposure will start immediately or 2 sec. later. Press the button again to stop
the bulb exposure.
Bulb TimerM
You can preset the bulb exposure’s exposure time. The bulb timer eliminates
the need to keep holding down the shutter button during the bulb exposure.
This reduces camera shake.
The bulb timer can be set only in the <F> (bulb exposure). It cannot be set
(or will not function) in any other mode.
1 Select [z: Bulb timer].
[Enable].
2 Select
zz Select [Enable], then press the <B>
button.
107
Long (Bulb) Exposures
the desired exposure time.
3 Set
zz Select the hour, minute, or second.
zz Press <0> to display <r>.
zz Set the desired number, then press
<0>. (Returns to <s>.)
4 Select [OK].
the picture.
5 Take
gg Press the shutter button completely, and
the bulb exposure will start and continue
until the set time elapses.
zz [H] and the exposure time are
displayed on the screen during bulb
timer shooting.
zz To cancel the timer setting, set [Disable]
in step 2.
oo While the bulb timer is operating, if you press the shutter button completely
and let go of it, the bulb exposure will stop.
oo If you keep pressing the shutter button completely after the exposure starts,
the bulb exposure will continue even after the set exposure time elapses. (The
bulb exposure will not stop automatically when the set exposure time elapses.)
oo Changing shooting modes cancels the bulb timer and restores the setting to
[Disable].
108
Shooting
This chapter describes shooting and introduces menu settings on
the shooting ([z]) tab.
109
Shooting Still Photos
zz A M icon to the right of a page title indicates that the function is available
only in Creative Zone <t>, <d>, <s>, <f>, <a>, or <F> mode.
110
Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting
zzShooting 1
=116
=119
=122
=182
zzShooting 2
=123
=222
zzShooting 3
=129
=131
=286
=136
=137
=138
=139
111
Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting
zzShooting 4
=140
=143
=145
=147
=148, 152, 155
zzShooting 5
=159
=157
=161
=163
=165
=171
=202
zzShooting 6
=176
=106
=179
=181
112
Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting
zzShooting 7
=185
=188
=198
=199
=183
zzShooting 8
=200
=201
=216
zzShooting 9
=249
=257
=260
=280
=288
oo When RF lenses without a focus mode switch are used, [Focus mode] is
displayed.
113
Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting
In Basic Zone modes, the following screens are displayed.
zzShooting 1
=76
=116
=122
=182
zzShooting 2
=73
=163
=176
zzShooting 3
=188
=198
=199
=183
oo [Shooting mode] and [AF method] are available in <8> mode.
oo [Retain Creative Assist data] is available in <A> mode.
114
Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting
zzShooting 4
=201
=71
=216
zzShooting 5
=249
=257
=260
=280
oo [MF peaking settings] is available in <8> mode.
oo [A Auto servo] is available in <A> mode.
115
Setting Image Quality
You can select the pixel count and the image quality. JPEG image quality
options include 73, 83, 74, 84, 7a, 8a, and b. RAW image
quality options include 1 and F.
1 Select [z: Image quality].
the image quality.
2 Set
zz To select the RAW quality, turn the
<6> dial, and to select the JPEG
quality, press the <Y> <Z> keys.
zz Press <0> to set it.
oo Number of shots available as indicated by [****] on the image quality setting
screen always applies to a setting of [Full-frame], regardless of the actual
aspect ratio setting (=119).
oo If [–] is set for both the RAW image and JPEG image, 73 will be set.
oo If you select both RAW and JPEG, each time you shoot, the image will be
recorded simultaneously to the card in both RAW and JPEG at the imagerecording qualities that were set. The two images will be recorded with the
same file numbers (file extension: .JPG for JPEG and .CR3 for RAW).
oo b is in 7 (Fine) quality.
oo Meaning of image quality icons: 1 RAW, F Compact RAW, JPEG,
7 Fine, 8 Normal, 3 Large, 4 Medium, 6 Small.
116
Setting Image Quality
RAW Images
A RAW image is raw data output by the image sensor converted to digital
data. It is recorded to the card as is, and you can select the quality as
follows: 1 or F. F produces RAW images with smaller file sizes
than 1.
RAW images can be processed using [3: RAW image processing]
(=325) and saved as JPEG images. (Just as for 1, all JPEG size
options are available for F.) As the RAW image itself does not change,
you can process the RAW image to create any number of JPEG images
with various processing conditions.
You can use Digital Photo Professional (EOS software) to process RAW
images. You can make various adjustments to images depending upon how
they will be used and can generate JPEG or other types of images reflecting
the effects of those adjustments.
RAW Image Processing Software
oo To display RAW images on a computer, using Digital Photo Professional
(hereafter DPP, EOS software) is recommended.
oo Previous versions of DPP Ver.4.x cannot process RAW images taken with this
camera. If a previous version of DPP Ver.4.x is installed on your computer,
obtain and install the latest version of DPP from the Canon website to update
it (=554). (The previous version will be overwritten.) Note that DPP Ver.3.x
or earlier cannot process RAW images taken with this camera.
oo Commercially available software may not be able to display RAW images
taken with this camera. For compatibility information, contact the software
manufacturer.
Guidelines for Choosing Image Quality
For guidelines on file sizes, number of possible shots, and maximum burst
shots, see =583.
117
Setting Image Quality
Maximum Burst for Continuous Shooting
The approximate maximum burst is shown
on the shooting screen and in the lower
right of the viewfinder.
oo If the maximum burst is displayed as “99”, it indicates that you can shoot 99
or more shots continuously. The value starts decreasing once it reaches 98
or less. [BUSY] display indicates that internal memory is full and shooting
will stop temporarily. If you stop continuous shooting, the maximum burst will
increase. After all the captured images are written to the card, you can resume
continuous shooting and shoot up to the maximum burst listed in the table on
=583.
118
Setting Cropping/Aspect Ratio
N
Normally with RF or EF lenses, images are captured at the sensor size
of approx. 36.0×24.0 mm in full-frame shooting, but in cropped shooting,
you can isolate and magnify the center of the image approx. 1.6x (APS-C
size) as if using a telephoto lens, or you can set an aspect ratio to suit your
shooting application before shooting.
For EF-S lenses, a 3:2 aspect ratio in the center is captured, magnified
approx. 1.6x (APS-C size).
[z: zCropping/aspect
1 Select
ratio].
an item.
2 Select
zz Select [Full-frame], [1.6x (crop)], [1:1
(aspect ratio)], [4:3 (aspect ratio)], or
[16:9 (aspect ratio)].
zz With EF-S lenses, [1.6x (crop)] is set
automatically, and no other option is
available.
oo 74/84/7a/8a image quality options are not available when [1.6x (crop)]
is set, or with EF-S lenses.
oo Cropped shooting with the image quality set to 74/84/7a/8a produces
73/83/b/b images, respectively.
oo Shooting with an EF-S lens when [1:1 (aspect ratio)], [4:3 (aspect ratio)],
or [16:9 (aspect ratio)] is set automatically clears the setting and shoots with
[1.6x (crop)] at a 3:2 aspect ratio.
119
Setting Cropping/Aspect Ratio
Setting examples
Y set
U set or EF-S lens
used
W set
120
the picture.
3 Take
zz When [1.6x (crop)] is set or an EF-S
lens is used, an image magnified
approx. 1.6x is displayed.
zz When [1:1 (aspect ratio)], [4:3 (aspect
ratio)], or [16:9 (aspect ratio)] is set,
the image within the black masked is
captured.
Setting Cropping/Aspect Ratio
oo Areas outside the cropped area are not recorded in RAW shooting when
[1.6x (crop)] is set, or with EF-S lenses.
oo The [z: zCropping/aspect ratio] setting is not used as the basis for auto
flash zoom (auto flash coverage adjustment) by an external Speedlite.
oo For details on pixel counts when cropping or an aspect ratio is set, see
=584.
oo Nearly 100% field of view coverage is maintained vertically and horizontally
when cropping or an aspect ratio is set.
oo Aspect ratio information is added to RAW images when an aspect ratio is set,
which are captured at full size. When the RAW images are played back, the
image area used for shooting is indicated by lines. Note that only the shooting
image area is shown in slideshows (=343).
121
Setting the Image Review Time
You can set how long the image is displayed on the screen immediately
after shooting. To keep the captured image displayed, set [Hold]. To not
have the captured image displayed, set [Off].
1 Select [z: Image review].
2 Set a time option.
oo When [Hold] is set, images are displayed as long as the time set in [5:
Power saving].
122
Correction of Lens Aberrations due to
Optical Characteristics
N
Vignetting, image distortion, and other issues may be caused by lens optical
characteristics. The camera can compensate for these phenomena by using
[Lens aberration correction].
[z: Lens aberration
1 Select
correction].
2 Select an item.
[Enable].
3 Select
zz Confirm that the name of the attached
lens and (except for diffraction
correction) [Correction data available]
are displayed.
zz If [Correction data not available]
or [ ] is displayed, see “Digital Lens
Optimizer” (=125).
the picture.
4 Take
zz The image captured will have lens
aberration corrected.
123
Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical Characteristics
Peripheral Illumination Correction
Vignetting (dark image corners) can be corrected.
oo Depending on shooting conditions, noise may appear on the image periphery.
oo The higher the ISO speed, the lower the correction amount will be.
oo The correction amount applied will be lower than the maximum correction
amount that applied with Digital Photo Professional (EOS software).
oo Peripheral illumination is corrected automatically in Basic Zone modes when
correction data is registered on the camera.
Distortion Correction
Distortion (image warping) can be corrected.
oo To correct distortion, the camera captures a narrower image area than the
area seen when shooting, which crops the image a little and slightly lowers the
apparent resolution.
oo Setting distortion correction may change the angle of view slightly.
oo The amount of image cropped may vary between still photos and movies.
oo When you magnify images, distortion correction is not applied to the images
displayed.
oo Images with distortion correction applied will not have the Dust Delete Data
(=161) appended.
oo With RF lenses, distortion correction during movie recording is supported.
oo Distortion is corrected automatically when <8> mode is set to <q> and
correction data is registered on the camera.
124
Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical Characteristics
Digital Lens Optimizer
Various aberrations from lens optical characteristics can be corrected, along
with diffraction and low-pass filter-induced loss of clarity.
If [Correction data not available] or [ ] is displayed by [Digital Lens
Optimizer], you can use EOS Utility to add the lens correction data to the
camera. For details, refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual.
oo Depending on shooting conditions, noise may be intensified together with the
effects of correction. Image edges may also be emphasized. Adjust Picture
Style sharpness or set [Digital Lens Optimizer] to [Disable] as needed
before shooting.
oo The higher the ISO speed, the lower the correction amount will be.
oo For movie recording, [Digital Lens Optimizer] will not appear. (Correction is
not possible.)
oo Enabling [Digital Lens Optimizer] corrects both chromatic aberration and
diffraction, although these options are not displayed.
oo Digital Lens Optimizer is applied automatically in Basic Zone modes when
correction data is registered on the camera.
125
Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical Characteristics
Chromatic Aberration Correction
Chromatic aberration (color fringing around subjects) can be corrected.
oo [Chromatic aberr corr] is not displayed when [Digital Lens Optimizer] is
enabled.
Diffraction Correction
Diffraction (loss of sharpness caused by the aperture) can be corrected.
oo Depending on shooting conditions, noise may be intensified together with the
effects of correction.
oo The higher the ISO speed, the lower the correction amount will be.
oo For movie recording, [Diffraction correction] will not appear. (Correction is
not possible.)
oo With “Diffraction correction”, degraded resolution due to the low-pass filter, etc.
is corrected in addition to diffraction. Therefore, correction is effective even at
an aperture close to the open aperture.
oo [Diffraction correction] is not displayed when [Digital Lens Optimizer] is
enabled.
126
Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical Characteristics
General Cautions for Lens Aberration Correction
oo Peripheral illumination correction, chromatic aberration correction, distortion
correction, and diffraction correction cannot be applied to JPEG images
already taken.
oo When using a non-Canon lens, setting the corrections to [Disable] is
recommended even if [Correction data available] is displayed.
oo Magnifying the periphery of the image may display parts of the image that will
not be recorded.
oo The correction amount will be less (except for diffraction correction) if the lens
used does not have distance information.
General Notes for Lens Aberration Correction
oo The effect of the lens aberration correction varies depending on the lens used
and shooting conditions. Also, the effect may be difficult to discern depending
on the lens used, shooting conditions, etc.
oo If the correction is difficult to discern, magnifying and checking the image after
shooting is recommended.
oo Corrections can be applied even when an extender or life-size converter is
attached.
oo If the correction data for the attached lens is not registered to the camera, the
result will be the same as when the correction is set to [Disable] (except for
diffraction correction).
oo If necessary, refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual as well.
127
Setting the Desired Exposure
Compensation
N
Exposure compensation can brighten (increased exposure) or darken
(decreased exposure) the standard exposure set by the camera.
Exposure compensation can be set in the <t>, <d>, <s>, <f>, and
<a> shooting modes. You can set exposure compensation up to ±3 stops
in 1/3-stop increments.
For details on exposure compensation when <a> mode and ISO Auto are
both set, see =103, and see =104 for <t> mode.
the exposure.
1 Check
zz Press the shutter button halfway and
check the exposure level indicator.
Increased exposure for a
brighter image
Decreased exposure for a
darker image
2 zz Set it by looking at the screen as you
Set the compensation amount.
turn the <5> dial.
gg A <O> icon is displayed to indicate
exposure compensation.
the picture.
3 Take
zz To cancel exposure compensation, set
the exposure level indicator <N> to the
standard exposure index (<C>).
oo If [z: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (=136) is set to any setting other than
[Disable], the image may still look bright even if a decreased exposure
compensation for a darker image is set.
oo The exposure compensation amount will remain in effect even after you set
the power switch to <2>.
128
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)
N
By changing the shutter speed, aperture, or ISO speed automatically, you
can bracket the exposure up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments for three
consecutive shots. This is called AEB.
* AEB stands for Auto Exposure Bracketing.
1 Select [z: Expo.comp./AEB].
the AEB range.
2 Set
zz Turn the <6> dial to set the AEB
range (1). Press the <Y> <Z> keys to
set the exposure compensation level.
zz Press <0> to set it.
gg When you close the menu, the AEB
range will be displayed on the screen.
(1)
Standard exposure
Decreased exposure
Increased exposure
the picture.
3 Take
zz Three bracketed shots will be taken
according to the drive mode set in
this sequence: Standard exposure,
decreased exposure, and increased
exposure.
zz AEB will not be automatically canceled.
To cancel AEB, follow step 2 to turn off
the AEB range display.
129
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)
oo If [z: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (=136) is set to any setting other than
[Disable], the effect of AEB may be reduced.
oo <A> blinks in the lower left of the screen during AEB shooting.
oo If the drive mode is set to <u>, press the shutter button three times for each
shot. When <o> or <i> is set and you hold down the shutter button
completely, the three bracketed shots will be taken consecutively and the
camera will automatically stop shooting. When <m> or <l> is set, the
three bracketed shots will be taken consecutively after a 10-sec. or 2-sec.
delay. When set to <q>, three times the specified number of shots are taken
in continuous shooting.
oo You can set AEB in combination with exposure compensation.
oo AEB cannot be used with flash, Multi Shot Noise Reduction, focusing
bracketing, or in HDR mode.
oo AEB will be canceled automatically if you do any of the following: Setting the
power switch to <2> or when the flash is fully charged.
130
Setting the ISO Speed for Still Photos
N
Set the ISO speed (image sensor’s sensitivity to light) to suit the ambient
light level. In Basic Zone modes, ISO speed is set automatically.
Regarding the ISO speed during movie recording, see =588.
the <B> button (9).
1 Press
zz With an image displayed on the screen,
press the <B> button.
the ISO speed item.
2 Select
zz Turn the <5> dial to select the ISO
speed item.
the ISO speed.
3 Set
zz Turn the <6> dial to set it.
zz ISO speed can be set within ISO
100–40000 in 1/3-stop increments.
zz Select [AUTO] to set the ISO speed
automatically.
zz For details on the ISO Auto range, see
=582.
oo To expand the available ISO speed range from L (equivalent to ISO 50) to
H1 (equivalent to ISO 51200) or H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400), adjust [ISO
speed range] under [z: zISO speed settings] (=133).
131
Setting the ISO Speed for Still Photos
ISO Speed Guide
zz Low ISO speeds reduce image noise but may increase the risk of
camera/subject shake or reduce the area in focus (shallower depth of
field), in some shooting conditions.
zz High ISO speeds enable low-light shooting, a larger area in focus (deeper
depth of field), and longer flash range but may increase image noise.
oo As H1 (equivalent to ISO 51200) and H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400) are
expanded ISO speed settings, noise (dots of light, banding, etc.) and irregular
colors will be more noticeable, and the resolution lower compared with the
standard setting.
oo As L (equivalent to ISO 50) is an expanded ISO speed setting, the dynamic
range will be somewhat narrower compared with the standard setting.
oo If [z: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable] or [Enhanced] (=137), L
(equivalent to ISO 50), ISO 100/125/160, H1 (equivalent to ISO 51200), and
H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400) cannot be selected.
oo When shooting with a high ISO speed, high temperature, long exposure, or
multiple exposure, image noise (rough grain, dots of light, banding, etc.),
irregular colors, or color shift may become noticeable.
oo When shooting in conditions that produce an extreme amount of noise, such
as a combination of high ISO speed, high temperature, and long exposure,
images may not be recorded properly.
oo If you use a high ISO speed and flash to shoot a close subject, overexposure
may result.
132
Setting the ISO Speed for Still Photos
Setting the Manually-Settable ISO Speed Range
You can set the manually-settable ISO speed range (minimum and
maximum limits). You can set the minimum limit within L (equivalent to ISO
50) to H1 (equivalent to ISO 51200), and the maximum limit within ISO 100
to H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400).
1 Select [z: z ISO speed settings].
2 Select [ISO speed range].
the minimum limit.
3 Set
zz Select the minimum limit box, then press
<0>.
zz Select the ISO speed, then press
<0>.
the maximum limit.
4 Set
zz Select the maximum limit box, then
press <0>.
zz Select the ISO speed, then press
<0>.
5 Select [OK].
133
Setting the ISO Speed for Still Photos
Setting the ISO Speed Range for ISO Auto
You can set the automatic ISO speed range for ISO Auto within ISO
100–40000.
1 Select [Auto range].
the minimum limit.
2 Set
zz Select the minimum limit box, then press
<0>.
zz Select the ISO speed, then press
<0>.
the maximum limit.
3 Set
zz Select the maximum limit box, then
press <0>.
zz Select the ISO speed, then press
<0>.
4 Select [OK].
oo The [Minimum] and [Maximum] settings will also function as the minimum
and maximum speeds for ISO speed safety shift (=529).
134
Setting the ISO Speed for Still Photos
Setting the Minimum Shutter Speed for ISO Auto
You can set the minimum shutter speed for ISO Auto.
This can help reduce camera shake and subject blur in <d> or <f>
mode when shooting moving subjects with a wide-angle lens, or when using
a telephoto lens.
1 Select [Min. shutter spd.].
Automatically set
the desired minimum shutter
2 Set
speed.
zz If you select [Auto], turn the <6> dial
to set a slower or faster speed, then
press <0>.
Manually set
zz If you select [Manual], turn the <6>
dial to select the shutter speed, then
press <0>.
oo If a correct exposure cannot be obtained with the maximum ISO speed limit
set with [Auto range], a shutter speed slower than the [Min. shutter spd.] will
be set to obtain the standard exposure.
oo This function will not be applied to flash photography and movie recording.
oo When [Auto(Standard)] is set, the minimum shutter speed will be the
reciprocal of the lens focal length. A single step from [Slower] to [Faster] is
equivalent to a single stop of the shutter speed.
135
Auto Correction of Brightness and
Contrast
N
Brightness and contrast can be corrected automatically if shots look dark or
contrast is too low or high. This function is called Auto Lighting Optimizer.
In Basic Zone modes, [Standard] is set automatically.
[z: Auto Lighting
1 Select
Optimizer].
2 Set a correction option.
the picture.
3 Take
gg The image will be recorded with the
brightness and contrast corrected as
necessary.
oo Noise may increase and clarity may change, under some shooting conditions.
oo If the effect of Auto Lighting Optimizer is too strong and results are not at your
preferred brightness, set to [Low] or [Disable].
oo If a setting other than [Disable] is set and you use exposure compensation
or flash exposure compensation to darken the exposure, the image may still
come out bright. If you want a darker exposure, set this function to [Disable].
oo Maximum burst is lower with [High]. Image recording to the card also takes
longer.
oo In step 2, if you press the <B> button and remove the checkmark [X] for
[Disabled in M or B modes] setting, the [z: Auto Lighting Optimizer] can
also be set even in <a> and <F> modes.
136
Highlight Tone Priority
N
You can reduce overexposed, clipped highlights.
1 Select [z: Highlight tone priority].
an option.
2 Set
zz [Enable]: Improves gradation in
highlights. The dynamic range is
expanded from the standard 18% gray
to bright highlights. The gradation
between the grays and highlights
becomes smoother.
zz [Enhanced]: Reduces overexposed
highlights even more than [Enable],
under some shooting conditions.
the picture.
3 Take
gg The image will be recorded with highlight
tone priority applied.
oo Noise may increase slightly.
oo The available ISO range starts at ISO 200. Expanded ISO speeds cannot be
set.
oo [Enhanced] is not available (not displayed) when recording movies.
oo With [Enhanced], results in some scenes may not look as expected.
137
Setting the Metering Timer
N
You can set how long the metering timer runs (which determines the
duration of exposure display/AE lock) after it is triggered by an action such
as pressing the shutter button halfway.
1 Select [z: Metering timer].
2 Set a time option.
138
Exposure Simulation
N
Exposure simulation simulates and displays how the brightness (exposure)
of the actual image will look.
1 Select [z: Expo. simulation].
2 Set an option.
zzEnable (g)
The displayed image brightness will be close to the actual brightness
(exposure) of the resulting image. If you set exposure compensation, the
image brightness will change accordingly.
zzDuring e
Normally, the image is displayed at standard brightness, so it is easy to
see (E). Image brightness will only be close to the actual brightness
(exposure) of the resulting image while you hold down the button you
have assigned to [Depth-of-field preview] (using [8 C.Fn III-5:
Customize buttons], (=537)) (g).
zzDisable (E)
The image is displayed at standard brightness, so it is easy to see. Even
if you set exposure compensation, the image is displayed at the standard
brightness.
139
Setting the White Balance
N
White balance (WB) is for making the white areas look white. Normally, the
Auto [Q] (Ambience priority) or [Qw] (White priority) setting will obtain
the correct white balance. If natural-looking colors cannot be obtained with
Auto, you can select the white balance to match the light source or set it
manually by shooting a white object.
In Basic Zone modes, [Q] (Ambience priority) is set automatically. (In <P>
mode, [Qw] (White priority) is set.)
the <B> button (9).
1 Press
zz With an image displayed on the screen,
press the <B> button.
the white balance item.
2 Select
zz Turn the <5> dial to select the white
balance setting item.
a white balance setting.
3 Select
zz Turn the <6> dial to make a selection.
oo For [Q] and [Qw] setting instructions, see =142.
140
Setting the White Balance
(Approx.)
Display
Q
Qw
Mode
Auto (Ambience priority, =142)
Auto (White priority, =142)
Color Temperature (K: Kelvin)
3000–7000
W
Daylight
5200
E
Shade
7000
R
Cloudy, twilight, sunset
6000
Y
Tungsten light
3200
U
White fluorescent light
D
Flash
4000
Automatically set*
O
Custom (=143)
2000–10000
P
Color temperature (=144)
2500–10000
* Applicable with Speedlites having a color temperature transmission function.
Otherwise, it will be fixed to approx. 6000K.
White Balance
To the human eye, a white object looks white regardless of the type of
lighting. With a digital camera, the white for color correction basis is decided
depending on the color temperature of the illumination, and then the color
is adjusted with software to make the white areas look white. With this
function, you can take the pictures with natural color tones.
141
Setting the White Balance
[Q] Auto White Balance
With [Q] (Ambience priority), you can slightly increase the intensity of the
image’s warm color cast when shooting a tungsten-light scene. If you select
[Qw] (White priority), you can reduce the intensity of the image’s warm
color cast.
If you want to match the Auto white balance of previous EOS camera
models, select [Q] (Ambience priority).
1 Select [z: White balance].
[Q].
2 Select
zz With [Q] selected, press the <B>
button.
3 Select an item.
Cautions for Setting [Qw] (White priority)
oo The warm color cast of subjects may fade.
oo When multiple light sources are included in the scene, the warm color cast of
the picture may not be reduced.
oo When using flash, the color tone will be the same as with [Q] (Ambience
priority).
142
Setting the White Balance
[O] Custom White Balance
With custom white balance, you can manually set the white balance for
the specific light source of the shooting location. Make sure to perform this
procedure under the light source at the actual location of the shoot.
a white object.
1 Shoot
zz Aim the camera at a plain white subject,
so that white fills the screen.
zz Focus manually and shoot with the
standard exposure set for the white
object.
zz You can use any of the white balance
settings.
2 Select [z: Custom White Balance].
the white balance data.
3 Import
zz Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select the
image captured in step 1, then press
<0>.
gg Select [OK] to import the data.
4 Select [z: White balance].
the custom white balance.
5 Select
zz Select [O].
143
Setting the White Balance
oo If the exposure obtained in step 1 differs greatly from the standard exposure, a
correct white balance may not be obtained.
oo The following images cannot be selected: Images captured with the Picture
Style set to [Monochrome], multiple-exposure images, cropped images, and
images shot with another camera.
oo Instead of shooting a white object, you can also shoot a gray chart or standard
18% gray reflector (commercially available).
[P] Setting the Color Temperature
A value can be set representing the white balance color temperature.
1 Select [z: White balance].
the color temperature.
2 Set
zz Select [P].
zz Turn the <6> dial to set the desired
color temperature, then press <0>.
zz The color temperature can be set from
approx. 2500K to 10000K in 100K
increments.
oo When setting the color temperature for an artificial light source, set the white
balance correction (magenta or green bias) as necessary.
oo If you set [P] to the reading taken with a commercially available color
temperature meter, take test shots and adjust the setting to compensate
for the difference between the color temperature meter’s reading and the
camera’s color temperature reading.
144
White Balance Correction
N
You can correct the white balance that is set. This adjustment will have the
same effect as using a commercially available color temperature conversion
filter or color compensating filter. Each color can be corrected to one of nine
levels.
White Balance Correction
1 Select [z: WB Shift/Bkt.].
the white balance correction.
2 Set
zz Press the <V> cross keys to move the
Sample setting: A2, G1
“■” mark to the appropriate position.
zz B is for blue, A for amber, M for
magenta, and G for green. The image’s
color balance will be adjusted toward the
color in the direction of the move.
gg On the right of the screen, “Shift”
indicates the direction and correction
amount, respectively.
zz Pressing the <L> button will cancel all
the [WB Shift/Bkt.] settings.
zz Press <0> to exit the setting.
oo One level of the blue/amber correction is equivalent to approx. 5 mireds
of a color temperature conversion filter. (Mired: Unit of measure for color
temperature used to indicate values such as the density of a color temperature
conversion filter.)
145
White Balance Correction
White Balance Auto Bracketing
White balance bracketing (WB Bkt.) enables you to capture three images
at once with different color tones. Based on the color temperature of the
current white balance setting, the image will be bracketed with a blue/amber
bias and magenta/green bias. White balance bracketing is possible up to ±3
levels in single-level increments.
B/A bias ±3 levels
Set the white balance bracketing
amount.
zz In step 2 for “White Balance Correction”,
when you turn the <5> dial, the “■”
mark on the screen will change to “■ ■ ■” (3
points).
zz Turning the dial clockwise sets
the B/A bracketing, and turning
it counterclockwise sets the M/G
bracketing.
gg On the right, “Bracket” indicates the
bracketing direction and correction
amount.
zz Pressing the <L> button will cancel all
the [WB Shift/Bkt.] settings.
zz Press <0> to exit the setting.
oo During white balance bracketing, the maximum burst for continuous shooting
will be lower.
oo Since three images are recorded for one shot, it takes longer to record the
image to the card.
oo The images will be bracketed in the following sequence: 1. Standard white
balance, 2. Blue (B) bias, and 3. Amber (A) bias, or 1. Standard white balance,
2. Magenta (M) bias, and 3. Green (G) bias.
oo You can also set white balance correction and AEB together with white
balance bracketing. If you set AEB in combination with white balance
bracketing, a total of nine images will be recorded for a single shot.
oo The white balance icon blinks when white balance bracketing is set.
oo “Bracket” stands for bracketing.
146
Setting the Color Space
N
The range of reproducible colors is called “color space”. With this camera,
you can set the color space for captured images to sRGB or Adobe RGB.
For normal shooting, sRGB is recommended.
1 Select [z: Color space].
2 Set a color space option.
Adobe RGB
This color space is mainly used for commercial printing and other industrial
uses. Recommended when using equipment such as Adobe RGBcompatible monitors or DCF 2.0 (Exif 2.21 or later) compatible printers.
oo If the still photo is shot in the Adobe RGB color space, the first character in the
file name will be an underscore “_”.
oo The ICC profile is not appended. For the descriptions about the ICC profile,
refer to the Digital Photo Professional Instruction Manual (EOS software).
oo In Basic Zone modes, [sRGB] is set automatically.
147
Selecting a Picture Style
N
Just by selecting a preset Picture Style, you can obtain image characteristics
effectively matching your photographic expression or the subject.
In Basic Zone modes, [D] (Auto) is set automatically.
1 Select [z: Picture Style].
2 Select a Picture Style.
148
Selecting a Picture Style
Picture Style Characteristics
zz[D] Auto
The color tone will be adjusted automatically to suit the scene. The colors
will look vivid for blue skies, greenery and sunsets, particularly in nature,
outdoor and sunset scenes.
oo If the desired color tone is not obtained with [Auto], use another Picture Style.
zz[P] Standard
The image looks vivid, sharp, and crisp. This is a general-purpose Picture
Style suitable for most scenes.
zz[Q] Portrait
For nice skin tones. The image looks softer. Suited for close-up portraits.
By changing the [Color tone] (=153), you can adjust the skin tone.
zz[R] Landscape
For vivid blues and greens, and very sharp and crisp images. Effective for
impressive landscapes.
zz[u] Fine Detail
Suited for detailed outline and fine texture description of the subject. The
colors will be slightly vivid.
zz[S] Neutral
Suited for processing the image with a computer. For natural colors and
subdued images with modest brightness and color saturation.
149
Selecting a Picture Style
zz[U] Faithful
Suited for processing the image with a computer. The color of a subject
that is captured in sunlight at a color temperature of 5200K will be
adjusted to match the subject’s colorimetrical color. For subdued images
with modest brightness and color saturation.
zz[V] Monochrome
Creates black-and-white images.
oo Color images cannot be recovered from JPEG images shot with the
[Monochrome] Picture Style.
zz[W] User Defined 1–3
You can register a basic style such as [Portrait], [Landscape], a Picture
Style file, etc. and adjust it as desired (=155). With any of the User
Defined Picture Style that has not yet been set, pictures will be taken with
the same characteristics settings as with the default settings of [Auto].
150
Selecting a Picture Style
Symbols
The Picture Style selection screen has icons for [Strength], [Fineness], or
[Threshold] for [Sharpness] as well as [Contrast] and other settings. The
numbers indicate the values for these settings specified for the respective
Picture Style.
Symbols
Sharpness
g
A
Strength
B
Fineness
C
Threshold
h
Contrast
i
Saturation
j
Color tone
k
Filter effect (Monochrome)
l
Toning effect (Monochrome)
oo During movie recording, an asterisk “*” will be displayed for both [Fineness]
and [Threshold] for [Sharpness]. [Fineness] and [Threshold] will not be
applied to movies.
151
Customizing a Picture Style
N
You can customize the Picture Styles. You can adjust Picture Style
settings such as [Contrast] or [Sharpness] ([Strength], [Fineness], and
[Threshold]). To customize [Monochrome], see =154.
1 Select [z: Picture Style].
a Picture Style.
2 Select
zz Select the Picture Style to adjust, then
press the <B> button.
an item.
3 Select
zz See the next page for details on the
settings and effects.
152
Customizing a Picture Style
4 Set the effect level.
zz Press the <M> button to save the
adjusted setting and return to the Picture
Style selection screen.
gg Any settings you change from default
values are displayed in blue.
Settings and Effects
Sharpness
g
A Strength
0: Weak outline emphasis
7: Strong outline emphasis
1
B Fineness*
1: Fine
5: Grainy
2
C Threshold*
1: Low
5: High
h Contrast
-4: Low contrast
+4: High contrast
i Saturation
-4: Low saturation
+4: High saturation
j Color tone
-4: Reddish skin tone
+4: Yellowish skin tone
*1: Indicates the fineness of the outlines to be emphasized. The smaller the number,
the finer the outlines that can be emphasized.
*2: Sets how much the outline is emphasized based on the difference in contrast
between the subject and the surrounding area. The smaller the number, the more
the outline will be emphasized when the contrast difference is low. However, noise
tends to be more noticeable when the number is smaller.
oo For movie recording, [Fineness] and [Threshold] for [Sharpness] cannot be
set (not displayed).
oo By selecting [Default set.] in step 3, you can revert the parameter settings of
the respective Picture Style to their defaults.
oo To shoot with the Picture Style you adjusted, first select the adjusted Picture
Style, then shoot.
153
Customizing a Picture Style
[V] Monochrome Adjustment
Besides the effects described on the preceding page such as [Contrast], or
[Strength], [Fineness] and [Threshold] for [Sharpness], you can also set
[Filter effect] and [Toning effect].
[k] Filter effect
Filter
With a filter effect applied to a monochrome
image, you can make white clouds or green
trees stand out more.
Sample Effects
N: None
Normal black-and-white image with no filter effects.
Ye: Yellow
The blue sky will look more natural, and the white clouds will look
crisper.
Or: Orange
The blue sky will look slightly darker. The sunset will look more
brilliant.
R: Red
The blue sky will look quite dark. Fall leaves will look crisper and
brighter.
G: Green
Skin tones and lips will appear muted. Green tree leaves will look
crisper and brighter.
oo Increasing the [Contrast] will make the filter effect more pronounced.
[l] Toning effect
154
By applying a toning effect, you can create
a monochrome image in the selected color.
Effective when you want to create more
impressive images.
Registering a Picture Style
N
You can select a base Picture Style such as [Portrait] or [Landscape],
adjust it as desired, and register it under [User Def. 1], [User Def. 2], or
[User Def. 3]. Useful when creating several Picture Styles with different
settings.
Picture Styles that you have registered on the camera using EOS Utility (EOS
software) can also be modified here.
1 Select [z: Picture Style].
[User Def.].
2 Select
zz Select [User Def. *], then press the
<B> button.
<0>.
3 Press
zz With [Picture Style] selected, press
<0>.
the base Picture Style.
4 Select
zz Select the base Picture Style.
zz Also select styles this way when
adjusting styles registered to the camera
with EOS Utility (EOS software).
155
Registering a Picture Style
5 Select an item.
the effect level.
6 Set
zz For details, see “Customizing a Picture
Style” (=152).
zz Press the <M> button to save the
adjusted setting and return to the Picture
Style selection screen.
gg The base Picture Style will be indicated
on the right of [User Def. *].
gg Blue style names indicate that you
have changed the settings from default
values.
oo If a Picture Style is already registered under [User Def. *], changing the base
Picture Style will clear the parameter settings of the previously registered User
Defined Picture Style.
oo If you perform [5: Clear all camera settings] (=410), all the [User Def. *]
settings will revert to their defaults.
oo To shoot with a registered Picture Style, select the registered [User Def. *],
then shoot.
oo Regarding the procedure to register a Picture Style file to the camera, refer to
the EOS Utility Instruction Manual.
156
Setting Noise Reduction
N
High ISO Speed Noise Reduction
This function reduces the noise generated in the image. This function is
especially effective when shooting at high ISO speeds. When shooting at
low ISO speeds, the noise in the darker parts of the image (shadow areas)
can further be reduced.
1 Select [z: High ISO speed NR].
2 Set the level.
zz[M] Multi Shot Noise Reduction
Applies the noise reduction with higher image quality than [High]. For a
single photo, four shots are taken continuously and aligned and merged
automatically into a single JPEG image.
If the image quality is set to RAW or RAW+JPEG, you cannot set [Multi
Shot Noise Reduction].
the picture.
3 Take
gg The image will be recorded with noise
reduction applied.
157
Setting Noise Reduction
Cautions for Setting Multi Shot Noise Reduction
oo If there is significant misalignment in the image due to camera shake, the
noise reduction effect may become smaller.
oo If you are handholding the camera, keep it steady to prevent camera shake.
Using a tripod is recommended.
oo If you shoot a moving subject, the moving subject may leave afterimages.
oo Auto image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns (lattice,
stripes, etc.) or flat, single-tone images.
oo If the subject’s brightness changes as the four consecutive shots are taken,
irregular exposure in the image may result.
oo After shooting, it may take some time to record an image to the card after
performing noise reduction and merging the images. [BUSY] is displayed
as images are processed, and shooting is not possible until processing is
finished.
oo [Multi Shot Noise Reduction] is not available with bulb shooting, shooting
with AEB or WB bracketing, shooting RAW or RAW+JPEG images, or with
features such as long exposure noise reduction, multiple exposures, or HDR
mode.
oo Flash photography is not possible. Note that the AF-assist beam of EOSdedicated, external Speedlites will be emitted according to the [z: AF-assist
beam firing] setting.
oo [Multi Shot Noise Reduction] is not available (not displayed) when recording
movies.
oo Automatically switches to [Standard] if you set the power switch to <2>,
replace the battery or card, switch to a Basic Zone or <B> shooting mode, or
switch to movie recording.
158
Setting Noise Reduction
Long Exposure Noise Reduction
For images exposed for 1 sec. or longer, noise (dots of light and banding)
typical of long exposures can be reduced.
[z: Long exp. noise
1 Select
reduction].
2 Set a reduction option.
zz[AUTO] Automatic
For exposures of 1 sec. or longer, noise reduction is performed
automatically if noise typical of long exposures is detected. This [Auto]
setting is effective enough in most cases.
zz[ON] Enable
Noise reduction is performed for all exposures of 1 sec. or longer. The
[Enable] setting may reduce noise that cannot be detected with the [Auto]
setting.
the picture.
3 Take
gg The image will be recorded with noise
reduction applied.
159
Setting Noise Reduction
oo With [Auto] or [Enable] set, the noise reduction process after the picture is
taken may take the same amount of time as that for the exposure.
oo Images may look grainier with the [Enable] setting than with the [Disable] or
[Auto] setting.
oo [BUSY] is displayed as noise is reduced, and the shooting screen is not
displayed until processing is finished, when you can shoot again.
160
Appending Dust Delete Data
N
Dust Delete Data used to erase dust spots can be appended to images in
case sensor cleaning leaves dust on the sensor. The Dust Delete Data is
used by Digital Photo Professional (EOS software) to erase the dust spots
automatically.
Preparation
zz Use an RF or EF lens.
zz Prepare a solid white object such as a sheet of paper.
zz Set the lens focal length to 50 mm or longer.
zz Set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF> and set the focus to infinity (∞).
If the lens has no distance scale, rotate the camera to face toward you
and turn the focusing ring clockwise all the way.
Obtaining the Dust Delete Data
1 Select [z: Dust Delete Data].
[OK].
2 Select
gg After the automatic self-cleaning of
the sensor is performed, a message
will appear. Although there will be a
mechanical sound of the shutter during
the cleaning, no picture is taken.
161
Appending Dust Delete Data
a plain white object.
3 Shoot
zz Shoot with a plain white object (such
as a new sheet of white paper) filling
the screen, at a distance of 20–30 cm
(0.7–1.0 ft.).
zz Since the image will not be saved, the
data can still be obtained even if there is
no card in the camera.
gg When the picture is taken, the camera
will start collecting the Dust Delete Data.
When the Dust Delete Data is obtained,
a message will appear.
zz If the data is not obtained successfully,
an error message will appear. Follow
the “Preparation” procedure on the
preceding page, then select [OK]. Take
the picture again.
Dust Delete Data
The camera will append the Dust Delete Data obtained to all shots from
now on. Acquiring Dust Delete Data before shooting is recommended.
For details about using Digital Photo Professional (EOS software) to erase
dust spots automatically, refer to the Digital Photo Professional Instruction
Manual.
File size is essentially unaffected by Dust Delete Data appended to images.
oo Dust Delete Data is not obtained when EF-S lenses are used, or when [z:
zCropping/aspect ratio] is set to [1.6x (crop)].
oo If the object has any pattern or design, it may be recognized as dust data and
affect the accuracy of the dust deletion with the Digital Photo Professional (EOS
software).
162
Shooting with the Touch Shutter
Just by tapping on the screen, you can focus and take the picture
automatically.
the Touch Shutter.
1 Enable
zz Tap [y] on the screen’s bottom left.
zz Each time you tap on the icon, it will
toggle between [y] and [x].
zz [x] (Touch Shutter: Enable)
The camera will focus on the spot you
tap on, then the picture will be taken.
zz [y] (Touch Shutter: Disable)
You can tap on a spot to perform
focusing on the spot. Press the shutter
button completely to take the picture.
on the screen to shoot.
2 Tap
zz Tap on the face or subject on the screen.
gg On the point you tap, the camera will
focus (Touch AF) with the AF method
that was set (=188).
gg When [x] is set, the AF point turns
green when focus is achieved, then the
picture is taken automatically.
gg If focus is not achieved, the AF point
turns orange and the picture cannot be
taken. Tap on the face or subject on the
screen again.
163
Shooting with the Touch Shutter
oo Even if you set the drive mode to <o> or <i>, the camera will still shoot
in the single shooting mode.
oo Even if [AF operation] is set to [Servo AF], tapping on the screen will focus
on the image with [One-Shot AF].
oo Tapping on the screen in magnified view will not focus or take the picture.
oo If you shoot by tapping on the screen with [z: Image review] set to [Hold],
you can press the shutter button halfway to take the next shot.
oo To shoot with bulb exposure, tap on the screen twice. The first tap on
the screen will start the bulb exposure. Tapping it again will stop the bulb
exposure. Be careful not to shake the camera when tapping on the screen.
164
Multiple Exposures
N
As you shoot multiple exposures (2–9), you can see how the images will be
merged into a single image.
1 Select [z: Multiple exposure].
a [Multiple exposure] option.
2 Set
zz Select [Enable].
zz To exit shooting multiple exposures,
select [Disable].
3 Set [Multi-expos ctrl].
zzAdditive
The exposure of each single image captured is added cumulatively.
Based on the [No. of exposures], set a negative exposure
compensation. Follow the basic guide below to set the exposure
compensation amount.
Exposure Compensation Setting Guide by Number of Exposures
Two exposures: -1 stop, three exposures: -1.5 stop, four exposures: -2
stops
zzAverage
Based on the [No. of exposures], negative exposure compensation is
set automatically as you shoot multiple exposures. If you shoot multiple
exposures of the same scene, the exposure of the subject’s background
will be automatically controlled to obtain the standard exposure.
165
Multiple Exposures
the [No. of exposures].
4 Set
zz Select the number of exposures, then
press <0>.
zz You can set it from 2 to 9 exposures.
a [Continue Mult-exp] option.
5 Set
zz With [1 shot only], multiple-exposure
shooting will be canceled automatically
after the shooting ends.
zz With [Continuously], multiple-exposure
shooting continues until the setting in
step 2 is set to [Disable].
(1)
the first exposure.
6 Shoot
gg The captured image will be displayed.
zz In (1) on the screen, you can check the
number of exposures left.
zz Pressing the <x> button enables you
to view the captured image (=169).
the next exposures.
7 Shoot
zz Images captured so far are displayed
merged. For image-only display, press
the <B> button repeatedly.
zz Multiple-exposure shooting will end
when the set number of exposures are
taken.
oo Multiple-exposure shooting may not be possible with some lenses.
oo The shooting information for the last shot will be recorded and appended to
the multiple-exposure image.
166
Multiple Exposures
oo The image quality, ISO speed, Picture Style, high ISO speed noise reduction,
color space, etc. set for the first single exposure will also be set for the
subsequent exposures.
oo If [z: Picture Style] is set to [Auto], [Standard] will be applied for shooting.
oo With multiple exposures, the more exposures there are, the more noticeable
the noise, irregular colors, and banding will be.
oo If [Additive] is set, the image processing after taking the multiple exposures
will take time. (The access lamp will light up longer.)
oo In step 7, the brightness and noise of the multiple-exposure image displayed
during shooting will be different from those of the final multiple-exposure
image recorded.
oo Multiple-exposure shooting is canceled if you set the power switch to <2>
or switch batteries or cards.
oo Multiple-exposure shooting ends if you switch to a Basic Zone mode or to
<w/x/y>.
167
Multiple Exposures
Merging Multiple Exposures with an Image Recorded on the
Card
You can select a RAW image recorded on the card as the first single
exposure. The image data of the selected RAW image will remain intact.
Only 1 or F images can be used. JPEG images cannot be
selected. Images you can specify also vary depending on the lens attached.
For details, see the table below.
[Select image for multi.
1 Select
expo.].
the first image.
2 Select
zz Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select the
first image, then press <0>.
zz Select [OK].
gg The file number of the selected image
will be displayed at the bottom of the
screen.
the picture.
3 Take
zz When you select the first image, the
number of remaining exposures as set
with [No. of exposures] will decrease
by 1.
zzImages You Can Select
Lens Attached
RF/
EF lens
EF-S lens
Cropped
Shooting
Selectable Images
Off
RAW images captured at full size
On
RAW images from cropped shooting or taken with an
EF-S lens
–
oo These images cannot be selected as the first single exposure: Images
captured with [z: Highlight tone priority] set to [Enable] or [Enhanced], or
images captured with [z: zCropping/aspect ratio] not set to [Full-frame]
or [1.6x (crop)].
oo [Disable] is applied for [z: Lens aberration correction] and [z: Auto
Lighting Optimizer] regardless of the settings of the image selected as the
first single exposure.
168
Multiple Exposures
oo The ISO speed, Picture Style, high ISO speed noise reduction, color space,
etc. set for the first image will also be applied for the subsequent images.
oo If Picture Style is [Auto] for the image selected as the first image, [Standard]
will be applied for shooting.
oo You cannot select an image taken with another camera.
oo Images captured using lenses incompatible with multiple-exposure shooting
cannot be selected (as the first single exposure).
oo [Select image for multi. expo.] is not available unless a lens is attached.
oo You can also select a RAW image used in multiple-exposure shooting.
oo Select [Deselect img] to cancel image selection.
Checking and Deleting Multiple Exposures During Shooting
Before you finish shooting your specified
number of exposures, you can press the
<x> button to view the multiple-exposure
image so far, check exposure, and see how
the images will be merged.
Pressing the <L> button will display
the operations possible during multipleexposure shooting.
Operation
Description
2 Return to previous The screen before you pressed the <L> button will
screen
reappear.
q Undo last image
Deletes the last image you shot (shoot another image). The
number of remaining exposures will increase by 1.
W Save and exit
Saves shots up to that point as a multiple-exposure image
and exits multiple-exposure shooting.
r Exit without saving
The multiple-exposure shooting will end without saving the
image.
oo During multiple-exposure shooting, you can only play back multiple-exposure
images.
169
Multiple Exposures
FAQ
zzAre there any restrictions on the image quality?
All single exposures and the multiple-exposure image are captured at
your specified image quality.
zzCan I merge images recorded on the card?
With [Select image for multi. expo.], you can select the first single
exposure from the images recorded on the card (=168). Note that you
cannot merge multiple images already recorded on the card.
zzWill auto power off take effect during multiple-exposure
shooting?
As long as [Auto power off] under [5: Power saving] is not set to
[Disable], the camera automatically turns off after approx. 30 min., which
ends multiple-exposure shooting and cancels multiple-exposure settings.
170
HDR (High Dynamic Range) Shooting
N
You can shoot still photos with clipped highlights and shadows reduced for a
high dynamic range of tones even in high-contrast scenes. HDR shooting is
effective for landscape and still-life shots.
With HDR shooting, three images of different exposures (standard
exposure, underexposure, and overexposure) are captured
consecutively for each shot and then merged together automatically.
The HDR image is recorded as a JPEG image.
* HDR stands for High Dynamic Range.
1 Select [z: HDR Mode].
[Adjust dyn range].
2 Set
zz Selecting [Auto] will have the dynamic
range set automatically depending on
the image’s overall tonal range.
zz The higher the number, the wider the
dynamic range will be.
zz To exit HDR shooting, select [Disable
HDR].
3 Set [Effect].
171
HDR (High Dynamic Range) Shooting
Effects
zz[P] Natural
For images preserving a wide tonal range where the highlight and
shadow details would otherwise be lost. Clipped highlights and shadows
will be reduced.
zz[A] Art standard
While the clipped highlights and shadows will be reduced more than with
[Natural], the contrast will be lower, and the gradation flatter to have the
picture look like a painting. The subject outlines will have bright (or dark)
edges.
zz[B] Art vivid
The colors are more saturated than with [Art standard], and the low
contrast and flat gradation create a graphic art effect.
zz[C] Art bold
The colors are the most saturated, making the subject pop out, and the
picture looks like an oil painting.
zz[D] Art embossed
The color saturation, brightness, contrast and gradation are decreased to
make the picture look flat. The picture looks faded and old. The subject
outlines will have bright (or dark) edges.
Art standard
Art vivid
Art bold
Art embossed
Saturation
Standard
High
Higher
Low
Outline
emphasis
Standard
Weak
Strong
Stronger
Brightness
Standard
Standard
Standard
Dark
Tone
Flat
Flat
Flat
Flatter
oo Each effect will be applied based on the characteristics of the Picture Style
currently set (=148).
172
HDR (High Dynamic Range) Shooting
a [Continuous HDR] option.
4 Set
zz With [1 shot only], HDR shooting will
be canceled automatically after the
shooting ends.
zz With [Every shot], HDR shooting
continues until the setting in step 2 is set
to [Disable HDR].
[Auto Image Align].
5 Set
zz For handheld shooting, select [Enable].
When using a tripod, select [Disable].
the picture.
6 Take
zz When you press the shutter button
completely, three consecutive images
will be captured, and the HDR image will
be recorded to the card.
173
HDR (High Dynamic Range) Shooting
oo RAW HDR images are captured in JPEG 73 image quality. RAW+JPEG HDR
images are captured in the specified JPEG image quality.
oo HDR shooting is not possible with expanded ISO speeds (L, H1, H2). HDR
shooting is possible within ISO 100–40000 (varies depending on the settings
of [Minimum] and [Maximum] for [ISO speed range]).
oo The flash will not fire during HDR shooting.
oo AEB is not available.
oo If you shoot a moving subject, the moving subject may leave afterimages.
oo In HDR shooting, three images are captured with different shutter speeds set
automatically. For this reason, even in <t>, <s>, and <a> modes, the
shutter speed will change, relative to your specified speed.
oo To prevent camera shake, a high ISO speed may be set.
174
HDR (High Dynamic Range) Shooting
oo When shooting HDR images with [Auto Image Align] set to [Enable], AF
point display information (=352) and Dust Delete Data (=161) will not be
appended to the image.
oo If you perform handheld HDR shooting with [Auto Image Align] set to
[Enable], image periphery will be slightly trimmed and resolution will be slightly
lowered. Also, if the images cannot be aligned properly due to camera shake,
etc., auto image alignment may not take effect. Note that when shooting with
excessively bright (or dark) exposure settings, auto image alignment may not
work properly.
oo If you perform handheld HDR shooting with [Auto Image Align] set to
[Disable], the three images may not be properly aligned and the HDR effect
may be reduced. Using a tripod is recommended.
oo Auto image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns (lattice,
stripes, etc.) or flat, single-tone images.
oo The color gradation of the sky or white walls may not be reproduced correctly.
Irregular colors, irregular exposure or noise may appear.
oo HDR shooting under fluorescent or LED lighting may result in unnatural color
reproduction of the illuminated areas.
oo With HDR shooting, the images will be merged, then saved to the card,
so it may take some time. [BUSY] appears on the screen as images are
processed, and shooting is not possible until processing is finished.
175
Interval Timer Shooting
With the interval timer, you can set the shooting interval and number of
shots, so that the camera takes individual shots repeatedly according to
your interval until your specified number of shots are taken.
1 Select [z: Interval timer].
[Enable].
2 Select
zz Select [Enable], then press the <B>
button.
the shooting interval and
3 Set
number of shots.
zz Select an item to set (hours : minutes :
seconds / number of shots).
zz Press <0> to display <r>.
zz Set the desired number, then press
<0>. (Returns to <s>.)
zzInterval
Can be set in a range of [00:00:01]–[99:59:59].
zzNumber of shots
Can be set in a range of [01]–[99]. To keep the interval timer on
indefinitely until you stop it, set [00].
176
Interval Timer Shooting
(1)
(2)
[OK].
4 Select
gg The interval timer settings will be
displayed on the menu screen.
(1)
(2)
Interval
Number of shots
the picture.
5 Take
gg First shot is taken and shooting
continues according to the interval timer
settings.
zz During interval timer shooting, <H>
will blink.
zz After the set number of shots are taken,
the interval timer shooting will stop and
be automatically canceled.
oo Using a tripod is recommended.
oo Taking test shots in advance is recommended.
oo Even during interval timer shooting, you can still shoot as usual by pressing
the shutter button completely. Note that the camera will prepare for the next
interval timer shot approx. 5 sec. in advance, which will temporarily prevent
operations such as adjusting shooting settings, accessing menus, and playing
back images.
oo If the next scheduled interval timer shot is not possible because the camera is
shooting or processing images, it will be skipped. For this reason, fewer shots
than specified will be taken.
oo Even during interval timer operation, auto power off is triggered after approx.
8 sec. of inactivity, as long as [Auto power off] under [5: Power saving]
is not set to [Disable]. The camera will automatically turn on again approx.
1 min. before the next shot.
oo Can also be combined with AEB, white balance bracketing, multiple
exposures, and HDR mode.
oo To stop interval timer shooting, select [Disable] or set the power switch to
<2>.
177
Interval Timer Shooting
oo Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an
intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the
camera’s internal components.
oo Setting the lens focus mode switch to <AF> prevents the camera from
shooting unless subjects are in focus. Setting it to <MF> and focusing
manually before shooting is recommended.
oo When shooting over an extended period, consider using an optional household
power outlet accessory.
oo Shooting long exposures or using shutter speeds longer than the shooting
interval will prevent shooting at the specified interval. For this reason, fewer
shots than specified will be taken. Using shutter speeds nearly the same as
the shooting interval may also reduce the number of shots.
oo If the time it takes to record to the card exceeds the shooting interval due to
the shooting functions set or card performance, some of the shots may not be
taken with the set intervals.
oo When using flash with interval timer shooting, set an interval longer than the
flash charge time. Intervals that are too short may prevent the flash from firing.
oo Intervals that are too short may prevent shooting or autofocusing.
oo Interval timer shooting will be canceled and reset to [Disable] if you set the
power switch to <2>, set the shooting mode to <w/x/y>, or use EOS
Utility (EOS software).
oo During interval timer shooting, you cannot use remote control shooting
(=217) or remote-release shooting with a Speedlite.
178
Reducing Flicker
N
If you shoot an image with a fast shutter speed under a light source such
as fluorescent light, the blinking of the light source causes flicker and the
image may be vertically unevenly exposed. If continuous shooting is used
under these conditions, uneven exposures or colors across the images may
result. Anti-flicker shooting enables you to take pictures when exposure and
colors are less affected by flickering.
1 Select [z: Anti-flicker shoot.].
2 Select [Enable].
the picture.
3 Take
zz After setting to [Enable], or when the
light source changes, detect flicker
before shooting by pressing the <Q>
button, selecting [Anti-flicker shoot.],
then pressing the <B> button.
zz The picture will be taken with reduced
unevenness of exposure or color tone
caused by the flicker.
oo With [Enable] set, the shutter-release time lag is longer when you shoot under
a flickering light source. Also, the continuous shooting speed may become
slower, and the shooting interval may become irregular.
oo Flicker at a frequency other than 100 Hz or 120 Hz cannot be detected.
Also, if the flickering frequency of the light source changes during continuous
shooting, effects of the flicker cannot be reduced.
179
Reducing Flicker
oo In the <t>, <d>, or <f> mode, if the shutter speed changes during
continuous shooting or if you shoot multiple shots of the same scene at
different shutter speeds, the color tone may become inconsistent. To avoid
inconsistent color tones, use <t>, <d>, or <f> mode at a fixed shutter
speed.
oo Color tone of captured images may vary between [Enable] and [Disable].
oo Shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed may change when you start shooting
(even with AE lock).
oo If the subject is against a dark background or if there is a bright light in the
image, flicker may not be properly detected.
oo Flicker reduction may not be possible under special lighting.
oo Depending on the light source, flicker may not be detected properly.
oo Depending on the light sources or shooting conditions, the expected result
may not be obtained even if you use this function.
oo Taking test shots in advance is recommended.
oo Detect flicker manually if the screen flickers (as when the light source
changes) by pressing the <Q> button, selecting [Anti-flicker shoot.], then
pressing the <B> button.
oo Flicker is not reduced in Basic Zone modes.
oo Flicker reduction also works with flash photography. However, the expected
result may not be obtained for wireless flash photography.
180
Selecting the Display Speed for HighSpeed Continuous Shooting
N
High-speed display that switches between your shot and the live image
is available when shooting with an RF lens, with [z: AF operation]
set to [Servo AF], and with the drive mode set to <o> [High speed
continuous]. Display is more responsive, making it easier to follow fastmoving subjects.
Select [z:
1 display].
High speed
an item.
2 Select
zz Select [Enable] for display that switches
between each shot and the live image.
oo Images may waver or flicker during high-speed display. This occurs more often
at high shutter speeds. However, this does not affect shooting results.
oo High-speed display is not performed under the following conditions. It may
also stop as you are shooting.
• Shutter speed slower than 1/30 sec., aperture larger than f/11, conditions
that make autofocusing difficult, and flash photography, and ISO expansion
oo [Enable] is available when all of these conditions apply.
• With an RF lens, [AF operation] set to [Servo AF] (=185), drive mode
set to [High speed continuous] (=206), [Anti-flicker shoot.] set to
[Disable] (=179), [Expo. simulation] set to [Enable] (=139)
181
Card Reminder
You can set the camera not to shoot unless there is a card in the camera.
The default setting is [Enable].
[z: Release shutter without
1 Select
card].
2 Select [Disable].
182
Setting Touch & Drag AF
You can move the AF point or Zone AF frame by touching or dragging on
the screen as you look through the viewfinder.
Enabling Touch & Drag AF
[z: Touch & drag AF
1 Select
settings].
[Touch & drag AF].
2 Select
zz Select [Enable].
Positioning Method
You can set how positions are specified by touching or dragging.
1 Set the positioning method.
zz[Absolute]
The AF point moves to the touched or dragged position on the screen.
zz[Relative]
The AF point moves in the direction you drag, by an amount
corresponding to the amount you drag, no matter where you touch the
screen.
183
Setting Touch & Drag AF
Active Touch Area
You can specify the area of the screen used for touch and drag operations.
1 Set the active touch area.
oo Touching the screen when [u+Tracking] is set displays a round orange frame
< >. After you lift your finger at the position to move the AF point to, < > is
displayed and that subject is tracked. To cancel subject selection, press the
<L> button.
184
Selecting the AF Operation
N
You can select the AF operation characteristics to suit the shooting
conditions or subject.
1 Select [z: AF operation].
2 Select an item.
oo If focus cannot be achieved, the AF point will turn orange. If this occurs, the
picture cannot be taken even if the shutter button is pressed completely.
Recompose the shot and try to focus again. Or, see “Shooting Conditions that
Make Focusing Difficult” (=197).
185
Selecting the AF Operation
One-Shot AF for Still Subjects (ONE SHOT)
Suited for still subjects. When you press the shutter button halfway,
the camera will focus only once.
zz When focus is achieved, the AF point will turn green and the beeper will
sound.
zz The focus remains locked while you hold down the shutter button halfway,
allowing you to recompose the image before taking the picture.
zz For details on the continuous shooting speed for continuous shooting,
see =206.
oo If [5: Beep] is set to [Disable], the beeper will not sound when focus is
achieved.
Servo AF for Moving Subjects (SERVO)
This AF operation is suited for moving subjects. While you hold down
the shutter button halfway, the camera will keep focusing on the
subject continuously.
zz When focus is achieved, the AF point will turn blue.
zz The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken.
zz For details on the continuous shooting speed for continuous shooting,
see =206.
oo Depending on the lens used, the distance to the subject and the subject’s
speed, the camera may not be able to achieve correct focus.
oo Zooming during continuous shooting may throw off the focus. Zoom first, then
recompose and shoot.
oo With Servo AF, the beeper will not sound even when focus is achieved.
oo In <A> mode, by default, the camera automatically switches to Servo AF in
response to subject movement. If you normally prefer to shoot with One-Shot
AF, set [z: A Auto servo] to [Disable].
186
Selecting the AF Operation
AF-Assist Beam
The AF-assist beam may fire repeatedly when you press the shutter button
halfway under low light or in similar conditions, to make autofocusing easier.
oo The AF-assist beam does not fire when [z: AF operation] is set to [Servo
AF].
oo The AF-assist beam does not fire when Touch AF is used (when [z: Touch
Shutter] is set to [Disable]).
oo When you are using an external flash unit, either the camera or the flash unit
fires an AF-assist beam as needed. However, only the camera’s AF-assist
beam fires when you are using a Speedlite 90EX, Macro Ring Lite, or Macro
Twin Lite.
oo A small series of flashes is fired even if you set the external flash’s AF-assist
beam emission method in the Personal Functions to infrared AF-assist beam
firing. To disable AF-assist beam firing, set [z: AF-assist beam firing] to
[Disable] (=201).
oo Focus range with the AF-assist beam is generally no more than 3.5 m/11.5 ft.
187
Selecting the AF Method
You can select the AF method to suit the shooting conditions or subject. The
camera attempts to focus on faces of any people in an AF point or Zone AF
frame. In <A> mode, [u+Tracking] is set automatically.
For instructions on selecting an AF method, see =190.
AF Method
: Face+Tracking
The camera detects and focuses on
people's faces. <p> (an AF point) appears
over any face detected, which is then
tracked.
If no face is detected, the entire AF area is used for auto selection AF.
With Servo AF, you can set the initial position for Servo AF (=192). As
long as the Area AF frame can track the subject during shooting, focusing
will continue.
: Spot AF
The camera focuses in a narrower area
than 1-point AF.
: 1-point AF
The camera focuses using a single AF
point <S>.
188
Selecting the AF Method
: Expand AF area (Z)
Focusing uses one AF point <S> and
points above, below, and to the left and
right <w>. Effective for moving subjects,
which are difficult to track with 1-point AF.
Focusing on your preferred subject is easier than with Zone AF.
When Servo AF is used, first you will focus using an AF point <S>.
: Expand AF area: Around
Focusing uses one AF point <S> and
surrounding points <w>, which makes it
easier to focus on moving subjects than
with Z AF point expansion.
Servo AF operation is the same as for Z
AF point expansion.
: Zone AF
Uses auto selection AF in Zone AF frames
to cover a larger area than AF point
expansion, which makes focusing easier
than with AF point expansion.
Prioritizes focusing on the nearest subject. Faces of any people in the Zone
AF frame are also given priority in focusing.
AF points in focus are displayed with <S>.
189
Selecting the AF Method
Selecting the AF Method
You can select the AF method to suit the shooting conditions or subject.
If you prefer to focus manually, see =214.
1 Select [z: AF method].
2 Select an item.
oo In <A> mode, [u+Tracking] is set automatically.
oo In <r> mode, only [1-point AF] or [Zone AF] can be set.
oo Only [u+Tracking] and [1-point AF] are available when 4K movie recording
is set.
oo To set the AF method, you can also access the AF method screen by pressing
the <S> button and then the <B> button.
oo The descriptions on =191–=194 assume that [z: AF operation] is set
to [One-Shot AF] (=186). With [Servo AF] (=186) set, the AF point will
turn blue when focus is achieved.
oo Regarding the Touch Shutter (AF and shutter release by touch operation), see
=163.
190
Selecting the AF Method
zzu(face)+Tracking: c
The camera detects and focuses on human faces. If a face moves, the
AF point <p> also moves to track the face.
the AF point.
1 Check
gg <p> (an AF point) appears over any
face detected.
zz You can choose a face with the <Y>
<Z> keys when <h> appears after
you press the <S> button.
on the subject.
2 Focus
zz Once you press the shutter button
halfway and the subject is in focus, the
AF point turns green and the camera
beeps twice.
gg An orange AF point indicates that the
camera could not focus on subjects.
3 Take the picture.
191
Selecting the AF Method
Tapping a Face for Focus
Tapping a face or subject to focus on changes the AF point to < > and
focuses where you tap.
Even if the face or subject moves on the screen, the AF point < > moves to
track it.
oo If the subject’s face is significantly out of focus, face detection will not be
possible. Adjust the focus manually (=214) so that the face can be detected,
then perform AF.
oo An object other than a human face may be detected as a face.
oo Face detection will not work if the face is very small or large in the picture, too
bright or too dark, or partially hidden.
oo AF cannot detect subjects or people’s faces at the edges of the screen.
Recompose the shot to center the subject or bring the subject closer to the
center.
oo The <p> may cover only a part of the face, not the whole face.
oo The size of the AF point changes depending on the subject.
Setting the Initial Servo AF Position
1. Set [8 C.Fn II-7: Initial Servo AF pt for c] to an option other than
[Automatic].
2. An Area AF frame (1) and AF point (2) are displayed.
(1)
(2)
3. Press the <S> button, then turn the <6> or <5> dial to move the
AF point to the position to focus on. You can also move the AF point by
touching the screen or pressing the <V> cross keys. Pressing the <L>
button will return the AF point to the screen center.
4. Press <0> to set the current position as the starting position for Servo
AF.
192
Selecting the AF Method
zzSpot AF / 1-point AF / Expand AF area (Z) / Expand AF area:
Around / Zone AF
You can manually set the AF point or Zone AF frame. Here, 1-point AF
screens are used as an example.
the AF point.
1 Check
gg The AF point (1) will appear.
(1)
zz With Expand AF area (Z) or Expand
AF area: Around, adjacent AF points are
also displayed.
zz With Zone AF, the Zone AF frame is
displayed.
the AF point.
2 Move
zz Press the <S> button.
zz Move the AF point to where you want
to focus by turning the <6> dial to
move horizontally or <5> dial to move
vertically. (With some lenses, it may not
go to the edge of the screen.)
zz You can also move the AF point by
touching the screen or pressing the
<V> cross keys.
zz To center the AF point or Zone AF frame,
press the <L> button.
zz To magnify display, press the <B>
button. Each press of the <B> button
changes the magnification ratio.
193
Selecting the AF Method
on the subject.
3 Focus
zz Aim the AF point over the subject and
press the shutter button halfway.
gg When focus is achieved, the AF point
will turn green and the beeper will
sound.
gg If focus is not achieved, the AF point will
turn orange.
4 Take the picture.
oo The camera will keep moving the active AF point <S> to track subjects
for Zone AF when Servo AF operation is used, but under some shooting
conditions (such as when subjects are small), it may not be possible to track
the subject.
oo Focusing may be difficult when using a peripheral AF point. In this case, select
an AF point in the center.
oo With [8C.Fn II-6: Orientation linked AF point], you can set separate AF
points for vertical and horizontal shooting (=534).
194
Selecting the AF Method
Magnified View
You can check the focus by magnifying display by approx. 5× or 10×.
Magnified view is not possible with [u+Tracking].
zz Magnification is centered on the AF point for [Spot AF], [1-point AF],
[Expand AF area (Z)], and [Expand AF area: Around] and is centered
on the Zone AF frame for [Zone AF].
zz Autofocusing is performed with magnified display if you press the shutter
button halfway when set to [1-point AF], and [Spot AF]. When set to
other AF methods, autofocusing is performed after restoring normal
display.
zz With Servo AF, if you press the shutter button halfway in the magnified
view, the camera will return to the normal view for focusing.
oo If focusing is difficult in the magnified view, return to the normal view and
perform AF.
oo If you perform AF in the normal view and then use the magnified view,
accurate focus may not be achieved.
oo AF speed differs between normal view and magnified view.
oo Continuous AF and Movie Servo AF are not available when display is
magnified.
oo With the magnified view, achieving focus becomes more difficult due to
camera shake. Using a tripod is recommended.
195
Selecting the AF Method
Notes for AF
AF Operation
zz Even when focus is achieved, pressing the shutter button halfway will
focus again.
zz Image brightness may change during autofocusing.
zz Depending on the subject and shooting conditions, it may take longer to
focus, or the continuous shooting speed may decrease.
zz If the light source changes as you shoot, the screen may flicker, and
focusing may be difficult. In this case, restart the camera and resume
shooting with AF under the light source you will use.
oo If focusing is not possible with AF, focus manually (=214).
oo For subjects at the edge of the screen that are slightly out of focus, try
centering the subject (or AF point, or Zone AF frame) to bring them into focus,
then recompose the shot before shooting.
oo With certain lenses, it may take more time to achieve focus with autofocus, or
accurate focusing may not be achieved.
196
Selecting the AF Method
Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult
zz Subject with low-contrast such as the blue sky, solid-color flat surfaces or
when highlight or shadow details are clipped.
zz Subjects in low light.
zz Stripes and other patterns where there is contrast only in the horizontal
direction.
zz Subjects with repetitive patterns (Example: Skyscraper windows,
computer keyboards, etc.).
zz Fine lines and subject outlines.
zz Under a light source whose brightness, color, or pattern keeps changing.
zz Night scenes or points of light.
zz The image flickers under fluorescent or LED lighting.
zz Extremely small subjects.
zz Subjects at the edge of the screen.
zz Strongly backlit or reflective subjects (Example: Car with a highly
reflective body, etc.).
zz Near and distant subjects covered by an AF point (Example: Animal in a
cage, etc.).
zz Subjects that keep moving within the AF point and will not stay still due to
camera shake or subject blur.
zz Performing AF when the subject is very far out of focus.
zz Soft focus effect is applied with a soft focus lens.
zz A special effect filter is used.
zz Noise (dots of light, banding, etc.) appears on the screen during AF.
AF Range
The available autofocus range varies depending on the lens and aspect
ratio used and whether you are recording 4K movies or using features such
as Movie cropping or Movie digital IS.
197
Focusing on People’s Eyes
With the AF method set to [u+Tracking], you can shoot with the subject’s
eyes in focus.
1 Select [z: Eye Detection AF].
2 Select [Enable].
the camera at the subject.
3 Aim
gg An AF point is displayed around their eye.
zz You can tap the screen to select an eye
for focus.
Eyes to focus on are selected
automatically.
zz Depending on the [Eye Detection AF]
setting, you can choose an eye or face
for focus with the <Y> <Z> keys when
< > appears after you press the <S>
button.
4 Take the picture.
oo Subject eyes may not be detected correctly, depending on the subject and
shooting conditions.
oo To disable Eye Detection AF without using menu operations, press these
buttons, one after another: <S>, <B>, and <B>. To resume Eye
Detection AF, press the <B> button again.
198
Setting Continuous AF
This function keeps subjects generally in focus. The camera is ready to
focus immediately when you press the shutter button halfway.
1 Select [z: Continuous AF].
2 Select [Enable].
oo Enabling this function reduces the number of shots available, because the
lens is driven continuously and battery power is consumed.
199
Setting Lens Electronic MF
N
For RF, EF, or EF-S lenses equipped with electronic manual focusing, you
can specify how manual focus adjustment is used with One-Shot AF.
1 Select [z: Lens electronic MF].
2 Select an item.
zz[
] Disable after One-Shot
zz[
] One-Shot→enabled
zz[
] One-Shot→enabled (magnify)
Manual focus adjustment after the AF operation is disabled.
You can manually adjust the focus after the AF operation if you keep
holding down the shutter button halfway.
After the AF operation, you can keep holding down the shutter button
halfway as you turn the lens focusing ring to magnify the area in focus
and manually adjust the focus.
zz[
] Disable in AF mode
Manual focus adjustment is disabled when the lens’s focus mode switch
is set to <AF>.
oo With [One-Shot→enabled (magnify)], display may not be magnified even
if you turn the lens focusing ring while pressing the shutter button halfway
immediately after shooting. If so, you can magnify display by releasing the
shutter button, waiting for <u> display, then pressing the shutter button
halfway as you turn the lens focusing ring.
oo For details on your lens’s manual focus specifications, refer to the lens
instruction manual.
200
Setting AF-Assist Beam Firing
You can specify how the AF-assist beam is used on the camera or a
Speedlite.
1 Select [z: AF-assist beam firing].
2 Select an item.
zz[ON] Enable
Enables firing of the AF-assist beam, when needed.
zz[OFF] Disable
Disables firing of the AF-assist beam. Set if you prefer not to fire AFassist beams from the camera and external flash units.
zz[LED] LED AF assist beam onlyM
An LED AF-assist beam is fired by LED-equipped external flash units.
If your external flash unit is not LED-equipped, the camera’s AF-assist
beam is fired instead.
oo If an external Speedlite’s [AF-assist beam firing] Custom Function is set to
[Disable], this function’s setting will be overridden and the AF-assist beam will
not be emitted.
201
Focus Bracketing
N
Focus bracketing* enables continuous shooting with the focal distance
changed automatically after a single shot. From these images, you can
create a single image in focus over a wide area by using an application
that supports depth compositing, such as Digital Photo Professional (EOS
software).
* “Bkt.” stands for bracketing.
1 Select [z: Focus bracketing].
[Focus bracketing].
2 Specify
zz Select [Enable].
the number of images.
3 Set
zz Specify the number of images captured
per shot.
zz Can be set in a range of [2]–[999].
202
Focus Bracketing
[Focus increment].
4 Set
zz Specify how much to shift the focus.
This amount is automatically adjusted
to suit the aperture value at the time of
shooting.
Because larger aperture values increase
the focus shift, focus bracketing covers
a wider range under the same [Focus
increment] and [Number of shots]
settings in that case.
zz After completing the settings, press the
<M> button.
zz To save your shots in a new folder, tap
] and select [OK].
[
[Exposure smoothing].
5 Set
zz You can suppress changes in image
brightness during focus bracketing
by setting [Exposure smoothing]
to [Enable], which compensates for
changes in the actual aperture value
(effective f/number) at each focus
position.
the picture.
6 Take
zz Focus at the nearer end of your
preferred focal range, then press the
shutter button completely.
zz Once shooting begins, release the
shutter button.
zz The camera shoots continuously, shifting
the focal position toward infinity.
zz Shooting ends after your specified
number of images, or at the far end of
the focal range.
203
Focus Bracketing
oo Focus bracketing is intended for still photo shooting on a tripod.
oo Shooting with a wider angle of view is recommended. After depth compositing,
you can crop the image if necessary.
oo The following lenses can be used (as of October 2018).
• RF35mm F1.8 MACRO IS STM
• RF50mm F1.2 L USM
• RF28-70mm F2 L USM
• RF24-105mm F4 L IS USM
• EF16-35mm f/4L IS USM
• EF24-70mm f/4L IS USM
• EF100mm f/2.8L MACRO IS USM
• EF180mm f/3.5L MACRO USM
• EF-S35mm f/2.8 MACRO IS STM
• EF-S60mm f/2.8 MACRO USM
oo Set [Exposure smoothing] to [Disable] with the following lenses, because
they may cause changes in image brightness.
• EF100mm f/2.8L MACRO IS USM
• EF180mm f/3.5L MACRO USM
• EF-S60mm f/2.8 MACRO USM
oo Suitable [Focus increment] settings vary by subject. An unsuitable [Focus
increment] setting may cause unevenness in composite images, or shooting
may take more time because more shots are taken. Take some test shots to
decide a suitable [Focus increment] setting.
oo Combining images may take some time when the [Number of shots] setting
is high.
oo Flash photography is not possible.
oo Shooting under flickering light may cause uneven images. In this case,
lowering the shutter speed may give better results.
oo Focus bracketing is not available when the lens's focus mode switch is set to
<MF>.
oo Canceling shooting in progress may cause exposure problems in the last
image. Avoid using the last image when combining the images in Digital Photo
Professional.
204
Focus Bracketing
oo Use of a tripod, remote switch (sold separately, =219), or wireless remote
control (sold separately, =217) is recommended.
oo For best results, set the aperture value in a range of f/5.6–11 before shooting.
oo Details such as shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO speed are determined
by conditions for the first shot.
oo If [z: Picture Style] is set to [Auto], [Standard] will be applied for shooting.
oo To cancel shooting, press the shutter button completely again.
oo [Focus bracketing] switches to [Disable] when the power switch is set to
<2>.
205
Selecting the Drive Mode
Single and continuous drive modes are provided. You can select the drive
mode suiting the scene or subject.
the <B> button (9).
1 Press
zz With an image displayed on the screen,
press the <B> button.
the drive mode item.
2 Select
zz Turn the <5> dial to select the drive
mode item.
the drive mode.
3 Select
zz Turn the <6> dial to make a selection.
zz[u] Single shooting
When you press the shutter button completely, only one shot will be
taken.
zz[o] High-speed continuous shooting
When you hold down the shutter button completely, you can shoot
continuously at max. approx. 5.0 shots/sec. while you keep holding it
down.
However, the maximum continuous shooting speed may become slower
under the following conditions:
When set to reduce flicker:
The continuous shooting speed will be max. approx. 4.0 shots/sec.
206
Selecting the Drive Mode
With Servo AF shooting:
When [AF operation] is set to [Servo AF], the continuous shooting
speed of max. approx. 4.0 shots/sec. will be given priority.
In flash photography:
With EL or EX series Speedlites, the continuous shooting speed will
be max. approx. 2.3 shots/sec.
zz[i] Low-speed continuous shooting
When you hold down the shutter button completely, you can shoot
continuously at max. approx. 2.6 shots/sec. while you keep holding it
down.
When [AF operation] is set to [Servo AF], subject tracking with a
continuous shooting speed of max. approx. 2.6 shots/sec. is given
priority.
zz[m] Self-timer: 10 sec./remote control
zz[l] Self-timer: 2 sec./remote control
zz[q] Self-timer: Continuous shooting
For self-timer shooting, see =209. For remote control shooting, see
=217.
oo During <o> high-speed continuous shooting, the maximum continuous
shooting speed varies depending on the shooting conditions. For details, see
the next page.
207
Selecting the Drive Mode
oo Approx. 5.0 shots/sec. is the maximum <o> high-speed continuous
shooting speed (=206) under these conditions: shooting with a fully charged
battery in One-Shot AF mode at a 1/500 sec. or faster shutter speed and
maximum aperture (depending on the lens), Image Stabilizer off (depending
on the lens), at room temperature (23°C / 73°F), with flicker reduction, and
Digital Lens Optimizer disabled.
oo The continuous shooting speed for <o> high-speed continuous shooting
may be lower, depending on conditions such as these: battery level,
temperature, flicker reduction, shutter speed, aperture, subject conditions,
brightness, AF operation, type of lens, use of flash, and shooting settings.
oo With Servo AF, the maximum continuous shooting speed may become slower
depending on subject conditions or the lens used.
oo With [z: Anti-flicker shoot.] set to [Enable] (=179), shooting under
flickering light will decrease the maximum continuous shooting speed. Also,
the continuous shooting interval may become irregular and the release time
lag may become longer.
oo Even with low-speed continuous shooting, the continuous shooting speed may
become slower depending on the shooting conditions.
oo When internal memory becomes full during continuous shooting, the
continuous shooting speed may drop off because shooting will be temporarily
disabled (=118).
208
Using the Self-Timer
Use the self-timer when you want to be in the picture such as a
commemorative photograph.
the <B> button (9).
1 Press
zz With an image displayed on the screen,
press the <B> button.
the drive mode item.
2 Select
zz Turn the <5> dial to select the drive
mode item.
the self-timer.
3 Select
zz Turn the <6> dial to select the self-
timer.
m (Q): Shoot in 10 sec.
l (k): Shoot in 2 sec.
q: Shoot continuously in 10 sec. for
the specified number of shots*
* To set the number of shots taken
continuously (2–10), select the [Drive mode]
item on the Quick Control screen, press the
<B> button, then turn the <6> dial.
zz Q and k icons are displayed when
the camera is paired with a wireless
remote control (sold separately,
=217).
209
Using the Self-Timer
the picture.
4 Take
zz Focus on the subject, then press the
shutter button completely.
gg To check operation, look at the self-timer
lamp, listen for beeps, or watch the
countdown in seconds on the screen.
gg Self-timer lamp blinking accelerates and
the camera beeps quickly approx. 2 sec.
before the picture is taken.
oo With <q>, the shooting interval may become longer under some shooting
conditions, depending on image quality, use of external flash, and other
factors.
oo <l> enables you to shoot without touching the camera mounted on a tripod.
This prevents camera shake if you shoot still-life or long exposures.
oo After taking self-timer shots, playing back the image (=296) to check focus
and exposure is recommended.
oo When using the self-timer to shoot yourself, use focus lock (=71) on an
object at the same distance as where you will stand.
oo To cancel the self-timer after it starts, either tap the screen or press <0>.
oo Auto power off time may be extended when the camera is set for remote
shooting.
210
Selecting the Metering Mode
N
You can select one of four methods to measure the subject brightness. In
Basic Zone modes, evaluative metering is set automatically.
the <Q> button (7).
1 Press
zz With an image displayed, press the
<Q> button.
the metering mode.
2 Select
zz Use the <W> <X> keys to select the
item shown.
zz Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select the
metering mode.
[q]: Evaluative metering
[w]: Partial metering
[r]: Spot metering
[e]: Center-weighted average
metering
zz[q] Evaluative metering
General-purpose metering mode suited even for backlit subjects. The
camera adjusts the exposure automatically to suit the scene.
zz[w] Partial metering
Effective where there are much brighter lights around the subject due
to backlight, etc. Covers approx. 5.5% of the area at the center of the
screen. The partial metering area is indicated on the screen.
zz[r] Spot metering
Effective when metering a specific part of the subject or scene. Covers
approx. 2.7% of the area at the center of the screen. The spot metering
area is indicated on the screen.
zz[e] Center-weighted average metering
The metering across the screen is averaged, with the center of the screen
weighted more heavily.
211
Selecting the Metering Mode
oo By default, the camera will set the exposure as follows.
With [q] (Evaluative metering), holding down the shutter button halfway will
lock the exposure setting (AE lock) after focus is achieved with One-Shot AF.
In the [w] (Partial metering), [r] (Spot metering), and [e] (Center-weighted
average metering) modes, the exposure is set at the moment the picture is
taken. (Pressing the shutter button halfway does not lock the exposure.)
oo With [8C.Fn I-7: AE lock meter. mode after focus], you can set whether or
not to lock the exposure (AE lock) when focus is achieved with One-Shot AF
(=529).
212
Locking the Exposure for Shooting (AE
Lock)
N
You can lock the exposure when you want to set the focus and exposure
separately or when you are to take multiple shots at the same exposure
setting. Press the <A> button to lock the exposure, then recompose and
take the picture. This is called AE lock. It is effective for shooting backlit
subjects, etc.
on the subject.
1 Focus
zz Press the shutter button halfway.
gg The exposure setting will be displayed.
the <A> button (4).
2 Press
gg A <A> icon is displayed in the lower left
of the screen to indicate that exposure is
locked (AE lock).
zz Each time you press the <A> button,
the current exposure setting is locked.
and take the picture.
3 Recompose
zz When you are to take more pictures
while maintaining the AE lock, keep
holding down the <A> button and
press the shutter button to take another
picture.
AE Lock Effects
Metering
Mode
AF Point Selection Method
Automatic Selection
Manual Selection
q
Exposure centered on the AF point Exposure centered on the selected
in focus is locked.
AF point is locked.
wre
Exposure at the center of the screen is locked.
* In [q] mode with the lens’s focus mode switch set to <MF>, the exposure at the
center of the screen is locked.
213
Focusing Manually
If focusing is not possible with autofocus, you can magnify the image and
focus manually.
the lens’s focus mode switch
1 Set
to <MF>.
zz Turn the lens focusing ring to focus
roughly.
an area to magnify.
2 Determine
zz Press the <S> button to activate
magnified display, then move it to where
you want to focus by using the <6> or
<5> dial or the <V> cross keys.
zz To center the magnified area, press the
<L> button.
the image.
3 Magnify
zz Each press of the <B> button
changes the magnification ratio, as
follows.
1x → 5x → 10x
(1)
214
(2)
(3)
(1)
(2)
(3)
AE lock
Magnified area position
Magnification (Approx.)
Focusing Manually
manually.
4 Focus
zz While looking at the magnified image,
turn the lens focusing ring to focus.
zz After focusing, press the <B> button
or <0> to return to the normal view.
5 Take the picture.
oo Even with manual focusing, you can use the Touch Shutter to take a picture.
215
Focusing Manually
Setting MF Peaking (Outline Emphasis)
Edges of subjects in focus can be displayed in color to make focusing
easier. You can set the outline color and adjust the sensitivity (level) of edge
detection (except in <A> mode).
1 Select [z: MF peaking settings].
[Peaking].
2 Select
zz Select [On].
the level and color.
3 Set
zz Set it as necessary.
oo Peaking display is not shown during magnified display.
oo MF peaking may be hard to discern at high ISO speeds, especially when ISO
expansion is set. If necessary, lower the ISO speed or set [Peaking] to [Off].
oo Peaking display shown on the screen is not recorded in images.
216
Remote Control Shooting
Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold separately) compatible with
Bluetooth® low energy technology enables remote control shooting.
Pairing
To use BR-E1, you must first pair (connect and register) the camera
and remote control. For pairing instructions, see =399.
Do the following after the devices are paired.
the <B> button (9).
1 Press
zz With an image displayed on the screen,
press the <B> button.
the drive mode item.
2 Select
zz Turn the <5> dial to select the drive
mode item.
the self-timer/remote
3 Select
control.
zz Turn the <6> dial to select <Q> or
<k>.
217
Remote Control Shooting
the picture.
4 Take
zz By pressing the <2> button on the
remote control, you can also autofocus.
zz To shoot, press the release button on
the remote control.
zz For detailed shooting instructions,
refer to the BR-E1 instruction manual.
oo You cannot use infrared remote control units such as Remote Controller RC-6.
oo If focusing is not possible with AF, focus manually before shooting (=214).
oo Auto power off time may be extended when the camera is set for remote
shooting.
oo The remote control can also be used for movie recording (=285).
218
Using a Remote Switch
You can shoot by connecting Remote
Switch RS-60E3 (sold separately).
For operating instructions, refer to the
remote switch instruction manual.
1 Open the terminal cover.
the plug to the remote
2 Connect
control terminal.
219
Flash Photography
EL/EX Series Speedlites for EOS Cameras
Using an EL/EX series Speedlite (sold separately) makes flash photography
easy.
For operation procedures, refer to the EL/EX series Speedlite’s
Instruction Manual. This camera is a Type-A camera that can use all the
features of EL/EX series Speedlites.
To set the flash functions and flash Custom Functions on the camera’s
menu screen, see =222.
zzFlash exposure compensation
You can adjust flash output (flash exposure compensation). With an
image displayed on the screen, press the <B> button, turn the <5>
dial to select the flash exposure compensation item, then turn the <6>
dial to set the flash exposure compensation. You can set flash exposure
compensation up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments.
zzFE lock
This enables you to attain an appropriate flash exposure for a specific
part of the subject. Aim the viewfinder center over the subject, press the
camera’s <A> button, then compose the shot and take the picture.
oo Even if you set negative flash exposure compensation (to keep images
darker), bright images may still be captured unless [z: Auto Lighting
Optimizer] (=136) is set to [Disable].
oo You can adjust the flash exposure compensation with Quick Control (=65)
or with [Flash function settings] under [z: External Speedlite control]
(=225).
oo The camera can turn on certain Speedlites automatically when the camera
is turned on. For details, refer to the instruction manual of Speedlites that
support this feature.
220
Flash Photography
Canon Speedlites Other Than the EL/EX-Series
zz With an EZ/E/EG/ML/TL-series Speedlite set to A-TTL or TTL
autoflash mode, the flash can be fired at full output only.
Set the camera’s shooting mode to <a> manual exposure or <f>
aperture-priority AE and adjust the aperture setting before shooting.
zz When using a Speedlite that has manual flash mode, shoot in the manual
flash mode.
Non-Canon Flash Units
zzSync Speed
The camera can synchronize with non-Canon compact flash units at up to
1/180 sec. With large studio flash units, the flash duration is longer than
that of a compact flash unit and varies depending on the model. Before
shooting, confirm that flash is synced correctly at approx. 1/60–1/30 sec.
oo If the camera is used with a flash unit or flash accessory dedicated to another
camera brand, the camera not only may not operate properly, but malfunction
may result.
oo Do not attach a high-voltage flash unit to the camera’s hot shoe. It may not be
fired.
221
Setting the Flash Function
N
With an EL/EX series Speedlite having compatible flash function settings,
you can use the camera’s menu screen to set the Speedlite’s functions and
Custom Functions. Attach the Speedlite to the camera and turn on the
Speedlite before setting the flash functions.
For details on the Speedlite’s functions, refer to the Speedlite’s Instruction
Manual.
[z: External Speedlite
1 Select
control].
2 Select an item.
222
Setting the Flash Function
Flash Firing
To enable flash photography, set to
[Enable]. To disable flash firing or enable
only the AF-assist beam, set to [Disable].
Otherwise, when a Speedlite that supports auto flash firing is attached, the
automatic firing is performed according to the shooting conditions.
For detailed shooting instructions, refer to the instruction manual of
Speedlites supporting auto flash firing.
E-TTL II Flash Metering
For normal flash exposures, set it to
[Evaluative]. If [Average] is set, the flash
exposure will be averaged for the entire
metered scene.
223
Setting the Flash Function
Slow Synchro
You can set the flash-sync speed for flash
photography in <f> aperture-priority AE
mode or <d> Program AE mode.
zz[
] 1/180-30sec. auto
zz[
] 1/180-1/60sec. auto
zz[
] 1/180 sec. (fixed)
The flash sync speed is set automatically within a range of 1/180 sec. to
30 sec. to suit the scene’s brightness. Slow-sync shooting is used under
some shooting conditions, in low-light locations, and shutter speed is
automatically lowered.
Prevents a slow shutter speed from being set automatically in low-light
conditions. It is effective for preventing subject blur and camera shake.
However, while the subject will be properly exposed with the flash, the
background may come out dark.
The flash sync speed is fixed at 1/180 sec. This more effectively
prevents subject blur and camera shake than with [1/180-1/60sec. auto].
However, in low light, the subject’s background will come out darker than
with [1/180-1/60sec. auto].
oo By default, it is set to [1/180-1/60sec. auto]. To use slow-sync shooting in
<f> or <d> mode, set to [1/180-30sec. auto].
oo High-speed sync is not available in <f> or <d> mode when set to [1/180
sec. (fixed)].
224
Setting the Flash Function
Safety FE
To avoid overexposure from the flash
firing during the day or at close range, the
camera can automatically lower the ISO
speed and shoot with standard subject
exposure when set to ISO Auto.
Flash Function Settings
The information displayed, position of display, and available options
vary depending on the Speedlite model, its Custom Function settings,
the flash mode, and other factors. For details on the Speedlite’s functions,
refer to the Speedlite’s Instruction Manual.
Sample display
(2)
(1)
(3)
(4)
(6)
(5)
(1)
(2)
(3)
Flash mode
Wireless functions /
Firing ratio control
Flash zoom (Flash coverage)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Shutter synchronization
Flash exposure compensation
Flash exposure bracketing
oo Functions are limited when using EX series Speedlites that are not compatible
with flash function settings.
225
Setting the Flash Function
zzFlash mode
You can select the flash mode to suit your desired flash photography.
[E-TTL II flash metering] is the standard
mode of EL/EX series Speedlites for
automatic flash photography.
[Manual flash] is for setting the Speedlite’s
[Flash output level] yourself.
[CSP] (continuous shooting priority mode) automatically decreases flash
output by one stop and increases ISO speed by one stop. Useful in
continuous shooting, and helps conserve flash battery power.
Regarding other flash modes, refer to the Instruction Manual of a Speedlite
compatible with the respective flash mode.
oo Adjust exposure compensation (=128) as needed in case of overexposure
from flash photography with [CSP] in [t], [s], or [a] mode.
oo With [CSP], ISO speed is automatically set to [Auto]. [Safety FE] is also set
to [Enable] automatically. After canceling [CSP], check the ISO speed and
[Safety FE] setting.
226
Setting the Flash Function
zzWireless functions / Firing ratio control
Wireless (multiple) flash photography is
possible with radio or optical transmission.
For details on wireless flash, refer to
the Instruction Manual of a Speedlite
compatible with wireless flash photography.
With a macro flash (MR-14EX II, etc.)
compatible with flash function settings, you
can set the firing ratio between flash tubes
or flash heads A and B, or use wireless
flash with additional receiver units.
For details on firing ratio control, refer to
the macro flash’s Instruction Manual.
zzFlash zoom (Flash coverage)
With Speedlites having a zooming flash
head, you can set the flash coverage.
Normally, set this to [AUTO] so that the
camera will automatically set the flash
coverage to match the lens focal length.
227
Setting the Flash Function
zzShutter synchronization
Normally, set this to [First-curtain
synchronization] so that the flash fires
immediately after the exposure starts.
If [Second-curtain synchronization] is set, the flash will be fired right
before the shutter closes. When this is combined with a slow shutter speed,
you can create a trail of light such as from car headlights at night with a
more natural feel. When second-curtain synchronization is set together with
[E-TTL II flash metering], the flash will be fired twice in a row: once when
you press the shutter button completely and once right before the end of the
exposure.
If [High-speed synchronization] is set, the flash can be used at all shutter
speeds. This is effective when you want to shoot with background blur (open
aperture) in locations such as outdoors in daylight.
oo When using second-curtain synchronization, set the shutter speed to
1/80 sec. or slower. If the shutter speed is 1/90 sec. or faster, first-curtain
synchronization will be applied automatically even if [Second-curtain
synchronization] is set.
228
Setting the Flash Function
zzFlash exposure compensation
You can set flash exposure compensation
up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments.
For details, refer to the Speedlite’s
Instruction Manual.
oo If flash exposure compensation is set with the Speedlite, you cannot set the
flash exposure compensation with the camera. If it is set with both the camera
and Speedlite, the Speedlite’s setting overrides the camera’s.
zzFlash exposure bracketing
While changing the flash output
automatically, three shots will be taken.
For details, refer to the Instruction Manual
of a Speedlite equipped with flash exposure
bracketing.
229
Setting the Flash Function
Flash Custom Function Settings
For details on the Speedlite’s Custom Functions, refer to the Speedlite’s (sold
separately) Instruction Manual.
1 Select [Flash C.Fn settings].
the desired functions.
2 Set
zz Select the number.
zz Select an item.
oo With an EL/EX series Speedlite, the Speedlite will always fire at full output if
the [Flash metering mode] Custom Function is set to [TTL] (autoflash).
oo The Speedlite’s Personal Function (P.Fn) cannot be set or canceled on the
camera’s [z: External Speedlite control] screen. Set it directly on the
Speedlite.
Clearing Flash Function Settings / Flash C.Fn Settings
1 Select [Clear settings].
the settings to be cleared.
2 Select
zz Select [Clear flash settings] or [Clear
all Speedlite C.Fn’s].
zz On the confirmation dialog, select [OK].
Then the flash settings or Custom
Function settings will all be cleared.
230
General Notes on Still Photo Shooting
Information Display
For details on the icons displayed for still photo shooting, see =591.
oo When <g> is displayed in white, it indicates that the image is displayed at
the brightness level closely matching that of the actual image to be captured.
oo If <g> is blinking, it indicates that the image is displayed at a brightness
that differs from the actual shooting result because of low- or bright-light
conditions. However, the actual image recorded will reflect the exposure
setting. Note that the noise may be more noticeable than the actual image
recorded.
oo Exposure simulation may not be performed under some shooting settings.
The <g> icon and histogram will be displayed in gray. The image will be
displayed on the screen at the standard brightness. The histogram may not be
properly displayed in low- or bright-light conditions.
oo The histogram can be displayed when [z: Expo. simulation] is set to
[Enable] (=139).
231
General Notes on Still Photo Shooting
oo Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an
intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the
camera’s internal components.
oo Defocused image areas may be incomplete when shooting near maximum
aperture at high shutter speeds. If you dislike the appearance of defocused
image areas, shooting as follows may give better results.
• Lower the shutter speed.
• Increase the aperture value.
Image Quality
oo When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (such as dots of light and banding)
may become noticeable.
oo Shooting in high temperatures may cause noise and irregular colors in the
image.
oo Frequent shooting over an extended period may cause the camera’s internal
temperature to rise and affect image quality. When you are not shooting,
always turn off the camera.
oo If you shoot a long exposure while the camera’s internal temperature is high,
image quality may decline. Stop shooting and wait a few minutes before
shooting again.
White <s> and Red <E> Internal Temperature Warning Icons
oo If the camera’s internal temperature rises from extended shooting or use in hot
environments, a white <s> or red <E> icon will appear.
oo The white <s> icon indicates that the image quality of still photos will decline.
Stop shooting for a while and allow the camera to cool down.
oo The red <E> icon indicates that shooting will soon end automatically.
Shooting will not be possible again until the camera cools down internally, so
stop shooting temporarily or turn off the camera and let it cool down a while.
oo Shooting in hot environments over extended periods will cause the white <s>
or red <E> icon to appear sooner. When you are not shooting, always turn off
the camera.
oo If the camera’s internal temperature is high, the quality of images shot with
a high ISO speed or long exposure may decline even before the white <s>
icon is displayed.
Shooting Results
oo If you take the picture in magnified view, the exposure may not come out as
desired. Return to the normal view before taking the picture.
oo Even if you take the picture in magnified view, the image will be captured with
the image area of the normal view.
232
General Notes on Still Photo Shooting
Images and Display
oo Under low- or bright-light conditions, the displayed image may not reflect the
brightness of the captured image.
oo Under low light, noise may be noticeable in image display even at low ISO
speeds, but there will be less noise in your shots, because image quality
varies between display and captured images.
oo The screen or exposure value may flicker if the light source (lighting) changes.
In this case, stop shooting temporarily and resume under the light source you
will use.
oo Pointing the camera at different direction may momentarily prevent correct
display of brightness. Wait until the brightness level stabilizes before shooting.
oo If there is a very bright light source in the image, the bright area may appear
black on the screen. However, the actual captured image will correctly show
the bright area.
oo In low light, if you set the [5: Disp. brightness] to a bright setting, noise
or irregular colors may appear in the image. However, the noise or irregular
colors will not be recorded in the captured image.
oo When you magnify the image, the image sharpness may look more
pronounced than in the actual image.
Lens
oo If the attached lens has an Image Stabilizer and you set the Image Stabilizer
(IS) switch to <1>, the Image Stabilizer will operate at all times even if
you do not press the shutter button halfway. The Image Stabilizer consumes
battery power and may decrease the number of possible shots depending on
the shooting conditions. When the Image Stabilizer is not necessary, such as
when using a tripod, it is recommended that you set the IS switch to <2>.
oo With EF lenses, focus preset during shooting is only available when using
(super) telephoto lenses equipped with this function released in and after the
second half of 2011.
233
General Notes on Still Photo Shooting
oo The image’s field of view coverage is approx. 100% (with image quality set to
JPEG 73).
oo If the camera is idle over an extended period, the screen will turn off
automatically after the time set in [Display off] or [Viewfinder off] under [5:
Power saving]. The camera then turns off automatically after the time set in
[Auto power off] (=372).
oo With the HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold separately), you can display the image
on a television (=308). Note that no sound will be output.
234
Recording Movies
For movie recording, set the Mode dial to <k>.
zz A M icon to the right of a page title indicates that the function is available
only for manual exposure recording (=241).
oo You can record movies by pressing the movie shooting button during still
photo shooting.
oo You can also specify movie recording mode from [z: Shooting mode] after
setting the Mode dial to <k>.
235
Tab Menus: Movie Recording
zzShooting 1
=239
=249
=256
=257
=260
zzShooting 2
=285
=262
=285
=274
zzShooting 3
=128
=286
=136
=287
=288
=138
=289
236
Tab Menus: Movie Recording
zzShooting 4
=142
=143
=145
=148
=157
=290
zzShooting 5
=188
=280
=198
=183
zzShooting 6
=200
=282
=283
=216
oo When RF lenses without a focus mode switch are used, [Focus mode] is
displayed.
237
Tab Menus: Movie Recording
In [u] mode, the following screens are displayed.
zzShooting 1
=239
=257
zzShooting 2
=285
=274
zzShooting 3
=188
=280
=198
=183
238
Recording Movies
k Autoexposure Recording
Autoexposure control will take effect to suit the scene’s current brightness.
1 Set the Mode dial to <k>.
2 Press <0>.
[k].
3 Select
zz Use the <W> <X> keys to select [k
(Movie auto exposure)], then press
<0>.
zz Selection is also possible by turning the
<6> or <5> dial.
on the subject.
4 Focus
zz Before recording a movie, focus with
AF or manual focus (=190–=197,
=214).
zz By default, [z: Movie Servo AF] is set
to [Enable] so that the camera always
keeps focusing (=280).
zz When you press the shutter button
halfway, the camera will focus with the
current AF method.
239
Recording Movies
the movie.
5 Record
zz Press the movie shooting button to start
(1)
recording a movie.
gg While the movie is being recorded, the
“oREC” mark (1) will be displayed on
the upper right of the screen.
gg Sound is recorded by the microphones
at the positions indicated (2).
zz To stop recording the movie, press the
movie shooting button again.
(2)
oo The Quick Control screen appears after step 2 when [5: Mode guide] is set
to [Disable]. Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select [k].
oo You can lock the exposure (AE lock) by pressing the <A> button. After
applying AE lock during movie recording, you can cancel it by pressing the
<S> button. (AE lock setting is retained until you press the <S> button.)
oo Exposure compensation can be set in a range of up to ±3 stops.
oo ISO speed, shutter speed, and aperture are not recorded in movie Exif
information.
oo The camera is compatible with Speedlite functionality to activate the LED light
automatically under low light when recording movies with auto exposure. For
details, refer to the Instruction Manual of the Speedlite equipped with an LED
light.
ISO Speed in [k] Mode
ISO speed is set automatically. For details on the ISO speed, see =588.
240
Recording Movies
M Manual Exposure Recording
You can manually set the shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed for movie
recording.
1 Set the Mode dial to <k>.
2 Press <0>.
[M].
3 Select
zz Use the <W> <X> keys to select [M
(Movie manual exposure)], then press
<0>.
zz Selection is also possible by turning the
<6> or <5> dial.
the ISO speed.
4 Set
zz Press the <B> button.
zz Turn the <5> dial to select the ISO
speed item.
zz Turn the <6> dial to set it.
241
Recording Movies
the shutter speed (1) and
5 Set
aperture (2).
zz Press the shutter button halfway and
check the exposure level indicator.
zz To set the shutter speed, turn the <6>
dial. To set the aperture, turn the <5>
dial.
zz Shutter speed can be set in a range of
1/4000–1/8 sec.
(1)
(2)
and record the movie.
6 Focus
zz The procedure is the same as steps 4
and 5 for “Autoexposure Recording”
(=239–=240).
oo The Quick Control screen appears after step 2 when [5: Mode guide] is set
to [Disable]. Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select [M].
242
Recording Movies
oo For movie recording, the ISO speed cannot be expanded to L (equivalent to
ISO 50).
oo When switching from still photo shooting to movie recording, check the camera
settings again before recording movies.
oo During movie recording, avoid changing the shutter speed or aperture. Doing
so may record the changes in the exposure or create more noise at high ISO
speeds.
oo When recording a movie of a moving subject, a shutter speed of approx. 1/25
sec. to 1/125 sec. is recommended. The faster the shutter speed, the less
smooth the subject’s movement will look.
oo If you change the shutter speed while recording under fluorescent or LED
lighting, image flicker may be recorded.
oo With ISO Auto, exposure compensation can be set in a range of ±3 stops.
oo When ISO Auto is set, you can press the <A> button to lock the ISO speed.
After locking the ISO speed during movie recording, you can cancel it by
pressing the <S> button. (ISO speed lock is maintained until you press the
<S> button.)
oo If you press the <A> button and recompose the shot, you can see the
exposure level difference on the exposure level indicator compared to when
the <A> button was pressed.
oo With the camera ready to shoot in the [M] mode, you can display the
histogram by pressing the <B> button.
ISO Speed in [M] Mode
You can set the ISO speed manually or select [AUTO] to set it automatically.
For details on the ISO speed, see =589.
243
Recording Movies
Still Photo Shooting
Still photos cannot be taken in movie recording mode. To shoot still
photos, turn the Mode dial to switch to another shooting mode.
Information Display (Movie Recording)
For details on the icons displayed for movie recording, see =593.
244
Recording Movies
Cautions for Movie Recording
oo Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an
intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the
camera’s internal components.
oo If you shoot something that has fine detail, moire or false colors may result.
oo If <Q> or <Qw> is set and the ISO speed or aperture changes during
movie recording, the white balance may also change.
oo If you record a movie under fluorescent or LED lighting, the movie image may
flicker.
oo If you perform AF with a USM lens during movie recording in low light,
horizontal banding noise may be recorded in the movie. The same type of
noise may occur if you focus manually with certain lenses equipped with an
electronic focusing ring.
oo Shooting a few test movies is recommended if you intend to perform zooming
during movie recording. Zooming as you record movies may cause exposure
changes or lens sounds to be recorded, an uneven audio level, or loss of
focus.
oo Large aperture values may delay or prevent accurate focusing.
oo During movie recording, if you perform AF, any of the following may occur:
The focus is temporarily greatly thrown off, changes in movie brightness is
recorded, the movie recording stops momentarily, and the mechanical sound
of the lens is recorded.
oo Avoid covering the built-in microphones (=240) with your fingers or other
objects.
oo “General Movie Recording Cautions” are on =291–=292.
oo If necessary, also read “General Notes on Still Photo Shooting” on
=231–=234.
245
Recording Movies
Notes for Movie Recording
oo Each time you record a movie, a new movie file is created on the card.
oo The movie’s field of view coverage for recording 4K, Full HD, and HD movies
is approx. 100%.
oo You can also focus by pressing the <p> button.
oo To enable starting or stopping movie recording by pressing the shutter button
completely, set [Fully-press] for [5: Shutter btn function for movies] to
[Start/stop mov rec].
oo Stereo sound is recorded by the camera’s built-in microphone (=240).
oo Any external microphones such as Directional Stereo Microphone DM-E1 (sold
separately) connected to the camera’s external microphone IN terminal are
used instead of the built-in microphones (=258).
oo Most external microphones equipped with a 3.5 mm diameter mini plug can be
used.
oo With EF lenses, focus preset during movie recording is available when using
(super) telephoto lenses equipped with this function released in and after the
second half of 2011.
oo YCbCr 4:2:0 (8-bit) color sampling and the Rec. ITU-R BT.709 color space are
used for 4K, Full HD, and HD movies.
246
Recording HDR Movies
You can record high dynamic range movies that retain detail in highlights of
high-contrast scenes.
1 Set the Mode dial to <k>.
2 Press <0>.
[u].
3 Select
zz Use the <W> <X> keys to select [u
(HDR Movie)], then press <0>.
zz Selection is also possible by turning the
<6> or <5> dial.
an HDR movie.
4 Record
zz Record the movie in the same way as
normal movie recording.
zz For details on file sizes and the
recording time available, see the table
on =586.
247
Recording HDR Movies
oo [z: Movie cropping] is not available.
oo Since multiple frames are merged to create an HDR movie, certain parts of
the movie may look distorted. During handheld recording, camera shake may
make the distortion look more noticeable. Using a tripod is recommended.
Note that even if a tripod is used for recording, afterimages or noise may
become more noticeable when the HDR movie is played back frame-by-frame
or in slow-motion compared to normal playback.
oo Image color and brightness may change significantly for a moment if you
change settings for HDR movie recording. Also, the movie will not be updated
for a moment, and the frame stops momentarily. Be aware of this when
recording movies to external devices via HDMI.
oo The recording size is L6X (NTSC) or L5X (PAL). Note that
movies are recorded in HD when EF-S lenses are used.
oo ISO speed is set automatically when you record HDR movies.
248
Setting the Movie Recording Size
Under the [z: Movie rec. size] tab,
set the image size, frame rate, and
compression method. The movie will be
recorded as an MP4 file.
The frame rate displayed on the [Movie
rec. size] screen switches automatically
depending on the [5: Video system]
setting (=378).
oo The card’s writing and reading speeds required for recording movies
(card performance requirements) vary depending on the movie recording
size. Before recording movies, see =585 to check the performance
requirements of the card.
Image Size
zz[H] 3840×2160
The movie is recorded in 4K quality. The aspect ratio is 16:9.
Not available unless the Mode dial is set to <k>.
zz[L] 1920×1080
The movie will be recorded in Full High-Definition (Full HD) quality. The
aspect ratio is 16:9.
zz[w] 1280×720
The movie is recorded in High-Definition (HD) quality. The aspect ratio is
16:9.
249
Setting the Movie Recording Size
oo If you change the [5: Video system] setting, also set [z: Movie rec. size]
again.
oo Normal playback of 4K and L8/7 movies may not be possible on
other devices, because playback is processing-intensive.
oo Clarity and noise vary slightly depending on movie recording size, cropped
shooting settings, and the lens used.
oo Movies cannot be recorded in VGA quality.
4K Movie Recording
zz Recording 4K movies requires a high-performance card. For details, see
“Cards that Can Record Movies” on =585.
zz Recording 4K movies greatly increases the processing load, which may
cause the camera’s internal temperature to increase faster or become
higher than for regular movies. If a red E icon appears during movie
recording, the card may be hot, so stop recording the movie and let
the camera cool down before removing the card. (Do not remove the
card immediately.)
zz From a 4K movie, you can select any frame to save as an approx.
8.3-megapixel (3840×2160) JPEG still image to the card (=306).
oo Contrast detection is used to focus when recording 4K movies. Focusing may
take longer than when recording HD or Full HD movies.
250
Setting the Movie Recording Size
Movie-Recording Coverage
Image sensor coverage for movies varies depending on movie recording
size, cropped shooting settings, and the lens used.
With EF-S lenses, movies are cropped around the center of the image.
zzRF or EF lenses: With [z: Movie cropping] set to [Disable]
(1)
(1)
(2)
(2)
Full HD
HD
4K time-lapse
Full HD time-lapse
4K
zzRF or EF lenses: With [z: Movie cropping] set to [Enable]
zzEF-S lenses
(3)
(3)
(4)
(4)
HD
4K time-lapse
Full HD time-lapse
4K
oo Full HD movies cannot be recorded with EF-S lenses, or with [z: Movie
cropping] set to [Enable].
oo Recording with Movie digital IS (=260) further crops the image around the
center of the screen.
251
Setting the Movie Recording Size
zzFrame rate (fps: frame per second)
[8] 59.94fps / [6] 29.97fps
For areas where the TV system is NTSC (North America, Japan,
South Korea, Mexico, etc.).
[7] 50.00fps / [5] 25.00fps
For areas where the TV system is PAL (Europe, Russia, China,
Australia, etc.).
[4] 23.98fps
Mainly for motion pictures. 4 (23.98fps) is available when [5:
Video system] is set to [For NTSC].
zzCompression method
[X] IPB (Standard)
Compresses multiple frames at a time efficiently for recording.
[
] IPB (Light)
Since the movie is recorded at a bit rate lower than with IPB (Standard),
the file size will be smaller than with IPB (Standard) and the playback
compatibility will be higher. This will make the possible recording
time longer than with IPB (Standard) (with a card having the same
capacity).
zzMovie recording format
[C] MP4
All movies you shoot with the camera are recorded as movie files in
MP4 format (file extension “.MP4”).
252
Setting the Movie Recording Size
Cards that Can Record Movies
For details on cards you can use for various movie recording sizes, see
=585.
When recording movies, use a high-capacity card with a writing/reading
speed (as specified in card performance requirements) shown in the
table on =585 or higher than the standard specification. Test cards by
recording a few movies to make sure they can record correctly at your
specified size (=249).
oo Format cards before recording 4K movies (=367).
oo If you use a slow-writing card when recording movies, the movie may not be
recorded properly. Also, if you play back a movie on a card with a slow reading
speed, the movie may not be played back properly.
oo When recording movies, use high-performance cards with a writing speed
sufficiently higher than the bit rate.
oo When movies cannot be recorded normally, format the card and try again.
If formatting the card does not resolve the problem, refer to the card
manufacturer’s website, etc.
ooTo obtain better performance with the card, formatting the card with the
camera before recording movies is recommended (=367).
oo To check the card’s writing/reading speed, refer to the card manufacturer’s
website, etc.
253
Setting the Movie Recording Size
Movie Files Exceeding 4 GB
Even if you record a movie exceeding 4 GB, you can keep recording without
interruption.
zzUsing SD/SDHC cards formatted with the camera
If you use the camera to format an SD/SDHC card, the camera will format
it in FAT32.
With a FAT32-formatted card, if you record a movie and the file size
exceeds 4 GB, a new movie file will be created automatically.
When you play back the movie, you will have to play back each movie
file individually. Movie files cannot be played back automatically in
consecutive order. After the movie playback ends, select the next movie
and play it back.
zzUsing SDXC cards formatted with the camera
If you use the camera to format an SDXC card, the camera will format it
in exFAT.
When using an exFAT-formatted card, even if the file size exceeds 4 GB
during movie recording, the movie will be saved as a single file (rather
than being split into multiple files).
oo When importing movie files exceeding 4 GB to a computer, use either EOS
Utility or a card reader (=557). It may not be possible to save movie files
exceeding 4 GB if you attempt this using standard features of the computer’s
operating system.
254
Setting the Movie Recording Size
Total Movie Recording Time and File Size Per Minute
For details on file sizes and the recording time available at each movie
recording size, see =586.
Movie Recording Time Limit
The maximum recording time per movie is 29 min. 59 sec. Once 29 min.
59 sec. is reached, recording automatically stops. You can start recording
a movie again by pressing the movie shooting button (which records the
movie as a new file).
255
Movie Cropping
With RF or EF lenses, movies can be cropped around the center of the
image, as if using a telephoto lens.
Recording movies with EF-S lenses has the same effect as this movie
cropping feature.
1 Select [z: Movie cropping].
[Enable].
2 Select
gg The center area is magnified.
oo Full HD movies cannot be recorded with movie cropping.
oo The center of the screen is further cropped, reducing the shooting area, when
[z: Movie digital IS] is set to [Enable] or [Enhanced].
oo The shooting area available with movie cropping is the same as when
recording movies with EF-S lenses.
oo 4K movies are always recorded with the center of the recording screen
cropped, and enabling [z: Movie cropping] does not change the recording
angle of view.
oo For details on the shooting area, see =251.
256
Setting the Sound Recording
You can record movies while recording
sound with the built-in stereo microphone
or an external stereo microphone. You can
also freely adjust the sound-recording level.
Use [z: Sound recording] to set sound
recording functions.
Sound Recording/Sound-Recording Level
zzAuto
The sound-recording level is adjusted automatically. Auto level control will
take effect automatically in response to the sound level.
zzManual
You can adjust the sound-recording level as needed.
Select [Rec. level] and press the <Y> <Z> keys while looking at the
level meter to adjust the sound-recording level. Look at the peak hold
indicator, and adjust so that the level meter sometimes lights up on the
right of the “12” (–12 dB) mark for the loudest sounds. If it exceeds “0”,
the sound will be distorted.
zzDisable
Sound will not be recorded.
Wind Filter
Set to [Auto] to reduce wind noise automatically when there is wind
outdoors. Only activated when the camera’s built-in microphone is used.
When the wind filter function takes effect, part of the low bass sounds will
also be reduced.
257
Setting the Sound Recording
Attenuator
Automatically suppresses sound distortion caused by loud noises. Even if
[Sound rec.] is set to [Auto] or [Manual] for recording, sound distortion
may still result if there is a very loud sound. In this case, setting it to [Enable]
is recommended.
zzUsing a microphone
Normally, the camera’s built-in microphone records in stereo.
If an external microphone equipped with a miniature stereo plug (3.5 mm
diameter) is connected to the camera’s external microphone IN terminal,
the external microphone will be given the priority. Using the Directional
Stereo Microphone DM-E1 (sold separately) is recommended.
zzUsing headphones
By connecting commercially available headphones with a 3.5 mm mini
plug to the headphone terminal, you can listen to the sound as movies
are recorded. To adjust headphone volume, press the <Q> button, select
[n], then turn the <6> dial for adjustment.
You can also use headphones during movie playback.
258
Setting the Sound Recording
oo Sounds from Wi-Fi operations may be captured with built-in or external
microphones. During sound recording, using the wireless communication
function is not recommended.
oo When connecting an external microphone or headphones to the camera, be
sure to insert the plug all the way in.
oo The camera’s built-in microphone will also record the operation sound and
mechanical sound of the camera during shooting. Using Directional Stereo
Microphone DM-E1 (sold separately) may reduce such sounds in the movie.
oo Do not connect anything other than an external microphone to the camera’s
external microphone IN terminal.
oo Noise reduction is not applied to the audio played through headphones. Thus,
the audio recorded with the movie will be different.
oo Do not change the [Sound recording] settings when listening with
headphones. This may cause sudden loud output that may hurt your ears.
oo In [u] mode, the settings available for [Sound recording] are [On] or [Off].
Set to [On] for automatic adjustment of the recording level.
oo Audio is also output when the camera is connected to televisions via HDMI,
except when [Sound rec.] is set to [Disable].
oo The sound volume balance between L (left) and R (right) cannot be adjusted.
oo Sound is recorded at a 48 kHz/16-bit sampling rate.
259
Movie Digital IS
In-camera image stabilization electronically corrects camera shake during
movie recording. This function is called “Movie digital IS”. With Movie
digital IS, images can be stabilized even when using a lens without Image
Stabilizer. When using a lens with built-in optical Image Stabilizer, set the
lens’s Image Stabilizer switch to <1>.
1 Select [z: Movie digital IS].
2 Select an item.
zzDisable (v)
Image stabilization with Movie digital IS is disabled.
zzEnable (w)
Camera shake will be corrected. The image will be slightly magnified.
zzEnhanced (x) (Not displayed for still photos shooting)
Compared to when [Enable] is set, stronger camera shake can be
corrected. The image will be more magnified.
260
Movie Digital IS
Combination IS
Even more effective correction is possible by recording movies with Movie
digital IS and a Combination IS-compatible lens, which will combine optical
and digital image stabilization by the lens and camera.
oo Movie digital IS will not function when the lens’s optical Image Stabilizer switch
is set to <2>.
oo Although movies can also be recorded with Movie digital IS when using EF-S
lenses or movie cropping, the shooting area is further reduced.
oo With a lens whose focal length is longer than 800 mm, Movie digital IS will not
function.
oo Stabilization by Movie digital IS may be less effective at some movie recording
sizes.
oo The wider the angle of view (wide angle), the more effective the image
stabilization will be. The narrower the angle of view (telephoto), the less
effective the image stabilization will be.
oo When using a tripod, setting Movie digital IS to [Disable] is recommended.
oo Depending on the subject and shooting conditions, the subject may blur
noticeably (the subject momentarily looks out of focus) due to the effects of
the Movie digital IS.
oo When using a TS-E lens, fish-eye lens, or non-Canon lens, setting Movie
digital IS to [Disable] is recommended.
oo Since Movie digital IS magnifies the image, the image looks more grainy.
Noise, dots of light, etc. may also become noticeable.
oo Certain lenses do not support Movie digital IS. For details, refer to the Canon
website.
oo For details on lenses compatible with Combination IS, visit the Canon website.
oo “+” is added to the Movie digital IS icon (=260) when a lens compatible with
Combination IS is used.
261
Recording Time-lapse Movies
Still photos shot at a set interval can be stitched together automatically to
create a 4K or Full HD time-lapse movie. A time-lapse movie shows how
a subject changes in a much shorter period of time than the actual time
it took. It is effective for a fixed-point observation of changing scenery,
growing plants, celestial motion, etc.
Time-lapse movies will be recorded in MP4 format at the following
quality: H6W (NTSC)/H5W (PAL) for 4K shooting, and L
6 W (NTSC)/L 5 W (PAL) for Full HD shooting.
Note that the frame rate will be switched automatically according to the [5:
Video system] setting (=378).
a shooting mode.
1 Select
zz Select [k] (=239) or [M] (=241).
2 Select [z: Time-lapse movie].
3 Select [Time-lapse].
a scene.
4 Select
zz Select a scene to suit the shooting
situation.
zz For greater freedom when setting the
shooting interval and number of shots
manually, select [Custom].
262
Recording Time-lapse Movies
the shooting interval.
5 Set
zz Select [Interval] (sec.). Use the <Y>
(1)
(2)
<Z> keys to set a value, then press
<0>.
zz Refer to [k: Time required] (1) and
[3: Playback time] (2) to set the
number.
When [Custom] is set
zz Select [Interval] (min.:sec.). (An interval
of once per second is not available.)
zz Press <0> to display <r>.
zz Set the desired number, then press
<0>. (Returns to <s>.)
zz Select [OK] to register the setting.
the number of shots.
6 Set
zz Select [No. of shots]. Use the <Y>
<Z> keys to set a value, then press
<0>.
zz Refer to the [k: Time required] and
[3: Playback time] to set the number.
When [Custom] is set
zz Select the digit.
zz Press <0> to display <r>.
zz Set the desired number, then press
<0>. (Returns to <s>.)
zz Check that [3: Playback time] is not
displayed in red.
zz Select [OK] to register the setting.
oo With [Scene**], available intervals and numbers of shots are restricted, to suit
the type of scene.
oo For cards that can record time-lapse movies (card performance requirements),
see =585.
oo If the number of shots is set to 3600, the time-lapse movie will be approx.
2 min. in NTSC and approx. 2 min. 24 sec. in PAL.
263
Recording Time-lapse Movies
the desired movie recording
7 Select
size.
zzH (3840×2160)
The movie is recorded in 4K quality. The aspect ratio is 16:9. The frame
rate is 29.97 fps (6) for NTSC and 25.00 fps (5) for PAL, and
movies are recorded in MP4 (C) format with ALL-I (W) compression.
zzL (1920×1080)
The movie will be recorded in Full High-Definition (Full HD) quality. The
aspect ratio is 16:9. The frame rate is 29.97 fps (6) for NTSC and
25.00 fps (5) for PAL, and movies are recorded in MP4 (C) format
with ALL-I (W) compression.
264
Recording Time-lapse Movies
8 Configure [Auto exposure].
zzFixed 1st frame
When taking the first shot, metering is performed to set the exposure
automatically to match the brightness. The exposure setting for the first
shot will be applied to subsequent shots. Other shooting-related settings
for the first shot will also be applied for subsequent shots.
zzEach frame
Metering is also performed for each subsequent shot to set the exposure
automatically to match the brightness. Note that if functions such as
Picture Style and white balance are set to [Auto], they will be set
automatically for each subsequent shot.
9 Configure [Screen auto off].
zzDisable
Even during time-lapse movie recording, the image will be displayed. (The
screen turns off only at the time of shooting.) Note that the screen will
turn off when approx. 30 min. elapse after the shooting started.
zzEnable
Note that the screen will turn off when approx. 10 sec. elapse after the
shooting started.
oo During time-lapse movie recording, you can press the <B> button to turn
on/off the screen.
265
Recording Time-lapse Movies
the beeper.
10Set
zz Select [Beep as img taken].
zz If [Disable] is set, the beeper will not
sound for shooting.
11 Check the settings.
(1)
(2)
(1) Time required
Indicates the time required to shoot the set number of shots with the set
interval. If it exceeds 24 hours, “*** days” will be displayed.
(2) Playback time
Indicates the movie recording time (time required to play back the movie)
when creating the time-lapse movie in 4K movie or Full HD movie from
the still photos taken with the set intervals.
the menu.
12 Close
zz Press the <M> button to turn off the
menu screen.
266
Recording Time-lapse Movies
the message.
13 Read
zz Read the message and select [OK].
test shots.
14 Take
zz As with still photo shooting, set the
exposure and shooting functions, then
press the shutter button halfway to
focus.
zz Press the shutter button completely to
take test shots. The still photos will be
recorded to the card.
zz If there are no problems with the test
shots, go to the next step.
zz To take test shots again, repeat this
step.
oo Test shots are captured in JPEG 73 quality.
oo You can set the maximum limit for ISO Auto in [k] mode or in [M] mode
with ISO Auto, in [aMax for Auto] under [z: kISO speed settings]
(=286).
oo If you have set [Half-press] under [5: Shutter btn function for movies] to
[Meter.+k Servo AF], it is automatically changed to [Meter.+One-Shot AF]
when you set up time-lapse movie recording.
267
Recording Time-lapse Movies
the movie shooting button.
15 Press
gg The camera will be ready to start
recording a time-lapse movie.
zz To return to step 14, press the movie
shooting button again.
the time-lapse movie.
16 Record
zz Press the <B> button and check
(1)
268
(2)
again the “Time required (1)” and
“Interval (2)” displayed on the screen.
zz Press the shutter button completely
to start recording the time-lapse
movie.
zz AF will not work during time-lapse movie
recording.
zz While the time-lapse movie is recorded,
“oREC” is displayed.
gg When the set number of shots are taken,
the time-lapse movie recording ends.
zz To cancel recording time-lapse
movies, set [Time-lapse] to [Disable].
Recording Time-lapse Movies
oo Using a tripod is recommended.
oo Taking test shots as in step 14 and recording test movies for time-lapse
movies beforehand is recommended.
oo The movie’s field of view coverage for both the 4K and Full HD time-lapse
movie recording is approx. 100%.
oo To cancel the time-lapse movie recording in progress, either press the shutter
button completely or press the movie shooting button. The time-lapse movie
shot so far will be recorded on the card.
oo If the time required for shooting is more than 24 hours but not more than
48 hours, “2 days” will be indicated. If three or more days are required, the
number of days will be indicated in 24-hour increments.
oo Even if the time-lapse movie’s playback time is less than 1 sec., a movie file
will still be created. For [Playback time], “00'00"” will be displayed.
oo If the shooting time is long, using the household power outlet accessories (sold
separately) is recommended.
oo YCbCr 4:2:0 (8-bit) color sampling and the Rec. ITU-R BT.709 color space are
used for 4K/Full HD time-lapse movies.
oo If the card does not have enough free space to record the set number of shots,
[Playback time] will be displayed in red. Although the camera can continue
shooting, the shooting will stop when the card becomes full.
oo If the movie file size exceeds 4 GB with the [No. of shots] settings and the
card is not formatted in exFAT (=368), [Play back time] will be displayed
in red. If you keep shooting in this condition and the movie file size reaches
4 GB, the time-lapse movie recording will stop.
269
Recording Time-lapse Movies
oo Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an
intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the
camera’s internal components.
oo Time-lapse movies cannot be recorded when the camera is connected to a
computer with the interface cable, or when an HDMI cable is connected.
oo Movie Servo AF will not function.
oo If the shutter speed is 1/30 sec. or slower, the exposure of the movie may not
be displayed properly (may differ from that of the resulting movie).
oo Do not zoom the lens during time-lapse movie recording. Zooming the lens
may cause the image to be out of focus, the exposure to change, or the lens
aberration correction not to function properly.
oo When recording a time-lapse movie under a flickering light, noticeable image
flickering, horizontal stripes (noise), or irregular exposures may be recorded.
oo Images that are displayed while time-lapse movies are being recorded
may look different from the resulting movie. (For example, there may be
inconsistent brightness from flickering light sources, or noise from a high ISO
speed.)
oo When recording a time-lapse movie under low light, the image displayed
during shooting may look different from what is actually recorded in the movie.
In such cases, the <g> icon will blink.
oo If you move the camera from left to right (panning) or shoot a moving subject
during time-lapse movie recording, the image may look extremely distorted.
oo During time-lapse movie recording, auto power off will not take effect. Also,
you cannot adjust the shooting function and menu function settings, play back
images, etc.
oo Sound is not recorded for time-lapse movies.
oo With time-lapse movie recording, you can press the shutter button completely
to start or stop the movie recording regardless of the [5: Shutter btn
function for movies] setting.
oo With [Interval] set to less than 3 sec. and [Auto exposure] set to [Each
frame], if the brightness differs greatly from the preceding shot, the camera
may not shoot at the set interval.
270
Recording Time-lapse Movies
oo If the shutter speed exceeds the shooting interval (such as for long
exposures), or if a slow shutter speed is set automatically, the camera may
not be able to shoot at the set interval. Shooting may also be prevented by
shooting intervals nearly the same as the shutter speed.
oo If the next scheduled shot is not possible, it will be skipped. This may shorten
the recording time of the created time-lapse movie.
oo If the time it takes to record to the card exceeds the shooting interval due to
the shooting functions set or card performance, some of the shots may not be
taken with the set intervals.
oo Even if [Screen auto off] is set to [Disable], the screen will turn off during the
exposure. Also note that images may not be displayed if the interval between
shots is too brief.
oo The captured images are not recorded as still photos. Even if you cancel the
time-lapse movie recording after only one shot is taken, it will be recorded as
a movie file.
oo If you connect the camera to a computer with the interface cable and use EOS
Utility (EOS software), set [z: Time-lapse movie] to [Disable]. If an option
other than [Disable] is selected, the camera cannot communicate with the
computer.
oo During time-lapse movie recording, the lens’s Image Stabilizer will not operate.
oo Time-lapse movie recording ends if the power switch is set to <2>, for
example, and the setting is changed to [Disable].
oo Even if a flash is used, it will not fire.
oo The following operations cancel standby for time-lapse movie recording and
switch the setting to [Disable].
• Selecting either [Clean nowf] under [5: Sensor cleaning] or selecting
[5: Clear all camera settings].
• Turning the Mode dial.
271
Recording Time-lapse Movies
oo If you start time-lapse movie recording while the white <s> temperature
warning (=291) is displayed, the image quality of the time-lapse movie may
decline. It is recommended that you start time-lapse movie recording after the
white <s> disappears (camera’s internal temperature decreases).
oo With [Auto exposure] set to [Each frame], ISO speed, shutter speed, and
aperture may not be recorded in the time-lapse movie Exif information in some
modes.
272
Recording Time-lapse Movies
oo You can use Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold separately) to start and
stop the time-lapse movie recording.
With Wireless Remote Control BR-E1
• First pair the Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 with the camera (=399).
• Set [z: Remote control] to [Enable].
• Take test shots, then when the camera is ready to shoot (as in step 15 on
=268), set the BR-E1’s release mode/movie shooting switch to <o>
(immediate release) or <2> (release after 2-sec. delay).
• If the remote control’s switch has been set to <k>, the time-lapse movie
recording cannot start.
Camera status/remote
control setting
<o> Immediate
release
<2> 2-sec. delay
<k> Movie
recording
Test-shooting screen
Test-shooting
To shooting-ready
Shooting-ready
Starts shooting
To test-shooting
screen
During time-lapse movie
recording
Ends recording
Ends recording
Approx. Time Available for Recording Time-lapse Movies
For guidelines on how long you can record time-lapse movies (until the
battery runs out), see =587.
273
Recording Video Snapshots
Record a series of short video snapshots, each a few seconds long, and
the camera will combine them to create a video snapshot album that shows
these highlights of your trip or event.
Video snapshots are available when the movie recording size is set to
L6X (NTSC) or L5X (PAL).
Video snapshot albums can also be played back with background music
(=336).
Creating a Video Snapshot Album
Video
snapshot 1
Video
snapshot 2
Video
snapshot **
Video snapshot album
Setting Recording Time Per Video Snapshot
a shooting mode.
1 Select
zz Select [k] (=239) or [M] (=241).
2 Select [z: Video snapshot].
3 Select [Enable].
274
Recording Video Snapshots
4 Select [Album settings].
[Create a new album].
5 Select
zz Read the message and select [OK].
the playback time.
6 Specify
zz Specify playback time per video
snapshot.
the playback effect.
7 Specify
zz This setting determines how fast albums
are played back.
the required recording time.
8 Check
zz The time required to record each video
snapshot is indicated (1), based on the
playback time and effect.
(1)
275
Recording Video Snapshots
the menu.
9 Close
zz Press the <M> button to close the
(2)
menu.
gg A blue bar is displayed to indicate the
recording time (2).
zz Go to “Creating Video Snapshot
Albums”.
Creating Video Snapshot Albums
the first video snapshot.
10Record
zz Press the movie shooting button to start
recording.
gg The blue bar indicating recording time
gradually decreases, and after the
specified time elapses, recording stops
automatically.
gg A confirmation message is displayed
(=277).
as a video snapshot album.
11 Save
zz Select [J Save as album].
zz The clip is saved as the first video
snapshot in the album.
your next video snapshots.
12 Record
zz Repeat step 10 to record the next video
snapshot.
zz Select [J Add to album].
zz To create another album, select [W
Save as a new album].
zz Repeat step 12 as needed.
276
Recording Video Snapshots
recording video snapshots.
13 Stop
zz Set [Video snapshot] to [Disable]. To
return to normal movie recording, be
sure to specify [Disable].
zz Press the <M> button to close
the menu and return to normal movie
recording.
Options in Steps 11 and 12
Function
Description
J Save as album (step 11)
Saves the clip as the first video snapshot in an
album.
J Add to album (step 12)
Adds the current video snapshot to the album
recorded most recently.
Creates a new album and saves the clip as the first
W Save as a new album (step 12) video snapshot. This album file is different from the
one recorded most recently.
W Playback video snapshot
(steps 11, 12)
Plays the video snapshot just recorded.
r Do not save to album (step 11) Deletes the recently recorded video snapshot
r Delete without saving to album without saving it to an album. Select [OK] on the
(step 12)
confirmation dialog.
oo If you prefer to record the next video snapshot immediately, set [Show
confirm msg] under [z: Video snapshot] to [Disable]. This setting enables
you to record the next video snapshot immediately, without a confirmation
message.
277
Recording Video Snapshots
Adding to an Existing Album
[Add to existing album].
1 Select
zz Follow step 5 on =275 to select [Add
to existing album].
an existing album.
2 Select
zz Turn the <5> dial to select an existing
album, then press <0>.
zz Select [OK].
gg Some video snapshot settings will be
updated to match settings of the existing
album.
the menu.
3 Close
zz Press the <M> button to close the
menu.
gg The video snapshot recording screen is
displayed.
a video snapshot.
4 Record
zz Record the video snapshot, referring
to “Creating Video Snapshot Albums”
(=276).
oo You cannot select an album taken with another camera.
278
Recording Video Snapshots
General Video Snapshot Precautions
oo No sound is recorded when you set [Playback effect] to [1/2x speed] or [2x
speed].
oo Recording time per video snapshot is only approximate. It may differ slightly
from the actual recording time indicated during playback, due to the frame rate
and other factors.
279
Setting Movie Servo AF
With this function enabled, the camera focuses on the subject continuously
during movie recording.
1 Select [z: Movie Servo AF].
2 Select [Enable].
zzWhen [Enable] is set:
The camera focuses on the subject continuously even when you are
not pressing the shutter button halfway.
To keep the focus at a specific position, or if you prefer not to record
mechanical sounds from the lens, you can temporarily stop Movie
Servo AF by touching [Z] in the lower left of the screen.
When Movie Servo AF is paused, if you return to movie recording after
operations such as pressing the <M> or <x> button or changing
the AF method, Movie Servo AF will resume.
zzWhen [Disable] is set:
Press the shutter button halfway or press the <p> button to focus.
280
Setting Movie Servo AF
Cautions When [Movie Servo AF] is Set to [Enable]
oo Recording Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult
• A fast-moving subject approaching or moving away from the camera.
• A subject moving at a close distance to the camera.
• When shooting with a higher f/number.
• Also see “Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult” on =197.
oo Since the lens is driven continuously and the battery power is consumed, the
possible movie recording time (=586) will be shortened.
oo With certain lenses, the mechanical sound for focusing may be recorded. In
this case, using Directional Stereo Microphone DM-E1 (sold separately) may
reduce such sounds in the movie.
oo Movie Servo AF will pause during zooming or magnified view.
oo During movie recording, if a subject approaches or moves away or if the
camera is moved vertically or horizontally (panning), the recorded movie
image may momentarily expand or contract (change in image magnification).
281
Setting Movie Servo AF
Movie Servo AF Track Sensitivity
You can adjust the tracking sensitivity (to one of seven levels), which affects
responsiveness if the subject strays from the AF point during Movie Servo
AF, as when interfering objects move across AF points or when you pan.
[z: Movie Servo AF track
1 Select
sens.].
zz Locked on: –3/–2/–1
With this setting, the camera is less
likely to track a different subject if the
main subject strays from the AF point.
The closer the setting is to the minus (–)
symbol, the less the camera is inclined
to track a different subject. It is effective
when you want to prevent the AF points
from rapidly tracking something that is
not the intended subject during panning
or when an obstacle cuts across the AF
points.
Responsive: +1/+2/+3
This makes the camera more responsive when tracking a subject that
covers the AF point. The closer the setting is to the plus (+) symbol,
the more responsive the camera is. It is effective when you want
to keep tracking a moving subject as its distance from the camera
changes or to rapidly focus on another subject.
oo Has no effect (setting is disabled) when 4K movie recording is set.
oo Available when [z: Movie Servo AF] is set to [Enable] and [z: AF
method] is set to [1-point AF].
oo Operation when [z: AF method] is set to an option other than [1-point AF]
is equivalent to a setting of [0].
282
Setting Movie Servo AF
Movie Servo AF Speed
You can set the Movie Servo AF’s AF speed and its operation conditions.
The function is enabled when using a lens supporting slow focus transition
during movie recording*.
1 Select [z: Movie Servo AF speed].
zz When active:
You can set [Always on] to have the AF
speed take effect at all times for movie
recording (before and during movie
recording) or set [During shooting]
to have the AF speed take effect only
during movie recording.
zz AF speed:
You can adjust the AF speed (focus
transition speed) from the standard
speed (0) to slow (one of seven levels)
or fast (one of two levels) to obtain the
desired effect for the movie creation.
* Lenses supporting slow focus transition during movie
recording
USM and STM lenses released in and after 2009 are compatible. For
details, refer to the Canon website.
283
Setting Movie Servo AF
oo With certain lenses, even if you adjust the AF speed, the speed may not
change.
oo Has no effect (setting is disabled) when 4K movie recording is set.
oo Available when [z: Movie Servo AF] is set to [Enable] and [z: AF
method] is set to [1-point AF].
oo Operation when [z: AF method] is set to an option other than [1-point AF]
is equivalent to setting [AF speed] to [Standard (0)].
oo An asterisk to the right of [z: Movie Servo AF speed] indicates that the
default setting has been modified.
284
Other Menu Functions
[z2]
zzLens aberration correction
Peripheral illumination, distortion, and chromatic aberration can be
corrected as you record movies. For details on lens aberration correction,
see =123.
zzRemote control shooting
When [Enable] is set, you can start or stop movie recording using
Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold separately). First, pair the BR-E1
with the camera (=399).
With Wireless Remote Control BR-E1
Set the release mode/movie shooting switch to the <k> position, then
press the release button.
For details on Time-lapse movie recording, see =273.
285
Other Menu Functions
[z3]
zzk ISO speed settings
ISO speedM
In [M] mode, you can set the ISO speed manually. You can also
select ISO Auto.
ISO speed range
When recording Full HD/HD movies or Full HD time-lapse movies,
you can set the manual ISO speed setting range (minimum and
maximum).
Range for H
When recording 4K or 4K time-lapse movies, you can set the manual
ISO speed setting range (minimum and maximum).
Max for Auto
You can set the maximum limit for ISO Auto in Full HD/HD movie
recording in [k] mode or in [M] mode with ISO Auto.
HMax for Auto
You can set the maximum limit for ISO Auto in 4K movie recording in
[k] mode or in [M] mode with ISO Auto.
aMax for Auto
You can set the maximum limit for ISO Auto in 4K time-lapse/Full HD
time-lapse movie recording in [k] mode or in [M] mode with ISO
Auto.
oo Expanded ISO speeds (indicated by [H]) are ISO 32000/40000 for Full HD/HD
movies and ISO 16000/20000/25600/32000/40000 for 4K movies.
286
Other Menu Functions
zzHighlight tone priority
You can reduce overexposed, clipped highlights as you record movies.
For details on Highlight tone priority, see =137.
oo [Enhanced] is not available (not displayed) when recording movies with [z:
Highlight tone priority] set.
287
Other Menu Functions
zzk Auto slow shutter
You can choose whether to shoot movies
that are brighter and less affected by
image noise than when set to [Disable]
by automatically slowing the shutter speed
under low light.
Available in [k] shooting mode. Applies
when the frame rate of the movie recording
size is 8 or 7.
Disable
Enables you to record movies with smoother, more natural movement,
less affected by subject shake than when set to [Enable]. Note that
under low light, movies may be darker than when set to [Enable].
Enable
Enables you to shoot brighter movies, less affected by image noise,
than when set to [Disable] by automatically reducing the shutter
speed to 1/30 sec. (NTSC) or 1/25 sec. (PAL) under low light.
oo Setting to [Disable] is recommended when recording moving subjects under
low light, or when afterimages such as trails may occur.
288
Other Menu Functions
zzk Av 1/8-stop incrementsM
You can set aperture values on a finer
scale when recording movies with an RF
lens.
Available in [M] shooting mode.
Select [Enable] to change the aperture
increment from 1/3 stop (or 1/2 stop) to 1/8
stop.
oo [kAv 1/8-stop incr.] is not available (not displayed) when EF or EF-S lenses
are used.
oo When set to [Enable], setting options in [8C.Fn I-1: Exposure level
increments] are disabled and have no effect.
289
Other Menu Functions
[z4]
zzHDMI info disp
You can configure information display for
image output via an HDMI cable.
zzWith info
The image, shooting information, AF points, and other information is
shown on the other device via HDMI. Note that the camera screen goes
off.
Recorded movies are saved to the card.
zzClean / H output
HDMI output consists solely of 4K movies. Shooting information and AF
points are also displayed on the camera, but no image is recorded to the
card. Note that Wi-Fi communication is not available.
zzClean / L output
HDMI output consists solely of Full HD movies. Shooting information and
AF points are also displayed on the camera, but no image is recorded to
the card. Note that Wi-Fi communication is not available.
290
General Movie Recording Cautions
Red <E> Internal Temperature Warning Icon
oo If the camera’s internal temperature increases due to prolonged movie
recording or under a high ambient temperature, a red <E> icon will appear.
oo The red <E> icon indicates that movie recording will soon be terminated
automatically. If this happens, you will not be able to shoot again until the
camera’s internal temperature decreases. Turn off the power and let the
camera rest for a while.
oo Recording a movie at a high temperature for a prolonged period will cause the
red <E> icon to appear earlier. When you are not shooting, always turn off
the camera.
Recording and Image Quality
oo If the attached lens has an Image Stabilizer and you set the Image Stabilizer
(IS) switch to <1>, the Image Stabilizer will operate at all times even if
you do not press the shutter button halfway. The Image Stabilizer consumes
battery power and may shorten the total movie recording time depending on
the shooting conditions. When the Image Stabilizer is not necessary, such as
when using a tripod, it is recommended that you set the IS switch to <2>.
oo If the brightness changes as you record a movie with auto exposure, the
movie may appear to stop momentarily. In this case, record movies with
manual exposure.
oo If there is a very bright light source in the image, the bright area may appear
black on the screen. Movies are recorded almost exactly as they appear on
the screen.
oo Image noise or irregular colors may occur when shooting at high ISO speeds,
high temperatures, low shutter speeds, or under low light. Movies are recorded
almost exactly as they appear on the screen, except in time-lapse movie
recording.
oo If you play back a movie with other devices, image or sound quality may
decline or playback may not be possible (even if the devices support MP4
format).
291
General Movie Recording Cautions
Recording and Image Quality
oo If you use a card with a slow writing speed, an indicator
may appear on the right of the screen during movie
recording. It indicates how much data has not yet been
written to the card (remaining capacity of the internal
buffer memory). The slower the card, the faster the
indicator will climb upward. If the indicator (1) becomes
(1)
full, movie recording will stop automatically.
oo If the card has a fast writing speed, the indicator will
either not appear or the level (if displayed) will hardly go upward. First, shoot a
few test movies to see if the card can write fast enough.
oo If the indicator indicates that the card is full and movie recording stops
automatically, the sound near the end of the movie may not be recorded
properly.
oo If the card’s writing speed is slow (due to fragmentation) and the indicator
appears, formatting the card may make the writing speed faster.
Audio Restrictions
oo Note that the following restrictions apply when [Movie rec. size] is set to
L6V (NTSC) or L5V (PAL), when [8C.Fn III-9: Audio
compression] is set to [Enable], and for HDR movies.
• Sound will not be recorded for approx. the last two frames.
• When you play back movies on Windows, movie images and sound may
become slightly out of synchronization.
292
Playback
This chapter covers topics related to playback—playing back
captured still photos and movies—and introduces menu settings
on the Playback ([x]) tab.
Images shot and saved with another device
Normal display or selection on this camera may not be possible for
images captured on other cameras, or images from this camera that
have been edited or renamed on a computer.
293
Tab Menus: Playback
zzPlayback 1
=310
=313
=314
=318
=322
zzPlayback 2
=325
=331
=333
=334
zzPlayback 3
=337
=339
=340
=343
=345
=347
oo [3: RAW image processing] and [3: Quick Control RAW processing]
are not displayed in Basic Zone modes.
294
Tab Menus: Playback
zzPlayback 4
=349
=351
=352
=353
=354
=355
295
Image Playback
Single-Image Display
back the image.
1 Play
zz Press the <x> button.
an image.
2 Select
zz To play back newer images, press the
<Z> button, and to play back older
images, press the <Y> button.
zz Each time you press the <B> button,
the display will change.
No information
Basic information
display
Shooting information display
the image playback.
3 Exit
zz Press the <x> button to exit the image
playback.
296
Image Playback
Shooting Information Display
With the shooting information screen displayed, you can press the <W>
<X> keys to change the information displayed. You can also customize the
information displayed, in [x: Playback information display] (=349).
297
Image Playback
Touch Playback
The camera features a touch-screen panel that you can touch to control
playback. Supported touch operations are like those used with smartphones
and similar devices. First, press the <x> button to prepare for touch
playback.
Image browsing
Jump display
Index display
Magnified view
ooYou can also magnify display by double-tapping with one finger.
298
Magnifying Images
You can magnify your captured images.
the image.
1 Magnify
zz During image playback, press the <u>
button.
gg The magnified view will appear. The
magnified area position (1) and [6u]
will be displayed on the lower right of the
screen.
zz To magnify images, turn the <6> dial
clockwise.
zz To reduce magnification, turn the <6>
dial counterclockwise. For index display
(=300), keep turning the dial.
(1)
the image.
2 Scroll
zz Press the <V> cross keys to scroll the
image vertically and horizontally.
zz To cancel the magnified view, press the
<u> button.
299
Index Display (Multiple-Image Display)
Search for images quickly with the index display showing 4, 9, 36, or 100
images on one screen.
the <u> button.
1 Press
zz During image playback, press the <u>
button.
gg [6u] will be displayed on the lower
right of the screen.
to the index display.
2 Switch
zz Turn the <6> dial counterclockwise.
gg The 4-image index display will appear.
The selected image is highlighted with
an orange frame.
zz Turning the <6> dial further
counterclockwise will switch the display
from 9 images, 36 images, and to 100
images. If you turn the dial clockwise,
it will rotate through 100, 36, 9, 4, and
single-image display.
B
B
B
B
an image.
3 Select
zz Press the <V> cross keys to move the
orange frame and select the image.
zz Press <0> in the index display to
display the selected image in the singleimage display.
300
Playing Back Movies
back the image.
1 Play
zz Press the <x> button.
a movie.
2 Select
zz Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select the
movie to play back.
zz In the single-image display, the
<s1> icon displayed on the upper
left indicates a movie.
zz In the index display, perforations at
the left edge of a thumbnail indicate a
movie. As movies cannot be played
back from the index display, press
<0> to switch to the single-image
display.
the single-image display, press
3 In<0>.
<0> to play back the
4 Press
movie.
gg The movie will start playing back.
zz You can pause playback and display
the movie playback panel by pressing
<0>. Press it again to resume the
playback.
zz You can also adjust the volume during
movie playback by using the <W> <X>
keys.
(1)
Speaker
(1)
301
Playing Back Movies
Movie Playback Panel
Item
Playback Operations
7 Play
Pressing <0> toggles between playback and stop.
8 Slow motion
Adjust the slow motion speed with the <Y> <Z> keys. The
slow motion speed is indicated on the upper right of the
screen.
T Skip backward
Skips backward 4 sec. each time you press <0>.
3 Previous frame
Displays the previous frame each time you press <0>.
Holding <0> down will rewind the movie.
6 Next frame
Plays the movie frame-by-frame each time you press
<0>. Holding <0> down will fast forward the movie.
v Skip forward
Skips forward 4 sec. each time you press <0>.
X Edit
Displays the editing screen (=304).
y Background music
Plays back a movie with the selected background music
(=336).
I Frame Grab
Available when you play 4K or 4K time-lapse movies.
Enables you to extract the current frame and save it as a
JPEG still image (=306).
Playback position
mm’ ss”
Volume
302
Playback time (minutes:seconds)
Use the <W> <X> keys to adjust the speaker volume
(=301).
Playing Back Movies
Movie Playback Panel (Video Snapshot Albums)
Item
Playback Operations
7 Play
Pressing <0> toggles between playback and stop.
8 Slow motion
Adjust the slow motion speed with the <Y> <Z> keys. The
slow motion speed is indicated on the upper right of the
screen.
T Previous clip
Displays the first frame of the previous video snapshot.
3 Previous frame
Displays the previous frame each time you press <0>.
Holding <0> down will rewind the movie.
6 Next frame
Plays the movie frame-by-frame each time you press
<0>. Holding <0> down will fast forward the movie.
v Next clip
Displays the first frame of the next video snapshot.
L Erase clip
Erases the current video snapshot.
X Edit
Displays the editing screen (=304).
y Background music
Plays back an album with the selected background music
(=336).
Playback position
mm’ ss”
Volume
Playback time (minutes:seconds)
Use the <W> <X> keys to adjust the speaker volume
(=301).
oo Adjust the volume using television controls when the camera is connected to a
television for movie playback (=308). (Volume cannot be adjusted with the
<W> <X> keys.)
oo Movie playback may stop if the card’s read speed is too slow or movie files
have corrupted frames.
oo For details on the movie recording time available, see =586.
303
Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes
You can edit out the first and last scenes of a movie in approx. 1-sec.
increments.
movie playback.
1 Pause
gg The movie playback panel will appear.
the movie playback panel,
2 On
select [X].
the part to be edited out.
3 Specify
zz Select either [U] (Cut beginning) or
[V] (Cut end).
zz Press the <Y> <Z> keys for frame-byframe playback.
zz After deciding which part to edit out,
press <0>. The portion indicated by
a line at the bottom of the screen will
remain.
the edited movie.
4 Check
zz Select [7] to play the edited movie.
zz To change the edited part, go back to
step 3.
zz To cancel the editing, press the <M>
button.
304
Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes
the image.
5 Save
zz Select [W] (1).
(1) (2)
zz The save screen will appear.
zz To save it as a new movie, select [New
file]. To save it and overwrite the original
movie file, select [Overwrite].
] (2) to save a compressed
zz Select [
version of the file. 4K movies are
converted to Full HD movies before
compression.
zz On the confirmation dialog, select [OK]
to save the edited movie and return to
the movie playback screen.
oo Because editing is performed in approx. 1-sec. increments (at the position
indicated by [ ] at the bottom of the screen), the actual position where movies
are trimmed may differ from your specified position.
oo Movies shot with another camera cannot be edited with this camera.
oo You cannot edit a movie when the camera is connected to a computer.
oo Compress and save is not available for movie recording sizes of L6V
(NTSC) or L5V (PAL).
oo For instructions on editing video snapshot albums, see “Editing Video
Snapshot Albums” (=334).
305
Grabbing a Frame from 4K Movies or 4K
Time-Lapse Movies
From 4K movies or 4K time-lapse movies, you can select individual frames
to save as approx. 8.3-megapixel (3840×2160) JPEG still images. This
function is called “Frame Grab (4K frame capture)”.
back the image.
1 Play
zz Press the <3> button.
a 4K movie.
2 Select
zz Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select a 4K
movie or 4K time-lapse movie.
zz On the shooting information screen
(=599), 4K movies and 4K time-lapse
movies are indicated by an [H] icon.
zz In index display, press <0> to switch
to single-image display.
the single-image display, press
3 In<0>.
movie playback.
4 Pause
gg The movie playback panel will appear.
a frame to grab.
5 Select
zz Use the movie playback panel to select
the frame to grab as a still photo.
zz For movie playback panel instructions,
see =302.
[I].
6 Select
zz Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select [I].
306
Grabbing a Frame from 4K Movies or 4K Time-Lapse Movies
the image.
7 Save
zz Select [OK] to save the current frame as
a JPEG still image.
the image to display.
8 Select
zz Check the destination folder and image
file number.
zz Select [View original movie] or [View
extracted still image].
oo Frame grabbing is not possible with Full HD movies, Full HD time-lapse
movies, or with 4K movies or 4K time-lapse movies from a different camera.
307
Playback on a TV
By connecting the camera to a television with an HDMI cable, you can play
back the captured still photos and movies on the television. Using the HDMI
Cable HTC-100 (sold separately) is recommended.
If the image does not appear on the TV screen, check if the [5: Video
system] is correctly set to [For NTSC] or [For PAL] (depending on the
video system of your television).
the HDMI cable to the
1 Connect
camera.
zz With the plug’s <dHDMI MINI> logo
facing the front of the camera, insert it
into the <D> terminal.
the HDMI cable to the
2 Connect
television.
zz Connect the HDMI cable to the
television’s HDMI IN port.
on the television and switch
3 Turn
the television’s video input to
select the connected port.
the camera’s power switch to
4 Set
<1>.
the <x> button.
5 Press
gg The image will appear on the TV screen.
(Nothing will be displayed on the camera
screen.)
zz The images will automatically be
displayed at the optimum resolution
matching the connected television.
308
Playback on a TV
oo Adjust movie sound volume with the television. The sound volume cannot be
adjusted with the camera.
oo Before connecting or disconnecting the cable between the camera and
television, turn off the camera and television.
oo Depending on the television, part of the image displayed may be cut off.
oo Do not connect any other device’s output to the camera’s <D>
terminal. Doing so may cause a malfunction.
oo Certain televisions may not display the images due to incompatibility.
oo It may take some time before images are displayed. To avoid delay, set [5:
HDMI resolution] to [1080p] (=386).
oo Touch-screen operations are not supported while the camera is connected to
a television.
309
Protecting Images
You can protect important images from being accidentally erased.
Protecting a Single Image
1 Select [3: Protect images].
2 Select [Select images].
an image.
3 Select
zz Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select the
image to protect.
(1)
the image.
4 Protect
zz Press <0> to protect the selected
image. The <K> icon (1) will appear at
the top of the screen.
zz To cancel the image protection, press
<0> again. The <K> icon will
disappear.
zz To protect another image, repeat steps 3
and 4.
310
Protecting Images
Specifying the Range of Images to be Protected
While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the first
and last images for a range to protect all the specified images at once.
[Select range].
1 Select
zz Select [Select range] in [3: Protect
images].
the range of images.
2 Specify
zz Select the first image (start point).
zz Next, select the last image (end point).
gg The images in the specified range will
be protected and the <J> icon will
appear.
zz To select another image to be protected,
repeat step 2.
311
Protecting Images
Protecting All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can protect all the images in a folder or on a card at once.
When you select [All images in folder]
or [All images on card] in [3: Protect
images], all the images in the folder or on
the card will be protected.
To cancel the selection, select [Unprotect
all images in folder] or [Unprotect all
images on card].
If the search conditions are set with [3: Set image search conditions]
(=345), the display will change to [All found images] and [Unprotect all
found].
If you select [All found images], all the
images filtered by the search conditions will
be protected.
If you select [Unprotect all found], the
protection of all the filtered images will be
canceled.
oo If you format the card (=367), the protected images will also be erased.
oo Once an image is protected, it cannot be erased by the camera’s erase
function. To erase a protected image, you must first cancel the protection.
oo If you erase all the images (=317), only the protected images will remain.
This is convenient when you want to erase all unnecessary images at once.
312
Rotating Images
You can use this feature to rotate the displayed image to the desired
orientation.
1 Select [3: Rotate image].
an image.
2 Select
zz Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select the
image to rotate.
the image.
3 Rotate
zz Each time you press <0>, the image
will rotate clockwise as follows: 90° →
270° → 0°.
zz To rotate another image, repeat steps 2
and 3.
oo If you set [5: Auto rotate] to [OnzD] (=366) before taking vertical
shots, you need not rotate the image with this function.
oo If the rotated image is not displayed in the rotated orientation during image
playback, set [5: Auto rotate] to [OnzD].
313
Erasing Images
You can either select and erase unnecessary images one by one or erase
them in one batch. Protected images (=310) will not be erased.
oo Once an image is erased, it cannot be recovered. Make sure you no
longer need the image before erasing it. To prevent important images
from being erased accidentally, protect them.
Erasing a Single Image
the image to be erased.
1 Select
zz Press the <x> button.
zz Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select the
image to erase.
2 Press the <L> button.
3 Erase the images.
JPEG or RAW Images or Movies
zz Select [Erase].
RAW+JPEG images
zz Select an item.
314
Erasing Images
Checkmarking [X] Images to Be Erased in a Batch
By adding checkmarks to the images to be erased, you can erase all those
images at once.
1 Select [3: Erase images].
2 Select [Select and erase images].
an image.
3 Select
zz Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select the
image to erase, then press <0>.
zz To select another image to be erased,
repeat step 3.
the images.
4 Erase
zz Press the <M> button, then press
[OK].
315
Erasing Images
Specifying the Range of Images to Be Erased
While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the first
and last images for a range to erase all the specified images at once.
[Select range].
1 Select
zz Select [Select range] in [3: Erase
images].
the range of images.
2 Specify
zz Select the first image (start point).
zz Next, select the last image (end point).
3 Press the <M> button.
the images.
4 Erase
zz Select [OK].
316
Erasing Images
Erasing All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can erase all the images in a folder or on a card at once.
When [3: Erase images] is set to [All
images in folder] or [All images on card],
all the images in the folder or on the card
will be erased.
If the search conditions are set with [3: Set image search conditions]
(=345), the display will change to [All found images].
If you select [All found images], all the
images filtered by the search conditions will
be erased.
oo To erase all the images including protected images, format the card (=367).
317
Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) enables you to print images recorded on
the card according to your printing instructions such as the image selection,
quantity to print, etc. You can print multiple images in one batch or create a
print order for a photofinisher.
You can set the print settings such as print type, date imprinting, file number
imprinting, etc. The print settings will be applied to all the images specified
for printing. (They cannot be set individually for each image.)
Setting the Printing Option
1 Select [3: Print order].
2 Select [Set up].
the options as desired.
3 Set
zz Set the [Print type], [Date], and [File
No.].
Print type
K Standard
Prints one image on one sheet.
L Index
Multiple thumbnail images are printed on one
sheet.
K
L
Date
File number
318
Both
On
Off
On
Off
Prints both the standard and index prints.
[On] imprints the recorded date of the captured image.
[On] imprints the file number.
Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
the setting.
4 Exit
zz Press the <M> button.
zz Next, select [Sel.Image] or [Multiple] to
specify the images to be printed.
oo If you print an image with a large image size using the [Index] or [Both]
setting (=318), the index print may not be printed with certain printers. In
this case, resize the image (=339), then print the index print.
oo Even if [Date] and [File No.] are set to [On], the date or file number may not
be imprinted, depending on the print type setting and printer.
oo With [Index] prints, the [Date] and [File No.] cannot both be set to [On] at the
same time.
oo When printing with DPOF, use the card for which print order specifications are
set. You cannot print in the specified print order if you extract just the images
from the card for printing.
oo Certain DPOF-compliant printers and photofinishers may not be able to print
the images as you specified. Refer to the printer’s instruction manual before
printing, or check with your photofinisher about compatibility when ordering
prints.
oo Do not use this camera to configure print settings for images with DPOF
settings set up on another camera. All the print orders may be overwritten
inadvertently. Also, the print order may not be possible, depending on the
image type.
319
Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
Specifying Images for Printing
zzSelecting Images
Select and specify the images one by one.
Press the <M> button to save the print
order to the card.
(1)
(2)
zz Standard / Both
Press <0> to print a copy of the
displayed image. By pressing the <W>
<X> keys, you can set the number of
copies to be printed up to 99.
(1)
(2)
(3) (4)
Quantity
Total images selected
zz Index
Press <0> to add a checkmark to the
box [X]. The image will be included in
the index print.
(3)
(4)
Checkmark
Index icon
zzSelecting Multiple Images
Select Range
Under [Multiple], select [Select range].
Selecting the first and last images of the
range marks all the images in the range
with a checkmark [X], and one copy of
each image will be printed.
320
Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
All Images in a Folder
Select [Mark all in folder] and select the folder. A print order for one
copy of all the images in the folder will be specified.
If you select [Clear all in folder] and select the folder, the print order
for all the images in the folder will be canceled.
All Images on a Card
If you select [Mark all on card], one copy of all the images on the
card will be specified for printing.
If you select [Clear all on card], the print order will be cleared for all
the images on the card.
If the search conditions are set with [3: Set image search conditions]
(=345) and you select [Multiple], the display will change to [Mark all
found images] and [Clear all found images].
All Found Images
If you select [Mark all found images], one copy of all the images
filtered by the search conditions will be specified for printing.
If you select [Clear all found images], all the print order of the filtered
images will be cleared.
oo RAW images or movies cannot be specified for printing. Note that RAW
images or movies will not be specified for printing even if you specify all
images with [Multiple].
oo When using a PictBridge-compatible printer, do not specify more than 400
images for one print order. If you specify more than this, the images may not
all be printed.
321
Specifying Images for a Photobook
You can specify up to 998 images to be printed in a photobook. When
you use EOS Utility (EOS software) to import images to a computer, the
specified images for a photobook will be copied to a dedicated folder. This
function is useful for ordering photobooks online.
Specifying One Image at a Time
1 Select [3: Photobook Set-up].
2 Select [Select images].
the image to be specified.
3 Select
zz Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select an
image, then press <0>.
zz To select other images to be specified
for a photobook, repeat step 3.
322
Specifying Images for a Photobook
Specifying the Image Range for a Photobook
While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the range
(start point to end point) of images to be specified for a photobook at once.
[Multiple].
1 Select
zz Under [3: Photobook Set-up], select
[Multiple].
2 Select [Select range].
the range of images.
3 Specify
zz Select the first image (start point).
zz Next, select the last image (end point).
gg A checkmark [X] will be appended to
all the images within the range between
first and last images.
323
Specifying Images for a Photobook
Specifying All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can specify all the images in a folder or on a card at once for a
photobook.
Under [x: Photobook Set-up], you can
set [Multiple] to [All images in folder]
or [All images on card] to specify all the
images in the folder or on the card for a
photobook.
To cancel the selection, select [Clear all in
folder] or [Clear all on card].
If the search conditions are set with [3: Set image search conditions]
(=345) and you select [Multiple], the display will change to [All found
images] and [Clear all found images].
If you select [All found images], all the
images filtered by the search conditions will
be specified for the photobook.
If you select [Clear all found images], all
the photobook order of the filtered images
will be cleared.
oo RAW images or movies cannot be specified for the photobook. Note that RAW
images or movies will not be specified for the photobook even if you specify all
images with [Multiple].
oo Do not use this camera to configure photobook settings for images with
photobook settings set up on another camera. All the photobook settings may
be overwritten inadvertently.
324
Processing RAW Images with the Camera N
You can process 1 or F images with the camera to create JPEG
images. RAW images are not affected, so different conditions can be
applied to create JPEGs.
You can also use Digital Photo Professional (EOS software) to process
RAW images.
[3: RAW image
1 Select
processing].
an item, then select images.
2 Select
zz You can select multiple images to
process at once.
Select images
zz Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select
images to process, then press <0>.
zz Press the <M> button.
Select range
zz Select the first image (start point).
zz Next, select the last image (end point).
zz Press the <M> button.
325
Processing RAW Images with the Camera
the desired processing
3 Set
conditions.
Use shot settings
zz Images are processed using image
settings at the time of capture.
Customize RAW processing
zz Use the <W> <X> <Y> <Z> keys to
select an item.
zz Turn the <6> or <5> dial to switch
the setting.
zz Press <0> to access the function
setting screen.
zz To return to the image settings at the
time of shooting, press the <L> button.
Comparison Screen
zz You can switch between the [After
change] and [Shot settings] screens
by pressing the <B> button and
turning the <5> dial.
zz Items in orange on the [After change]
screen have been modified since the
time of capture.
zz Press the <M> button.
the image.
4 Save
zz When using [Customize RAW
processing], select [W] (Save).
zz Read the message and select [OK].
zz To process other images, select [Yes]
and repeat steps 2–4.
326
Processing RAW Images with the Camera
the image to display.
5 Select
zz Select [Original image] or [Processed
img.].
Magnified View
You can magnify images displayed for [Customize RAW processing] by
pressing the <u> button. Magnification varies depending on the [Image
quality] setting. Using <V> cross keys, you can scroll the magnified image
vertically and horizontally.
To cancel the magnified view, press the <u> button again.
Images with Aspect Ratio Setting
JPEG images at the specified aspect ratio are created when you process
RAW images with [z: zCropping/aspect ratio] (=119) set to [1:1
(aspect ratio)], [4:3 (aspect ratio)], or [16:9 (aspect ratio)].
oo Some settings cannot be changed when multiple-exposure 1 or F
images are processed.
327
Processing RAW Images with the Camera
RAW Image Processing Options
zz[
] Brightness adjustment
zz[
] White balance (=140)
zz[
] Picture Style (=148)
You can adjust the image brightness up to ±1 stop in 1/3-stop increments.
You can select the white balance. If you select [Q], you can select [Auto:
Ambience priority] or [Auto: White priority]. If you select [P], you
can set the color temperature.
You can select the Picture Style. You can adjust the sharpness, contrast,
and other parameters.
zz[
] Auto Lighting Optimizer (=136)
zz[
] High ISO speed noise reduction (=157)
You can set the Auto Lighting Optimizer.
You can set the noise reduction processing for high ISO speeds. If the
effect is difficult to discern, magnify the image (=299).
zz[73] Image quality (=116)
You can set the image quality when creating a JPEG image. Note that
only 73/83/b are available for RAW images captured in cropped
shooting or with EF-S lenses.
328
Processing RAW Images with the Camera
zz[
] Color space (=147)
zz[
] Lens aberration correction
You can select either sRGB or Adobe RGB. Since the camera screen is
not compatible with Adobe RGB, the difference in the image will hardly be
perceptible when either color space is set.
[
] Peripheral illumination correction (=124)
[
] Distortion correction (=124)
[
] Digital Lens Optimizer (=125)
A phenomenon that makes the image corners look darker due to the
lens characteristics can be corrected. If [Enable] is set, the corrected
image will be displayed. If the effect is difficult to discern, magnify
the image (=299) and check the four corners. The peripheral
illumination correction applied with the camera will be less pronounced
than that applied with the Digital Photo Professional (EOS software)
at maximum correction amount. If the effects of correction are not
apparent, use Digital Photo Professional to apply the peripheral
illumination correction.
Image distortion due to lens characteristics can be corrected. If
[Enable] is set, the corrected image will be displayed. The image
periphery will be trimmed in the corrected image.
Since the image resolution may look slightly lower, adjust the
sharpness with the Picture Style’s [Sharpness] parameter setting as
necessary.
Correct lens aberration, diffraction, and low-pass filter-induced loss
of sharpness by applying optical design values. Magnify images
(=299) to check the effects of setting this option to [Enable].
Without magnification, the effect of Digital Lens Optimizer is not
displayed. Selecting [Enable] corrects both chromatic aberration and
diffraction, although these options are not displayed.
329
Processing RAW Images with the Camera
[
] Chromatic aberration correction (=126)
[
] Diffraction correction (=126)
Chromatic aberrations (color fringing along the subject’s outline) due
to the lens characteristics can be corrected. If [Enable] is set, the
corrected image will be displayed. If the effect is difficult to discern,
magnify the image (=299).
The diffraction by the lens aperture degrading the image sharpness
can be corrected. If [Enable] is set, the corrected image will be
displayed. If the effect is difficult to discern, magnify the image
(=299).
oo Processing RAW images in the camera will not produce exactly the same
results as processing RAW images with Digital Photo Professional (EOS
software).
oo If you perform [Brightness adjustment], noise, banding, etc. may be
intensified with the effects of adjustment.
oo When [Digital Lens Optimizer] is set, noise may be intensified together with
the effects of correction. Image edges may also be emphasized. Adjust Picture
Style sharpness or set [Digital Lens Optimizer] to [Disable], as needed.
oo The effect of the lens aberration correction varies depending on the lens used
and shooting conditions. Also, the effect may be difficult to discern depending
on the lens used, shooting conditions, etc.
330
Applying Your Favorite Effects (Creative
Assist)
You can process RAW images by applying your preferred effects and saving
as JPEGs.
1 Select [3: Creative Assist].
an image.
2 Select
zz Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select
images to process, then press <0>.
an effect level.
3 Select
zz Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select the
effect.
zz By selecting [Preset] and pressing
<0>, you can choose [Vivid],
[Soft], or other preset effects. [Auto
1], [Auto 2], and [Auto 3] are effects
recommended by the camera based on
image conditions.
331
Applying Your Favorite Effects (Creative Assist)
zz You can adjust effects such as
[Brightness] or [Contrast] by pressing
<0> and then using the <Y> <Z>
keys.
zz Press <0> when adjustment is
finished.
zz To reset the effect, press the <L>
button.
zz To confirm the effect, press the <S>
button.
4 Select [OK] to save the image.
332
Selecting the Type of RAW Image
Processing
You can select the type of RAW image processing performed from the Quick
Control screen.
[3: Quick Control RAW
1 Select
processing].
an item.
2 Select
zz Creative Assist
RAW processing that applies your
preferred effect (=331).
zz RAW image processing
RAW processing according to conditions
you specify (=325).
333
Editing Video Snapshot Albums
You can rearrange, delete, or play back the video snapshots in an album.
1 Select [3: Create album].
an album to edit.
2 Select
zz Press <0> to add a checkmark [X].
zz After selection, press the <M>
button.
3 Select [OK].
4 Select an editing option.
334
Editing Video Snapshot Albums
Option
Description
Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select a video snapshot to move,
T Rearrange video
then press <0>. Use the <Y> <Z> keys to move it, then
snapshots
press <0>.
L Remove video
snapshot
Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select a video snapshot to delete,
then press <0>. Selected video snapshots are labeled [L].
To clear the selection and remove [L], press <0> again.
7 Play video
snapshot
Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select a video snapshot to play, then
press <0>. Use the <W> <X> keys to adjust the volume.
editing.
5 Finish
zz Press the <M> button when you are
finished editing.
zz Select [W] (Finish editing).
the image.
6 Save
zz To play an album with background
music, use [Background music] to
select the music (=336).
zz To check your editing, select [Preview].
zz Selecting [Save] saves the edited album
as a new album.
oo Video snapshot albums can only be edited once.
335
Editing Video Snapshot Albums
Selecting Background Music
Albums and slideshows can be played with background music once you
copy the music to the card, using EOS Utility (EOS software).
[Background music].
1 Select
zz Set [Background music] to [On].
the background music.
2 Select
zz Use the <W> <X> keys to select the
music, then press <0>. For [Slide
show], you can select multiple tracks.
to a sample.
3 Listen
zz To listen to a sample, press the <B>
button.
zz Use the <W> <X> keys to adjust the
volume. Press the <B> again to stop
playback.
zz To delete the music, use the <W> <X>
keys to select it, then press the <L>
button.
oo For instructions on copying background music to cards, refer to the EOS Utility
Instruction Manual.
336
Cropping JPEG Images
You can crop a captured JPEG image and save it as another image.
Cropping an image is possible only with JPEG images. Images shot in
RAW cannot be cropped.
1 Select [x: Cropping].
an image.
2 Select
zz Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select the
image to crop.
the cropping frame.
3 Set
zz Press <0> to display the cropping
frame.
zz The image area within the cropping
frame will be cropped.
zzChanging the Cropping Frame Size
Turn the <6> dial to change the cropping frame size. The smaller the
cropping frame, the more magnified the cropped image will look.
zzChanging the Aspect Ratio and Orientation
Turn the <5> dial to select <e>. Press <0> to change the cropping
frame’s aspect ratio.
337
Cropping JPEG Images
zzMoving the Cropping Frame
Press the <V> cross keys to move the frame vertically or horizontally.
Move the cropping frame until it covers the desired image area.
zzCorrecting the Tilt
You can correct image tilt by ±10°. Turn the <5> dial to select <c>,
then press <0>. While checking the tilt against the grid, turn the <5>
dial (in 0.1° increments) or tap the left or right wedge (in 0.5° increments)
on the upper left of the screen to correct the tilt. After completing the tilt
correction, press <0>.
the image area to be
4 Check
cropped.
zz Turn the <5> dial to select <b>.
gg The image area to be cropped will be
displayed.
the image.
5 Save
zz Turn the <5> dial to select <W>.
zz Select [OK] to save the cropped image.
zz Check the destination folder and image
file number, then select [OK].
zz To crop another image, repeat steps 2 to
5.
oo The position and size of the cropping frame may change depending on the
angle set for tilt correction.
oo Once a cropped image is saved, it cannot be cropped again or resized.
oo AF point display information (=352) and Dust Delete Data (=161) will not
be appended to the cropped images.
338
Resizing JPEG Images
You can resize a JPEG image to make the pixel count lower and save it as
a new image. Resizing an image is possible only with JPEG 3, 4, and a
images. JPEG b and RAW images cannot be resized.
1 Select [3: Resize].
an image.
2 Select
zz Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select the
image to resize.
the desired image size.
3 Select
zz Press <0> to display the image sizes.
zz Select the desired image size (1).
zz Only resizing to b is available for JPEG
images captured in cropped shooting or
with EF-S lenses.
(1)
the image.
4 Save
zz Select [OK] to save the resized image.
zz Check the destination folder and image
file number, then select [OK].
zz To resize another image, repeat steps 2
to 4.
oo For details on image sizes of resized images, see =590.
339
Setting Ratings
You can rate images on a scale of 1–5 (l/m/n/o/p). This function is
called rating.
Rating a Single Image
1 Select [3: Rating].
2 Select [Select images].
the image to be rated.
3 Select
zz Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select the
image to rate.
the image.
4 Rate
zz Press <0>, and a blue highlight frame
will appear as shown in the screen
shown on the left.
zz Use the <W> <X> keys to select a
rating mark, then press <0>.
gg When you append a rating mark to the
image, the number beside the set rating
will increase by one.
zz To rate another image, repeat steps 3
and 4.
340
Setting Ratings
Rating by Specifying the Range
While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the first
and last images for a range to rate all the specified images at once.
[Select range].
1 Select
zz Select [Select range] in [3: Rating].
the range of images.
2 Specify
zz Select the first image (start point).
zz Next, select the last image (end point).
gg A checkmark [X] will be appended to
all the images within the range between
first and last images.
3 Press the <M> button.
the image.
4 Rate
zz Turn the <6> dial to select a rating
mark, then select [OK].
gg All the images in the specified range will
be rated (same rating) at once.
341
Setting Ratings
Rating All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can rate all the images in a folder or on a card at once.
Under [3: Rating], when you select [All
images in folder] or [All images on card],
all the images in the folder or on the card
will be rated.
Turn the <6> dial to select a rating, then
select [OK].
When you are not rating images or
cancelling the rating, select [OFF].
If the search conditions are set with [3: Set image search conditions]
(=345), the display will change to [All found images].
If you select [All found images], all the
images filtered by the search conditions will
be rated as specified.
oo Values next to ratings are displayed as [###] if more than 1,000 images have
that rating.
oo With [3: Set image search conditions] and [3: Image jump w/6], you
can display only the images given a specific rating.
342
Slide Show (Auto Playback)
You can play back the images on the card as an automatic slide show.
the images to be played
1 Specify
back.
zz To play back all the images on the card,
go to step 2.
zz If you want to specify the images to be
played back in the slide show, filter the
images with [3: Set image search
conditions] (=345).
2 Select [3: Slide show].
the playback as desired.
3 Set
zz Select [Set up].
zz Set the [Display time], [Repeat]
(repeated playback), and [Transition
effect] (effect when changing images)
for the still photos.
zz To play background music, use
[Background music] to select the
music (=336).
zz After completing the settings, press the
<M> button.
343
Slide Show (Auto Playback)
Display time
Repeat
Transition effect
Background music
the slide show.
4 Start
zz Select [Start].
gg After [Loading image...] is displayed,
the slide show will start.
the slide show.
5 Exit
zz To exit the slide show and return to
the setting screen, press the <M>
button.
oo To pause the slide show, press <0>. During pause, [G] will be displayed on
the upper left of the image. Press <0> again to resume the slide show.
oo During the automatic playback of still photos, you can press the <B>
button to switch the display format (=296).
oo Volume during movie playback can be adjusted by pressing the <W> <X>
keys.
oo During auto playback or pause, you can press the <Y> <Z> keys to view
another image.
oo During auto playback, auto power off will not take effect.
oo The display time may differ depending on the image.
344
Filtering Images for Playback
You can filter image display according to your search conditions. After
setting the image search conditions, you can play back and display only the
found images.
You can also protect, rate, erase, play a slide show, and apply other
operations to filtered images.
[3: Set image search
1 Select
conditions].
the search conditions.
2 Set
zz Use the <W> <X> keys to select an
item.
zz Use the <Y> <Z> keys to set the
setting.
gg A checkmark [X] (1) is appended to the
left of the item. (Specified as the search
condition.)
zz If you select the item and press the
<B> button, the checkmark [X] will
be removed. (The search condition is
canceled.)
(1)
Item
Description
9Rating
Displays images with the selected (rating) condition.
dDate
Displays images taken on the selected shooting date.
nFolder
Displays images in the selected folder.
JProtect
Displays images with the selected (protect) condition.
fType of file
Displays images in the selected file type.
345
Filtering Images for Playback
the search conditions.
3 Apply
zz Press <0> and read the message
displayed.
zz Select [OK].
gg The search condition is specified.
the found images.
4 Display
zz Press the <3> button.
(2)
gg Only the images that match the set
conditions (filtered) will be played back.
gg When the images are filtered for display,
the screen will have an outer yellow
frame (2).
Clearing the Search Conditions
Access the screen in step 2, then press the <L> button to remove all the
checkmarks [X]. Press <0> to clear the search conditions.
oo If no images match the search conditions, [OK] is not available on the screen
in step 2.
oo Search conditions may be cleared if you perform power, card, or image editing
operations.
oo Auto power off time may be extended while the [3: Set image search
conditions] screen is displayed.
346
Jump Display (Jumping Through Images)
In the single-image display, you can turn the <6> dial to jump through the
images forward or backward according to the jump method set.
1 Select [x: Image jump w/6].
2 Select the jump method.
oo With [Jump images by the specified number], you can turn the <6> dial
to select the number of images to jump by.
oo When you select [Display by image rating], turn the <6> dial to specify the
rating (=340). If you browse images with 9 selected, all the rated images
will be displayed.
347
Jump Display (Jumping Through Images)
by jumping.
3 Browse
zz Press the <x> button.
zz In the single-image display, turn the
<6> dial.
gg You can browse by the set method.
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2)
Jump method
Playback position
oo To search images by shooting date, select [g: Date].
oo To search images by folder, select [h: Folder].
oo If the card contains both movies and still photos, select [i: Movies] or [j:
Stills] to display one or the other.
348
Customizing Playback Information Display
You can specify screens and accompanying information displayed during
image playback.
[3: Playback information
1 Select
display].
a checkmark [X] next to the
2 Add
number of screens to display.
zz Use the <W> <X> keys to select a
number.
zz Press <0> to add a checkmark [X].
zz Repeat these steps to add a checkmark
[X] to the number of each screen to
display, then select [OK].
gg Your selected information can be
accessed by pressing the <B>
button during playback, or by pressing
the <W> <X> keys when shooting
information is displayed.
Histogram
The brightness histogram shows the
exposure level distribution and overall
brightness. The RGB histogram is for
checking the color saturation and gradation.
You can switch the histogram displayed by
pressing the <B> button when <z>
is displayed in the lower left of the [x:
Playback information display] screen.
349
Customizing Playback Information Display
zz[Brightness] display
This histogram is a graph showing the distribution
of the image’s brightness level. The horizontal
axis indicates the brightness level (darker on the
left and brighter on the right) while the vertical
axis indicates how many pixels exist for each
brightness level. The more pixels there are
toward the left, the darker the image. The more
pixels there are toward the right, the brighter the
image. If there are too many pixels on the left, the
shadow detail will be lost. If there are too many
pixels on the right, the highlight detail will be lost.
The gradation in-between will be reproduced. By
checking the image and its brightness histogram,
you can see the exposure level inclination and
the overall gradation.
zz[RGB] display
Sample Histograms
Dark image
Normal brightness
Bright image
This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of each primary
color’s brightness level in the image (RGB or red, green, and blue). The
horizontal axis indicates the color’s brightness level (darker on the left
and brighter on the right), while the vertical axis indicates how many
pixels exist for each color brightness level. The more pixels there are
toward the left, the darker and less prominent the color. The more pixels
there are toward the right, the brighter and denser the color. If there
are too many pixels on the left, the respective color information will be
lacking. If there are too many pixels on the right, the color will be too
saturated with no gradation. By checking the image’s RGB histogram,
you can see the color’s saturation and gradation condition, as well as
white balance inclination.
350
Displaying the Highlight Alert
You can specify blinking display of overexposed highlights on the playback
screen. To obtain more detailed gradation in the blinking areas where
you want the gradation to be faithfully reproduced, set the exposure
compensation to a negative amount and shoot again for a better result.
1 Select [3: Highlight alert].
2 Select [Enable].
351
Displaying AF Points
You can display the AF points that were used to focus, which will be outlined
in red on the playback screen. If automatic AF point selection is set, multiple
AF points may be displayed.
1 Select [3: AF point disp.].
2 Select [Enable].
352
Displaying a Grid
You can display a grid over still photos shown in single-image display on
the playback screen. This function is convenient for checking the image’s
vertical or horizontal tilt as well as composition.
1 Select [3: Playback grid].
2 Select an item.
353
Specifying Initial Image Display When
Playback Begins
You can specify which image is displayed first when you start image
playback.
1 Select [3: View from last seen].
an item.
2 Select
zz [Enable]: Playback resumes from the
last image displayed (except when you
have just finished shooting).
zz [Disable]: Playback resumes from your
most recent shot whenever the camera
is restarted.
354
Setting the Initial Magnification Ratio and
Position
You can set the initial magnification ratio and position for the magnified view.
1 Select [3: Magnificatn (apx)].
2 Select an item.
zz1x (no magnification)
The image is not magnified. The magnified view will start with the singleimage display.
zz2x, 4x, 8x, 10x (magnify from center)
The magnified view starts at the image center at the selected
magnification.
zzActual size (from selected point)
The recorded image’s pixels will be displayed at approx. 100%. The
magnified view starts at the AF point that achieved focus. If the photo is
taken with manual focus, the magnified view starts at the image center.
zzSame as last magnification (from center)
The magnification will be the same as the last time you exited the
magnified view with the <u> button. The magnified view starts at the
image center.
oo Under some AF method settings, the magnified view extends from the center
of images even if [Actual size (from selected pt)] is set.
355
356
Set-up
This chapter describes menu settings on the set-up ([5]) tab.
zz A M icon to the right of a page title indicates that the function
is available only in <t>, <d>, <s>, <f>, <a>, or <F>
mode.
357
Tab Menus: Set-up
zzSet-up 1
=361
=363
=366
=367
=369
=370
zzSet-up 2
=371
=372
=373
=374
=377
zzSet-up 3
=378
=379
=380
=381
=382
=386
=387
358
Tab Menus: Set-up
zzSet-up 4
=388
=393
=393
=394
=395
=397
zzSet-up 5
=398
=402
zzSet-up 6
=407
=408
=410
=411
=413
=413
=413
359
Tab Menus: Set-up
When you are recording movies, the following screen is
displayed for [54] and [56].
zzSet-up 4
=388
=393
=394
=395
=397
zzSet-up 6
=407
=410
=411
=413
=413
In Basic Zone and [HDR Movie] modes, the following screen is
displayed for [56].
=407
=413
360
Creating and Selecting a Folder
You can freely create and select the folder where the captured images are
to be saved.
Creating a Folder
1 Select [5: Select folder].
2 Select [Create folder].
3 Select [OK].
361
Creating and Selecting a Folder
Selecting a Folder
(1)
(3)
(2)
(4)
zz Select a folder on the folder selection
screen.
zz Captured images are stored in your
selected folder.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Number of images in folder
Lowest file number
Folder name
Highest file number
Folders
oo A folder can contain up to 9999 images (file number 0001–9999). When a
folder becomes full, a new folder with the folder number increased by one
is created automatically. Also, if manual reset (=365) is executed, a new
folder will be created automatically. Folders numbered from 100 to 999 can be
created.
Creating Folders with a Computer
oo With the card open on the screen, create a new folder named “DCIM”. Open
the DCIM folder and create as many folders as necessary to save and
organize your images. The folder name must follow the format “100ABC_D”.
The first three digits are always the folder number from 100 to 999. The last
five characters can be any combination of upper- and lower-case letters from
A to Z, numerals, and the underscore “_”. The space cannot be used. Also
note that two folder names cannot share the same three-digit folder number (for
example, “100ABC_D” and “100W_XYZ”) even if the remaining five characters
in each name are different.
362
File Numbering Methods
The captured images saved in a folder are
assigned a file number from 0001 to 9999.
You can change how the image files are
numbered.
(Example) IMG_0001.JPG
File number
1 Select [5: File numbering].
the item.
2 Set
zz Select [Numbering].
zz Select [Continuous] or [Auto reset].
zz If you want to reset the file numbering,
select [Manual reset] (=365).
zz Select [OK] to create a new folder, and
the file number will start with 0001.
oo If the file number in folder 999 reaches 9999, shooting will not be possible
even if the card still has storage capacity. The screen will display a message
telling you to replace the card. Replace it with a new card.
363
File Numbering Methods
Continuous
When you wish to continue the file numbering sequence even after the
card is replaced or a new folder is created.
Even after you replace the card or create a new folder, the file numbering
continues in sequence up to 9999. This is useful when you want to save
images numbered anywhere between 0001 to 9999 on multiple cards or in
multiple folders into one folder on a computer.
If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images recorded
previously, the file numbering of the new images may continue from the file
numbering of the existing images on the card or in the folder. If you want
to use continuous file numbering, it is recommended that you use a newlyformatted card each time.
File numbering after replacing the card
Card 1
File numbering after creating a folder
Card 2
Card 1
100
0051
0052
(1)
(1)
364
Next sequential file number
101
0051
0052
File Numbering Methods
Auto Reset
When you wish to restart the file numbering from 0001 each time the
card is replaced or a new folder is created.
When you replace the card or create a folder, the file numbering restarts
from 0001 for the new images saved. This is useful if you want to organize
images by cards or folders.
If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images recorded
previously, the file numbering of the new images may continue from the file
numbering of the existing images on the card or in the folder. If you want
to save images with the file numbering starting from 0001, use a newly
formatted card each time.
File numbering after replacing the card
Card 1
File numbering after creating a folder
Card 2
Card 1
100
0051
0001
101
0051
0001
(1)
(1)
File numbering is reset
Manual Reset
When you wish to reset the file numbering to 0001 or to start from file
number 0001 in a new folder.
When you reset the file numbering manually, a new folder is created
automatically and the file numbering of images saved to that folder starts
from 0001.
This is useful, for example, if you want to use different folders for the images
taken yesterday and the ones taken today.
365
Setting the Auto Rotation of Vertical Images
You can change the auto rotation setting that
straightens images shot in vertical orientation when
they are displayed.
1 Select [5: Auto rotate].
2 Select an item.
zzOnzD
Automatically rotates images for display on both the camera and
computers.
zzOnD
Automatically rotates images only for display on computers.
zzOff
oo Images captured with auto rotation set to [Off] will not rotate during playback
even if you later set auto rotation to [On].
oo If a picture is taken while the camera is pointing up or down, automatic rotation
to the proper orientation for viewing may not be performed correctly.
oo If images are not rotated automatically on a computer, try using EOS software.
366
Formatting Memory Cards
If the card is new or was previously formatted (initialized) by another camera
or computer, format the card with this camera.
oo When the card is formatted, all images and data on the card will be
erased. Even protected images will be erased, so make sure there is
nothing you need to keep. If necessary, transfer the images and data to a
computer, etc. before formatting the card.
1 Select [5: Format card].
the card.
2 Format
zz Select [OK].
zz For low-level formatting, press the <L>
button to add a checkmark <X> to [Low
level format], then select [OK].
oo The card capacity displayed on the card format screen may be smaller than
the capacity indicated on the card.
oo This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.
367
Formatting Memory Cards
Format the Card in the Following Cases:
zz The card is new.
zz The card was formatted by a different camera or a computer.
zz The card is full of images or data.
zz A card-related error is displayed (=581).
Low-Level Formatting
zz Perform low-level formatting if the card’s writing or reading speed seems
slow or if you want to totally erase the data on the card.
zz Since low-level formatting will format all recordable sectors on the card,
the formatting will take longer than normal formatting.
zz During low-level formatting, you can cancel formatting by selecting
[Cancel]. Even in this case, normal formatting will already be complete
and you can use the card as usual.
Card’s File Formats
zz SD/SDHC cards will be formatted in FAT32. SDXC cards will be
formatted in exFAT.
zz When recording a movie with a card formatted in exFAT, the movie will be
recorded in a single file (instead of being split into multiple files) even if it
exceeds 4 GB. (The movie file will exceed 4 GB.)
oo It may not be possible to use SDXC cards formatted with this camera in other
cameras. Also note that exFAT-formatted cards may not be recognized by
some computer operating systems or card readers.
oo Formatting or erasing data on a card does not completely erase the data. Be
aware of this when selling or discarding the card. When disposing of cards,
take steps to protect personal information if necessary, as by physically
destroying cards.
368
Displaying the Shooting Mode Guide
A brief description of the shooting mode can be displayed when you switch
shooting modes.
1 Select [5: Mode guide].
2 Select [Enable].
the Mode dial.
3 Turn
gg A brief description of the selected
shooting mode is displayed.
zz To display more details, press the <X>
key.
zz To clear the mode guide, press <0>.
In <8> or <k> mode, the shooting
mode selection screen is displayed.
369
Displaying the Feature Guide
A brief description of functions and items can be displayed when you use
Quick Control setting.
1 Select [5: Feature guide].
2 Select [Enable].
oo To clear a description, either tap it or continue performing operations.
370
Setting Eco Mode
Enables you to conserve battery power in shooting mode. When the camera
is not in use, the screen darkens to reduce battery consumption.
1 Select [5: Eco mode].
[On].
2 Select
zz The screen darkens when the camera
is not used for approx. two seconds.
Approx. ten seconds after darkening, the
screen turns off.
zz To activate the screen and prepare for
shooting when the screen is off, press
the shutter button halfway.
371
Setting Power-Saving Features
You can adjust the timing of when the screen, camera, and viewfinder turn
off automatically (Display off, Auto power off, and Viewfinder off).
1 Select [5: Power saving].
an item.
2 Select
zz Even when [Auto power off] is set to
[Disable], the screen will turn off after
the time set in [Display off].
oo [Display off] and [Auto power off] settings do not apply when Eco mode is
set to [On].
372
Adjusting the Screen Brightness
Screen and viewfinder brightness can be adjusted separately.
1 Select [5: Disp. brightness].
the adjustment.
2 Make
zz Referring to the gray chart, use the <Y>
<Z> keys to adjust the brightness, then
press <0>.
zz When adjusting viewfinder brightness,
look through the viewfinder as you set it.
oo To check the image’s exposure, referring to the histogram (=349) is
recommended.
373
Setting the Date, Time, and Time Zone
When you turn on the power for the first time or if the date/time/zone have
been reset, follow the steps below to set the time zone first.
By setting the time zone first, you can simply adjust this setting as needed
in the future and the date/time will be updated to match it.
Since the captured images will be appended with the shooting date
and time information, be sure to set your date/time.
1 Select [5: Date/Time/Zone].
the time zone.
2 Set
zz Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select [Time
zone].
zz Press <0>.
zz Use the <W> <X> keys to select the
time zone, then press <0>.
zz If your time zone is not listed, press the
<M> button, then set the difference
from UTC in [Time difference].
374
Setting the Date, Time, and Time Zone
zz Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select
a [Time difference] item (+/–/hour/
minute), then press <0>.
zz Use the <W> <X> keys to set it, then
press <0>.
zz After entering the time zone or time
difference, use the <Y> <Z> keys to
select [OK], then press <0>.
the date and time.
3 Set
zz Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select an
item, then press <0>.
zz Use the <W> <X> keys to set it, then
press <0>.
the daylight saving time.
4 Set
zz Set it as necessary.
zz Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select [Y],
then press <0>.
zz Use the <W> <X> keys to select [Z],
then press <0>.
zz When the daylight saving time is set to
[Z], the time set in step 3 will advance
by 1 hour. If [Y] is set, the daylight
saving time will be canceled and the
time will go back by 1 hour.
the setting.
5 Exit
zz Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select [OK].
375
Setting the Date, Time, and Time Zone
oo The date, time, and time zone settings may be reset when the camera is
stored without the battery, when its battery becomes exhausted, or when
it is exposed to below freezing temperatures for a prolonged period. If this
happens, set them once again.
oo After changing [Zone/Time difference], check that the correct date/time are
set.
oo Auto power off time may be extended while the [5: Date/Time/Zone] screen
is displayed.
376
Setting the Interface Language
1 Select [5: LanguageK].
2 Set the desired language.
377
Setting the Video System
Set the video system of any television used for display. This setting
determines the frame rates available when you record movies.
1 Select [5: Video system].
an item.
2 Select
zz NTSC
For areas where the TV system is NTSC
(North America, Japan, South Korea,
Mexico, etc.).
zz PAL
For areas where the TV system is PAL
(Europe, Russia, China, Australia, etc.).
378
Setting the Touch Control Response
1 Select [5: Touch control].
an item.
2 Select
zz [Standard] is the normal setting.
zz [Sensitive] provides a more reactive
touch-screen panel response than
[Standard].
zz To disable touch operations, select
[Disable].
Cautions for Touch Control Operations
oo Do not use sharp objects such as fingernails or ballpoint pens for touch
operations.
oo Do not use wet fingers for touch operations. If the screen has any moisture or
if your fingers are wet, the touch-screen panel may not respond or malfunction
may occur. In this case, turn off the power and wipe off the moisture with a
cloth.
oo Attaching any commercially available protective sheet or sticker on the screen
may degrade the touch operation response.
oo If you quickly perform touch operation when [Sensitive] is set, the touch
operation response may be poor.
379
Disabling Beeps for Camera Operations
You can disable beeping when subjects are in focus or for other operations.
1 Select [5: Beep].
an item.
2 Select
zz Touch
The beeper will be silent only for touch
operations.
zz Disable
Disables beeping when subjects are
in focus, when you shoot with the
self-timer, and when you use touch
operations.
380
Checking the Battery Information
You can check the conditions of the battery you are using.
1 Select [5: Battery info.].
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(3)
(4)
Battery position
Model of battery or household power
outlet accessory used.
Battery level (=47).
Battery’s recharge performance level
is displayed.
(Green) :Battery’s recharge
performance is good.
(Green) :Battery’s recharge
performance is
slightly degraded.
(Red) :Purchasing a
new battery is
recommended.
oo Using a genuine Canon Battery Pack LP-E17 is recommended. If you use
batteries that are not genuine Canon products, the camera’s full performance
may not be attained or malfunction may result.
oo If a battery communication error message is displayed, follow the instructions
in the message.
381
Sensor Cleaning
The camera’s sensor cleaning feature cleans the front of the image sensor.
Activating Immediate Cleaning
1 Select [5: Sensor cleaning].
[Clean nowf].
2 Select
zz Select [OK] on the confirmation dialog.
382
Sensor Cleaning
Setting Auto Cleaning
1 Select [Auto cleaningf].
an item.
2 Select
zz Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select an
item, then press <0>.
oo For best results, clean with the camera in a stable position on a desk or other
flat surface.
oo Even if you repeat the sensor cleaning, the result will not improve much. Note
that [Clean nowf] may not be available immediately after cleaning.
oo Dots of light may appear in captured images or on the shooting screen if
the sensor is affected by cosmic rays or similar factors. By selecting [Clean
nowf], their appearance may be suppressed (=382).
383
Sensor Cleaning
Manual Sensor Cleaning
Dust that could not be removed by automatic cleaning can be removed
manually with a commercially available blower or similar tool.
The image sensor is extremely delicate. If the sensor needs to
be cleaned directly, having it done by a Canon Service Center is
recommended.
1 Setting the power switch to <2>.
the lens and clean the
2 Remove
sensor.
the cleaning.
3 End
zz Attach the lens or body cap.
384
Sensor Cleaning
oo During sensor cleaning, never set the power switch to <1>. This will
cause the shutter to move, which may damage the image sensor or
shutter curtains.
oo The surface of the image sensor is extremely delicate. Clean the sensor with
care.
oo Use a plain blower without any brush attached. A brush can scratch the
sensor.
oo Do not insert the blower tip inside the camera beyond the lens mount. This
may damage the shutter curtains.
oo Never use pressurized air or gas to clean the sensor. Pressurized air may
damage the sensor, and sprayed gas may freeze on the sensor and scratch it.
oo If a smudge that cannot be removed with a blower remains, having the sensor
cleaned by a Canon Service Center is recommended.
385
Setting the HDMI Output Resolution
Set the image output resolution used when the camera is connected to a
television or external recording device with an HDMI cable.
1 Select [5: HDMI resolution].
an item.
2 Select
zz Auto
The images will automatically be
displayed at the optimum resolution
matching the connected television.
zz 1080p
Output at 1080p resolution. Select if you
prefer to avoid display or delay issues
when the camera switches resolution.
386
RAW Playback on an HDR TV
You can view RAW images in HDR by connecting the camera to an HDR
TV.
1 Select [5: HDMI HDR output].
2 Select [On].
oo Image operations such as RAW processing are not available during HDR
display.
oo JPEG images are used for HDR display in the case of L (ISO 50-equivalent)
images or multiple-exposure RAW images.
oo Make sure the HDR TV is set up for HDR input. For details on how to switch
inputs on the TV, refer to the TV manual.
oo Depending on the TV used, images may not look as expected.
oo Some image effects and information may not be displayed on an HDR TV.
387
Customizing Information Displayed When
Shooting
You can customize the details and screens of information shown on the
camera or in the viewfinder when you shoot.
Select [5: Shooting info. disp.].
Customizing Information on the Screen
1 Select [Screen info. settings].
screens.
2 Select
zz Use the <W> <X> keys to select
screens of information to show on the
camera.
zz For information you prefer not to display,
press <0> to clear the checkmark
[X].
zz To edit the screen, press the <B>
button.
the screen.
3 Edit
zz Use the <W> <X> keys to select items
to show on the screen.
zz For items you prefer not to display, press
<0> to clear the checkmark [X].
zz Select [OK] to register the setting.
388
Customizing Information Displayed When Shooting
Customizing Information in the Viewfinder
1 Select [VF info/toggle settings].
screens.
2 Select
zz Use the <W> <X> keys to select
screens of information to show in the
viewfinder.
zz For information you prefer not to display,
press <0> to clear the checkmark
[X].
zz To edit the screen, press the <B>
button.
the screen.
3 Edit
zz Use the <W> <X> keys to select items
to show in the viewfinder.
zz For items you prefer not to display, press
<0> to clear the checkmark [X].
zz Select [OK] to register the setting.
389
Customizing Information Displayed When Shooting
Vertical Viewfinder Display
You can select how viewfinder information is displayed when you are
shooting still photos vertically.
1 Select [VF vertical display].
an item.
2 Select
zz On
Information is automatically rotated,
making it easier to read.
zz Off
Information is not automatically rotated.
Grid Display
A grid can be displayed on the screen and viewfinder.
1 Select [Grid display].
2 Select an item.
390
Customizing Information Displayed When Shooting
Setting the Histogram
You can select the content and display size of the histogram.
1 Select [Histogram disp].
an item.
2 Select
zz Select the content ([Brightness] or
[RGB]) and display size ([Large] or
[Small]).
zz Press <M> button to confirm the
setting.
Setting Focus Distance Display
You can display focus distance when using RF lenses. In focus distance
display, you can select the timing and unit of measurement.
1 Select [Focus distance disp].
2 Select the timing of display.
the unit of measurement.
3 Select
zz Press <M> button to confirm the
setting.
391
Customizing Information Displayed When Shooting
Clearing Settings
You can restore [Shooting info. disp.] to the default settings.
1 Select [Reset].
2 Select [OK].
392
Setting a Priority for Shooting Display
Performance
You can select the performance option to prioritize in viewfinder display for
still photos.
1 Select [5: Viewfinder performance].
2 Select an item.
Setting the Viewfinder Display Format
You can select the viewfinder display format.
1 Select [5: VF display format].
an item.
2 Select
zz Use the <W> <X> keys to select an
item.
zz Press <0> to set it.
393
Setting the Display Mode
You can select the display mode for shooting screens.
1 Select [5: Display settings].
an item.
2 Select
zz Auto
Normally use the screen for display, but
switch to the viewfinder when you look
through it.
zz Manual
You can restrict display to the screen or
viewfinder.
screen or viewfinder display.
3 Select
zz Press <0> to set it.
394
Customizing Shutter Button Functionality
for Movie Recording
You can set the functions performed by pressing the shutter button halfway
or completely during movie recording.
[5: Shutter btn function for
1 Select
movies].
an item.
2 Select
zz Half-press
Specify the function performed by
pressing the shutter button halfway.
zz Fully-press (shown in <k> mode)
Specify the function performed by
pressing the shutter button completely.
With [Fully-press] set to [Start/stop mov rec], you can start/stop movie
recording not only by pressing the movie shooting button but also by
pressing the shutter button completely or by using Remote Switch RS-60E3
(sold separately, =219).
oo [Half-press] switches from [Meter.+One-Shot AF] to [Meter.+k Servo AF]
when [Movie rec. size] is set to [H].
oo Even if you set [Fully-press] to [No function], the camera will start or stop
recording time-lapse movies if the shutter button is pressed completely when
the camera is set up for time-lapse movies.
395
Help
When [zHelp] is displayed below a menu, you can display a description
about the feature by pressing the <B> button. Press it again to exit Help
display. To scroll the screen when a scrollbar (1) appears on the right, press
the <W> <X> keys or turn the <5> dial.
zzExample: [z: High ISO speed NR]
<B>
B
(1)
zzExample: [5: Multi function lock]
<B>
B
396
Help
Help Display Text Size
You can change the text size for the Help display.
1 Select [5: Help text size].
2 Select an item.
397
Setting Wireless Features
You can connect the camera to a smartphone or computer wirelessly and
send your shots or control the camera remotely.
[5: Wireless communication
1 Select
settings].
the item.
2 Set
zz For details, see “Wi-Fi (Wireless
Communication) Functions”.
398
Setting Wireless Features
Shooting with a Remote Control
You can shoot remotely by pairing the camera via Bluetooth with Wireless
Remote Control BR-E1 (sold separately), which supports Bluetooth low
energy technology.
Pairing
To use BR-E1, you must first pair (connect and register) the camera and
remote control.
[5: Wireless communication
1 Select
settings].
2 Select [Bluetooth function].
3 Select [Bluetooth function].
[Remote].
4 Select
zz If the message “Register a nickname to
identify the camera.” appears, register a
nickname as described on =422.
399
Setting Wireless Features
[Pairing].
5 Select
zz Select [Pairing].
zz Press and hold the <W> button and <T>
button on the BR-E1 simultaneously for
3 sec. or more.
gg Pairing now begins. When pairing is
complete, BR-E1 is registered on the
camera.
When shooting still
photos
When recording movies
up the camera for remote
6 Set
shooting.
zz Select [Q] or [k] as the drive mode
(=209).
zz In [z: Remote control], select
[Enable].
zz For instructions after the pairing
is complete, refer to the BR-E1’s
Instruction Manual.
oo Bluetooth connections consume battery power even after the camera’s auto
power off is activated.
oo When you do not use the Bluetooth function, setting it to [Disable] in step 4 is
recommended. To use the remote control again, select [Remote] again.
oo Auto power off time may be extended when the camera is set for remote
shooting.
400
Setting Wireless Features
Canceling the Pairing
Before pairing with a different BR-E1, clear the information about the
connected remote control.
[5: Wireless communication
1 Select
settings].
2 Select [Bluetooth function].
[Check/clear connection
3 Select
info].
4 Press the <B> button.
the connection information.
5 Clear
zz Select [OK].
401
Geotagging Images
You can geotag images with GPS Receiver GP-E2 (sold separately) or a
Bluetooth enabled smartphone.
Using GP-E2
GP-E2 to the camera.
1 Attach
zz Attach GP-E2 to the camera’s hot shoe
and turn it on. For details, refer to the
GP-E2 Instruction Manual.
2 Select [5: GPS device settings].
3 Select [GPS receiver].
the picture.
4 Take
zz For details on [Set up], refer to the GPE2 Instruction Manual.
Precautions When Using GP-E2
oo Be sure to check the countries and regions where its use is allowed, and use
the function in accordance with the laws and regulations of the country or
region.
oo Make sure the GP-E2 firmware is updated to Ver. 2.0.0 or later. Firmware
updating requires an interface cable. For updating instructions, visit the Canon
website.
oo The cable cannot be used to connect the camera to the GP-E2.
oo The digital compass cannot be used with the camera, and the shooting
direction is not recorded.
402
Geotagging Images
Using a Smartphone
The dedicated app Camera Connect (free of charge) must be installed on
the smartphone. For details on installing Camera Connect, see =420.
Specifying the smartphone as the GPS device
the smartphone, activate
1 On
location services.
a Bluetooth connection.
2 Establish
zz Connect the camera to a smartphone
via Bluetooth. For details, see =421.
3 Select [5: GPS device settings].
403
Geotagging Images
[Smartphone].
4 Select
zz Select [Smartphone] in [Select GPS
device].
gg Location information can now be
acquired from the smartphone.
zz To check acquired geotag information
(latitude, longitude, elevation, and
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)),
select [GPS information display] on
the [GPS device settings] screen.
the picture.
5 Take
zz Images are geotagged with the
information from the smartphone.
404
Geotagging Images
GPS connection display
You can check the status of smartphone location information acquisition in
the GPS connection icon on the screens for still photo or movie shooting
(=592 and =593, respectively).
Gray: Location services are off
Blinking: Location information cannot be acquired
On: Location information acquired
For details on how GPS connection status is indicated when the GP-E2 is
used, refer to the GP-E2 Instruction Manual.
Geotagging images as you shoot
Images you shoot while the GPS icon is on are geotagged.
Geotagging information
You can check the location information added to your shots on the shooting
information screen (=296, =349).
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Latitude
Longitude
Elevation
UTC (Coordinated Universal
Time)
405
Geotagging Images
oo The smartphone can acquire location information only while it is paired with
the camera via Bluetooth.
oo Direction information is not acquired.
oo Acquired location information may not be accurate, depending on traveling
conditions or smartphone status.
oo It may take some time to acquire location information from the smartphone
after you turn the camera on.
oo Location information is no longer acquired after any of the following
operations.
• Setting [Bluetooth function] to an option other than [Smartphone]
• Turning the camera off
• Quitting Camera Connect
• Deactivating location services on the smartphone
oo Location information is no longer acquired in any of the following situations.
• The camera power turns off
• The Bluetooth connection is ended
• The smartphone’s remaining battery level is low
oo Coordinated Universal Time, abbreviated as UTC, is essentially the same as
Greenwich Mean Time.
oo For movies, the GPS information initially acquired is added.
406
Setting the Multi-Function Lock
Specify camera controls to lock when the Multi-function lock is enabled. This
can help prevent accidentally changing settings.
1 Select [5: Multi function lock].
camera controls to lock.
2 Select
zz Press <0> to add a checkmark [X].
zz Select [OK].
gg Setting the <R> switch to <R>
locks the selected [X] camera controls.
oo In Basic Zone modes, only [Touch control] can be set.
oo If it is changed from the default setting, an asterisk “*” will be displayed on the
right edge of [5: Multi function lock].
407
Registering Custom Shooting Modes
N
You can register current camera settings, such as shooting, menu, and
Custom Function settings, as Custom shooting modes assigned to <w> to
<y> modes.
[5: Custom shooting mode
1 Select
(C1-C3)].
2 Select [Register settings].
the desired items.
3 Register
zz Select the Custom shooting mode
to register, then select [OK] on the
registration screen.
gg The current camera settings are
registered to Custom shooting mode C*.
Automatic Update of Registered Settings
If you change a setting while shooting in Custom shooting mode, the mode
can be automatically updated with the new setting (Auto update). To enable
this automatic update, set [Auto update set.] to [Enable] in step 2.
Canceling Registered Custom Shooting Modes
If you select [Clear settings] in step 2, the settings of respective modes
can be reverted to the default settings with no Custom shooting modes
registered.
408
Registering Custom Shooting Modes
oo You can also change shooting and menu settings in Custom shooting modes.
409
Reverting the Camera to the Default
Settings
The camera’s settings for shooting functions and menu functions can be
reverted to their defaults.
[5: Clear all camera
1 Select
settings].
2 Select [OK].
oo For details on clearing all Custom Function and customized control settings,
see =546.
410
N
Setting Copyright Information
N
When you set the copyright information, it will be recorded to the image as
Exif information.
1 Select [5: Copyright information].
2 Select an item.
text.
3 Enter
zz Use the <V> cross keys or <5> dial
to select a character, then press <0>
to enter it.
zz By selecting [ ], you can change the
input mode.
zz To delete single characters, select [ ]
or press the <L> button.
the setting.
4 Exit
zz Press the <M> button, then press
[OK].
411
Setting Copyright Information
Checking the Copyright Information
When you select [Display copyright info.]
in step 2, you can check the [Author] and
[Copyright] information that you entered.
Deleting the Copyright Information
When you select [Delete copyright information] in step 2, you can delete
the [Author] and [Copyright] information.
oo If the entry for “Author” or “Copyright” is long, it may not be displayed entirely
when you select [Display copyright info.].
oo You can also set or check the copyright information with EOS Utility (EOS
software).
412
Checking Other Information
zzDownloading instruction manuals
To download instruction manuals, select [5: Manual/software URL] and
scan the displayed QR code with a smartphone. Note that scanning QR
codes requires an app.
zzDisplaying certification logosM
Select [5: Certification Logo Display] to display some of the logos of
the camera’s certifications. Other certification logos can be found in this
Instruction Manual, on the camera body, and on the camera’s package.
zzFirmware versionM
Select [5: Firmware] to update the firmware of the camera or current
lens.
413
414
Wi-Fi (Wireless
Communication) Functions
This chapter describes how to send images via Wi-Fi® from the
camera to a variety of compatible devices, and how to use Web
services.
415
What You Can Do via Wi-Fi (Wireless
Communication) Functions
(CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY)
(4) Send images to
a Web service
(3) Print images using a
Wi-Fi printer
(1) Communicate
with a smartphone
(2) Use with EOS software
or other dedicated software
Important
Note that Canon cannot be held liable for any loss or damage from
erroneous wireless communication settings when using the camera. In
addition, Canon cannot be held liable for any other loss or damage caused
by use of the camera.
When using wireless communication functions, establish appropriate
security at your own risk and discretion. Canon cannot be held liable for any
loss or damage caused by unauthorized access or other security breaches.
416
What You Can Do via Wi-Fi (Wireless Communication) Functions
(1) q Communicate with a smartphone (=419)
Control the camera remotely and browse images on the camera over
a Wi-Fi connection by using the dedicated Camera Connect app on
smartphones or tablets (collectively referred to as “smartphones” in
this manual).
(2) D Use with EOS software or other dedicated software
(=453)
Connect the camera to a computer via Wi-Fi and operate the camera
remotely using EOS Utility (EOS software). With the dedicated
application Image Transfer Utility 2, images on the camera can also
be sent to a computer automatically.
(3) l Print images using a Wi-Fi printer (=461)
Connect the camera to a printer supporting PictBridge (Wireless LAN)
via Wi-Fi to print images.
(4) R Send images to a Web service (=473)
Share images with friends or family on social media or the CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY online photo service for Canon customers after
you complete member registration (free of charge).
417
What You Can Do via Wi-Fi (Wireless Communication) Functions
Bluetooth® Features
By pairing the camera with a smartphone compatible with Bluetooth low
energy technology (hereafter, “Bluetooth”), you can:
zz Control the camera remotely from a smartphone (=437)
zz Establish a Wi-Fi connection from either the smartphone or the camera,
by itself (=428, =441)
zz Establish a Wi-Fi connection with the camera even when it is off (=430)
zz Geotag images with GPS information acquired by the smartphone
(=403)
This camera can also be connected to Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold
separately) via Bluetooth for remote control shooting (=399).
Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points
To establish a Wi-Fi connection with smartphones or computers already on
a Wi-Fi network, see “Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points” (=488).
Interface Cable Connection Cautions
oo Other devices, such as computers, cannot be used with the camera by
connecting them with an interface cable while the camera is connected to
devices via Wi-Fi. Terminate the connection before connecting the interface
cable.
oo When the camera is connected to a computer or another device with an
interface cable, you cannot select [5: Wireless communication settings].
Disconnect the interface cable before changing any settings.
Cards
oo The camera cannot be connected via Wi-Fi if there is no card in the camera
(except for [D]). Also, for [l] and Web services, the camera cannot be
connected via Wi-Fi if there are no images saved on the card.
Using the Camera with a Wi-Fi Connection Established
oo When the Wi-Fi connection is most important, do not operate the power
switch, card slot/battery compartment cover, or other parts. Otherwise, the WiFi connection will be terminated.
418
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
This section describes how to directly connect the camera to a smartphone
via Wi-Fi.
Connecting to a smartphone via Wi-Fi enables you to perform the following:
zz View images stored in the camera on a smartphone or save viewed
images to a smartphone.
zz Operate the camera to take a picture or change camera settings using a
smartphone.
zz Send images to a smartphone from the camera.
To establish a Wi-Fi connection via an access point, see “Wi-Fi Connection
via Access Points” (=488).
Selecting the Wi-Fi Connection Method
Connecting to a Bluetooth-compatible Smartphone via Wi-Fi
(=421)
By connecting to a Bluetooth-compatible smartphone via Bluetooth in
advance, you can connect via Wi-Fi simply by performing an operation on
the camera or smartphone.
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi from the [Wi-Fi
function] Menu (=433)
You can use Wi-Fi to connect to a smartphone that is not compatible with
Bluetooth or a smartphone that cannot use its Bluetooth function.
Turning on Bluetooth and Wi-Fi on a Smartphone
Turn on Bluetooth and Wi-Fi from the smartphone settings screen. Note that
pairing with the camera is not possible from the smartphone’s Bluetooth
settings screen.
419
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
Installing Camera Connect on a Smartphone
To connect the camera to a smartphone, a smartphone on which Android
or iOS is installed is necessary. In addition, the dedicated app Camera
Connect (free of charge) must be installed on the smartphone.
zz Use the latest version of the smartphone OS.
zz Camera Connect can be installed from Google Play or App Store. Google
Play or App Store can also be accessed using the QR codes that appear
when the camera is paired or connected via Wi-Fi to a smartphone.
Android
iOS
oo For the operating system versions supported by Camera Connect, refer to the
download site of Camera Connect.
oo Interface or functions of the camera and Camera Connect are subject to
change for firmware update of the camera or application update of Camera
Connect, Android, iOS, etc. In this case, features of the camera or Camera
Connect may differ from sample screens or operation instructions in this
manual.
oo An application is required to read the QR codes.
420
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
Connecting to a Bluetooth-compatible Smartphone via Wi-Fi
Make sure Camera Connect is installed on the smartphone, and that
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi are on.
Steps on the Camera (1)
[5: Wireless communication
1 Select
settings].
2 Select [Bluetooth function].
3 Select [Bluetooth function].
4 Select [Smartphone].
421
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
5 Register [Nickname].
zz When using the displayed nickname,
press the <M> button.
zz You can change the nickname (=497).
6 Select [OK].
7 Select [Pairing].
422
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
an item.
8 Select
zz If Camera Connect is already installed,
select [Do not display].
zz If Camera Connect is not installed,
select [Android] or [iOS], scan the
displayed QR code with the smartphone
to access Google Play or App Store and
install Camera Connect.
gg Pairing now begins.
423
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
Steps on the Smartphone (1)
9 Start Camera Connect.
the camera to pair with.
10Select
gg If you are using an Android smartphone,
go to step 12.
11 Tap on [Pair] (iOS only).
424
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
Steps on the Camera (2)
12 Select [OK].
<0>.
13 Press
zz Pairing is now complete, and the camera
is connected to the smartphone via
Bluetooth.
gg A Bluetooth icon appears on the main
Camera Connect screen.
oo Pairing or Bluetooth connection is not possible if the camera is connected to a
computer or another device with an interface cable.
oo The camera cannot be connected to two or more devices at the same time via
Bluetooth.
oo Bluetooth connection consumes battery power even after the camera’s auto
power off is activated. Therefore, the battery level may be low when you use
the camera.
Troubleshooting Pairing
oo Keeping pairing records for previously paired cameras on your smartphone
will prevent it from pairing with this camera. Before you try pairing again,
remove pairing records for previously paired cameras from your smartphone’s
Bluetooth settings screen (=432).
oo With a Bluetooth connection established, you can operate the camera to send
images to the smartphone. For details, see =441.
425
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
Steps on the Smartphone (2)
a Camera Connect function.
14 Select
zz In iOS, select [Join] when a message is
displayed to confirm camera connection.
zz For the Camera Connect functions, see
=437.
gg When a Wi-Fi connection is established,
the screen for the selected function will
appear.
gg The Bluetooth and Wi-Fi icons are lit on
the main Camera Connect screen.
The Wi-Fi connection to a Bluetooth-compatible smartphone is now
complete.
426
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
zz For how to terminate the Wi-Fi connection, see “Terminating the Wi-Fi
Connection” (=449).
zz Terminating the Wi-Fi connection will switch the camera to the Bluetooth
connection.
[qWi-Fi on] Screen
Disconnect,exit
zz Terminates the Wi-Fi connection.
Confirm set.
zz You can check the settings.
Error details
zz When a Wi-Fi connection error occurs, you can check the details of the
error.
427
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
Connecting to a Bluetooth-connected Smartphone via Wi-Fi
1 Start Camera Connect.
a Camera Connect function.
2 Select
zz Select the Camera Connect function you
want to use.
zz In iOS, select [Join] when a message is
displayed to confirm camera connection.
When a Wi-Fi connection is established,
the screen for the selected function will
appear.
zz For the Camera Connect functions, see
=437.
428
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
[Bluetooth function] Screen
On the [Bluetooth function] screen, you can change or check the
Bluetooth function settings.
Bluetooth function
zz Select the device to pair with the
camera.
zz If you will not use the Bluetooth function,
select [Disable].
Pairing
zz Pair the camera with the device selected
in [Bluetooth function].
Check/clear connection info
zz You can check the name and
communication status of the paired
device.
zz To remove registration of the paired
device, press the <B> button.
For details, see “Removing a Paired
Device’s Registration” (=432).
Bluetooth address
zz You can check the camera’s Bluetooth
address.
429
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
Stay conn. if off
zz Selecting [Enable] lets you view images
on the camera and control it in other
ways by connecting via Wi-Fi even if the
camera is off.
Establishing a Wi-Fi Connection When the Camera Is Off
Once the devices are paired, you can use a smartphone to connect via WiFi and transfer images from the camera even when it is off.
Configure [Stay conn. if off].
[Bluetooth function].
1 Select
zz Select [Bluetooth function] on the
[Wireless communication settings]
screen.
[Stay conn. if off] to [Enable].
2 Set
zz On the [Bluetooth function] screen, set
[Stay conn. if off] to [Enable].
Even when the camera is off, it will
remain paired with the smartphone via
Bluetooth.
430
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
Establishing a Wi-Fi Connection
Camera Connect.
1 Start
zz Start Camera Connect on a smartphone
paired with the camera via Bluetooth.
[Images on camera].
2 Select
zz In the Camera Connect menu, tap on
[Images on camera].
zz In iOS, select [Join] when a message is
displayed to confirm camera connection.
Images on the camera are listed when
the Wi-Fi connection is established.
Using Camera Connect
zz You can use Camera Connect to transfer images to the smartphone, and
you can delete or rate images from the camera.
zz To terminate the Wi-Fi connection, tap on [ ] on the main Camera
Connect screen (=449).
oo This feature is not available unless the camera and smartphone are
paired via Bluetooth.
oo This function can no longer be used if the wireless settings are reset or the
smartphone connection information is erased.
431
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
Removing a Paired Device’s Registration
To pair the camera with a different smartphone, clear the paired device’s
registration on the [Bluetooth function] screen (=429).
Steps on the Camera
[Check/clear connection
1 Select
info].
2 Press the <B> button.
the connection information.
3 Clear
zz Select [OK].
Steps on the Smartphone
the camera registration.
4 Remove
zz In the Bluetooth settings of the
smartphone, select the nickname of the
camera to remove registration for.
432
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi from the [Wi-Fi
function] Menu
Steps on the Camera (1)
[5: Wireless communication
1 Select
settings].
[Wi-Fi function].
2 Select
zz If the [Nickname] screen is displayed,
register a nickname (=422).
[q] (Connect to
3 Select
smartphone).
zz If the history (=493) is displayed,
switch the screen with the <Y> <Z>
keys.
[Register a device for
4 Select
connection].
433
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
an item.
5 Select
zz If Camera Connect is already installed,
select [Do not display].
zz If Camera Connect is not installed,
select [Android] or [iOS] on the screen
on the left, scan the displayed QR
code with the smartphone, then access
Google Play or App Store and install
Camera Connect.
(1)
the SSID (network name)
6 Check
and password.
zz Check the SSID (1) and password (2)
displayed on the camera screen.
zz In [Wi-Fi settings], if you set
[Password] to [None], the password
will not be displayed or required. For
details, see =516.
(2)
oo By selecting [Switch network] in step 6, you can establish a Wi-Fi connection
via an access point (=488).
434
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
Steps on the Smartphone
Smartphone’s screen
(sample)
the smartphone to
7 Operate
establish a Wi-Fi connection.
zz Activate the smartphone’s Wi-Fi
function, then select the SSID (network
name) checked in step 6.
zz For the password, enter the password
checked in step 6.
Camera Connect.
8 Start
zz When the [Waiting to connect] screen
is displayed on the camera, start
Camera Connect on the smartphone.
the camera to connect to via
9 Select
Wi-Fi.
zz Select and tap on the camera to connect
to via Wi-Fi from [Cameras] on Camera
Connect.
Steps on the Camera (2)
a Wi-Fi connection.
10Establish
zz Select [OK].
zz To specify viewable images, press the
<B> button. See step 5 on =451
to set them.
435
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
gg The main window of Camera Connect
will be displayed on the smartphone.
The Wi-Fi connection to a smartphone is
now complete.
zz Operate the camera using Camera
Connect. See =437.
zz For how to terminate the Wi-Fi connection, see “Terminating the Wi-Fi
Connection” (=449).
zz To reconnect via Wi-Fi, see “Reconnecting via Wi-Fi” (=493).
[qWi-Fi on] Screen
Disconnect,exit
zz Terminates the Wi-Fi connection.
Confirm set.
zz You can check the settings.
Error details
zz When a Wi-Fi connection error occurs, you can check the details of the
error.
oo When connected via Wi-Fi, you can send images to a smartphone from the
Quick Control screen during playback. For details, see =441.
436
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
Operating the Camera Using a Smartphone
The main functions of Camera Connect are described below.
Images on camera
zz Images stored in the camera can be
viewed.
zz Images stored in the camera can be
saved on a smartphone.
zz Operations such as deletion can be
performed on images stored in the
camera.
Remote live view shooting
zz The camera’s Live View image can be viewed on a smartphone.
zz You can shoot with remote operation.
Auto transfer
zz Enables camera and app setting adjustment to send shots to a
smartphone automatically as they are captured (=439).
Bluetooth remote controller
zz You can control the camera by using a smartphone paired via Bluetooth
as a remote control. (Not available when connected via Wi-Fi.)
Location information
zz Not supported on this camera.
Camera settings
zz Camera settings can be changed.
437
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
oo If the Wi-Fi connection is terminated while recording a movie with remote
shooting, the following will occur.
• Any movie recording in progress in movie recording mode will continue.
• Any movie recording in progress in still photo shooting mode will end.
oo You cannot use the camera to shoot after using Camera Connect to switch
from still photo shooting mode to movie recording mode.
oo With a Wi-Fi connection to a smartphone established, certain functions are
unavailable.
oo In remote shooting, the AF speed may become slower.
oo Depending on the communication status, image display or shutter release
timing may be delayed.
oo When saving images to a smartphone, you cannot take a picture even if you
press the camera’s shutter button. Also, the camera screen may turn off.
oo The Wi-Fi connection will be terminated if you set the camera’s power switch
to <2> or open the card slot/battery compartment cover.
oo RAW images cannot be saved to a smartphone. When a RAW image is
selected, it will be saved as a JPEG image.
oo With a Wi-Fi connection established, the camera’s auto power off does not
function.
oo With a Wi-Fi connection established, disabling the smartphone’s power saving
function is recommended.
438
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
Sending Images to a Smartphone Automatically as You
Shoot
Your shots can be sent automatically. Before following these steps, make
sure the camera and smartphone are connected via Wi-Fi.
[5: Wireless communication
1 Select
settings].
2 Select [Wi-Fi settings].
[Send to smartphone after
3 Select
shot].
4 Set [Auto send] to [Enable].
439
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
[Size to send].
5 Set
zz Select the image size, then press
<0>.
6 Take the picture.
440
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
Sending Images to a Smartphone from the Camera
You can use the camera to send images to a smartphone paired via
Bluetooth (Android devices only) or connected via Wi-Fi.
1 Play back the image.
2 Press the <Q> button.
[q].
3 Select
gg If you perform this step while connected
via Bluetooth, a message is displayed,
and the connection switches to a Wi-Fi
connection.
sending options and send
4 Select
the images.
441
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
(1) Sending Images Individually
an image to send.
1 Select
zz Press the <Y> <Z> keys or turn the
<5> dial to select an image to send,
then press <0>.
zz You can press the <u> button and
turn the <6> dial counterclockwise to
select the image using the index display.
[Send img shown].
2 Select
zz In [Size to send], you can select the
image sending size.
zz When sending movies, you can select
the image quality of movies to send in
[Quality to send].
442
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
(2) Sending Multiple Selected Images
1 Press <0>.
2 Select [Send selected].
images to send.
3 Select
zz Press the <Y> <Z> keys or turn the
<5> dial to select an image to send,
then press <0>.
zz You can press the <u> button and
turn the <6> dial counterclockwise
to switch to the three-image display to
select the images. To return to the single
image display, also press the <u>
button and operate the <6> dial.
zz After selecting the images to send, press
the <M> button.
443
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
image selection.
4 Exit
zz Select [OK].
[Size to send].
5 Select
zz On the displayed screen, select an
image size.
zz When sending movies, select the image
quality in [Quality to send].
6 Select [Send].
(3) Sending a Specified Range of Images
1 Press <0>.
2 Select [Send range].
444
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
the range of images.
3 Specify
zz Select the first image (start point).
zz Select the last image (end point).
zz To cancel the selection, repeat this step.
zz You can press the <u> button and turn
the <6> dial to change the number of
images shown in the index display.
the range.
4 Confirm
zz Press the <M> button.
[Size to send].
5 Select
zz On the displayed screen, select an
image size.
zz When sending movies, select the image
quality in [Quality to send].
6 Select [Send].
445
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
(4) Sending All Images on the Card
1 Press <0>.
2 Select [Send all card].
[Size to send].
3 Select
zz On the displayed screen, select an
image size.
zz When sending movies, select the image
quality in [Quality to send].
4 Select [Send].
446
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
(5) Sending Images that Match the Search Conditions
Send all the images that match the search conditions set in [Set image
search conditions] at once.
For [Set image search conditions], refer to “Filtering Images for Playback”
(=345).
1 Press <0>.
2 Select [Send all found].
[Size to send].
3 Select
zz On the displayed screen, select an
image size.
zz When sending movies, select the image
quality in [Quality to send].
447
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
4 Select [Send].
Ending Image Transfer
Sending Images from the Camera When Paired via Bluetooth (Android)
zz Press the <M> button on the image
transfer screen.
zz Select [OK] on the screen on the left
to end image transfer and the Wi-Fi
connection.
Sending Images from the Camera over a Wi-Fi Connection
zz Press the <M> button on the image
transfer screen.
zz To terminate the Wi-Fi connection, see
“Terminating the Wi-Fi Connection”
(=449).
448
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
oo During the image transfer operation, a picture cannot be taken even if the
camera’s shutter button is pressed.
oo The camera cannot be connected to multiple smartphones via Wi-Fi when it is
connected to another device via Wi-Fi.
oo You can cancel the image transfer by selecting [Cancel] during the transfer.
oo You can select up to 999 files at a time.
oo With a Wi-Fi connection established, disabling the smartphone’s power saving
function is recommended.
oo Selecting the reduced size for still photos applies to all still photos sent at that
time. Note that b size still photos are not reduced.
oo Selecting compression for movies applies to all movies sent at that time.
oo When you use a battery to power the camera, make sure it is fully charged.
oo With a Wi-Fi connection established, the camera’s auto power off does not
function.
Terminating the Wi-Fi Connection
To terminate the Wi-Fi connection, perform either of the following operations.
On the Camera Connect screen, tap
on [ ].
On the [qWi-Fi on] screen, select
[Disconnect,exit].
zz If the [qWi-Fi on] screen is not
displayed, select [Wi-Fi function] on
the [5: Wireless communication
settings] screen.
zz Select [Disconnect,exit], then select
[OK] on the confirmation dialog.
449
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
Specifying Viewable Images
You can specify images viewable on a smartphone by operating the camera.
Images can be specified after the Wi-Fi connection is terminated.
[Wi-Fi function].
1 Select
zz Select [Wi-Fi function] on the [Wireless
communication settings] screen.
[q].
2 Select
zz If the history (=493) is displayed,
switch the screen with the <Y> <Z>
keys.
3 Select [Edit device information].
a smartphone.
4 Select
zz Select the name of the smartphone on
which you want to make the images
viewable.
450
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
5 Select [Viewable imgs].
an item.
6 Select
zz Select [OK] to access the setting
screen.
[All images]
All images stored on the card become viewable.
[Images from past days]
Specify viewable images on the shootingdate basis. Images shot up to nine days
ago can be specified.
zz When [Images shot in past days] is
selected, images shot up to the specified
number of days before the current date
become viewable. Use the <W> <X>
keys to specify the number of days, then
press <0> to confirm the selection.
zz Once you select [OK], the viewable
images are set.
oo If [Viewable imgs] is set to any setting other than [All images], remote
shooting is not possible.
451
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi
[Select by rating]
Specify viewable images depending on
whether a rating is appended (or not
appended) or by the type of rating.
zz Once you select the type of rating, the
viewable images are set.
[File number range] (Select range)
(1)
452
(2)
Select the first and last images from images
arranged by the file number to specify the
viewable images.
1. Press <0> to display the image
selection screen.
Select an image using the <Y> <Z>
keys or <5> dial.
You can press the <u> button and
turn the <6> dial counterclockwise to
select the image using the index display.
2. Select an image as the starting point (1).
3. Use <Z> to select an image as the
ending point (2).
4. Select [OK].
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi
This section describes how to connect the camera to a computer via WiFi and perform camera operations using EOS software or other dedicated
software. Install the latest version of software on the computer before
setting up a Wi-Fi connection.
For computer operating instructions, refer to the computer user manual.
Operating the Camera Using EOS Utility
Using EOS Utility (EOS software), you can perform a variety of camera
operations.
Steps on the Camera (1)
[5: Wireless communication
1 Select
settings].
[Wi-Fi function].
2 Select
zz If the [Nickname] screen is displayed,
register a nickname (=422).
[D] (Remote control (EOS
3 Select
Utility)).
zz If the history (=493) is displayed,
switch the screen with the <Y> <Z>
keys.
453
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi
[Register a device for
4 Select
connection].
(1)
the SSID (network name)
5 Check
and password.
zz Check the SSID (1) and password (2)
displayed on the camera screen.
zz In [Wi-Fi settings], if you set
[Password] to [None], the password
will not be displayed or required. For
details, see =516.
(2)
Steps on the Computer (1)
Computer’s screen (sample)
the SSID, then enter the
6 Select
password.
zz On the computer’s network setting
screen, select the SSID checked in step
5.
zz For the password, enter the password
checked in step 5.
454
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi
Steps on the Camera (2)
[OK].
7 Select
gg The following message is displayed.
“******” represents the last six digits of
the MAC address of the camera to be
connected.
Steps on the Computer (2)
8 Start EOS Utility.
EOS Utility, click [Pairing over
9 InWi-Fi/LAN].
zz If a firewall-related message is
displayed, select [Yes].
[Connect].
10Click
zz Select the camera to connect to, then
click [Connect].
455
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi
Steps on the Camera (2)
a Wi-Fi connection.
11 Establish
zz Select [OK].
[DWi-Fi on] Screen
Disconnect,exit
zz Terminates the Wi-Fi connection.
Confirm set.
zz You can check the settings.
Error details
zz When a Wi-Fi connection error occurs,
you can check the details of the error.
The Wi-Fi connection to a computer is now complete.
zz Operate the camera using EOS Utility on the computer.
zz To reconnect via Wi-Fi, see “Reconnecting via Wi-Fi” (=493).
456
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi
oo If the Wi-Fi connection is terminated while recording a movie with remote
shooting, the following will occur.
• Any movie recording in progress in movie recording mode will continue.
• Any movie recording in progress in still photo shooting mode will end.
oo Operations using the camera are not possible after you use EOS Utility to
switch from still photo shooting mode to movie recording mode.
oo With a Wi-Fi connection to EOS Utility established, certain functions are
unavailable.
oo In remote shooting, the AF speed may become slower.
oo Depending on the communication status, image display or shutter release
timing may be delayed.
oo In Remote Live View shooting, the rate of image transmission is slower
compared to a connection via an interface cable. Therefore, moving subjects
cannot be displayed smoothly.
oo The Wi-Fi connection will be terminated if you set the camera’s power switch
to <2> or open the card slot/battery compartment cover.
457
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi
Sending Images to a Computer Automatically
With the dedicated software Image Transfer Utility 2, you can send images
on the camera to a computer automatically.
Steps on the Computer (1)
the computer and access
1 Connect
point and start Image Transfer
Utility 2.
zz In Image Transfer Utility 2, access the
pairing settings screen.
zz The screen to set up pairing is shown
when you follow the instructions
displayed the first time Image Transfer
Utility 2 starts up.
Steps on the Camera
[Auto send images to
2 Select
computer].
zz Select [Wi-Fi settings] on the [5:
Wireless communication settings]
screen.
zz On the [Wi-Fi settings] screen, select
[Auto send images to computer].
send], select [Enable].
3 Inzz If[Auto
the [Nickname] screen is displayed,
register a nickname (=422).
458
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi
4 Select [OK].
to an access point via
5 Connect
Wi-Fi.
zz Establish a Wi-Fi connection between
the camera and the access point
connected to the computer. For
connection instructions, see “WiFi Connection via Access Points”
(=488).
the computer to pair the
6 Select
camera with.
Steps on the Computer (2)
the camera and computer.
7 Pair
zz Select the camera, then click [Pairing].
459
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi
Sending Images on the Camera to a Computer Automatically
the [Wi-Fi settings] screen,
1 On
select [Auto send images to
computer].
2 Select [Image sending options].
what to send.
3 Select
zz If you select [Selected imgs] in [Range
to send], specify the images to send on
the [Select images to send] screen.
the computer and access
4 Connect
point via Wi-Fi and start Image
Transfer Utility 2.
zz Images are sent automatically to the
computer when you turn the camera on
within range of the access point.
oo Auto power off is disabled.
oo Any images captured after automatic transfer are sent automatically when the
camera is restarted.
oo If images are not sent automatically, try restarting the camera.
oo Any images captured during automatic transfer are also sent automatically.
460
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
This section describes how to print images by directly connecting the
camera to a printer via Wi-Fi. For printer operating instructions, refer to the
printer user manual.
Establishing a Wi-Fi Connection
[5: Wireless communication
1 Select
settings].
[Wi-Fi function].
2 Select
zz If the [Nickname] screen is displayed,
register a nickname (=422).
[l] (Print from Wi-Fi
3 Select
printer).
zz If the history (=493) is displayed,
switch the screen with the <Y> <Z>
keys.
[Register a device for
4 Select
connection].
461
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
(1)
the SSID (network name)
5 Check
and password.
zz Check the SSID (1) and password (2)
displayed on the camera screen.
zz In [Wi-Fi settings], if you set
[Password] to [None], the password
will not be displayed or required. For
details, see =516.
(2)
up the printer.
6 Set
zz On the Wi-Fi settings menu of the printer
to be used, select the SSID you have
checked.
zz For the password, enter the password
checked in step 5.
the printer.
7 Select
zz In the list of detected printers, select the
printer to connect to via Wi-Fi.
zz If your preferred printer is not listed,
selecting [Search again] may enable
the camera to find and display it.
8 Print the image (=464).
462
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
oo Wi-Fi connection is possible with Wi-Fi printers supporting PictBridge (Wireless
LAN).
oo To establish a Wi-Fi connection via an access point, see “Wi-Fi Connection via
Access Points” (=488).
463
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
Printing Images
Printing Images Individually
the image to be printed.
1 Select
zz Press the <Y> <Z> keys or turn the
<5> dial to select an image to print,
then press <0>.
zz You can press the <u> button and
turn the <6> dial counterclockwise to
select the image using the index display.
2 Select [Print image].
the image.
3 Print
zz For the print setting procedures, see
=467.
zz Select [Print], then [OK] to start printing.
464
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
Printing by Specifying the Options
1 Press <0>.
2 Select [Print order].
the printing options.
3 Set
zz For the setting procedures, refer to
“Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)”
(=318).
zz If the print order is complete before
establishing a Wi-Fi connection, go to
step 4.
[Print].
4 Select
zz [Print] can be selected only when an
image is selected and the printer is
ready to print.
5 Set the [Paper settings] (=467).
465
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
the image.
6 Print
zz When [OK] is selected, printing starts.
oo Shooting is not possible while connected to a printer via Wi-Fi.
oo Movies cannot be printed.
oo Before printing, be sure to set the paper size.
oo Certain printers may not be able to imprint the file number.
oo If [Bordered] is set, certain printers may imprint the date on the border.
oo Depending on the printer, the date may appear faint if it is imprinted on a
bright background or on the border.
oo RAW images cannot be printed by selecting [Print order]. When printing,
select [Print image] and print.
oo When you use a battery to power the camera, make sure it is fully charged.
oo Depending on the image’s file size and image quality, it may take some time to
start printing after you select [Print].
oo To stop printing, press <0> while [Stop] is displayed, then select [OK].
oo When printing with [Print order], if you stopped printing and want to resume
printing of the remaining images, select [Resume]. Note that printing will not
resume if any of the following occurs.
• You change the print order or delete any of the print ordered images before
resuming printing.
• When index is set, you change the paper setting before resuming printing.
• The card’s remaining capacity is low when you pause printing.
oo If a problem occurs during printing, see =472.
466
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
Print Settings
The screen display and setting options vary depending on the printer.
Also, certain settings may not be available. For details, refer to the printer’s
instruction manual.
Print setting screen
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(8)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(7)
Sets date or file number printing (=469).
Sets the printing effects (=469).
Sets the number of copies to print (=470).
Sets the print area (=471).
Sets the paper size, type, and layout (=468).
Returns to the image selection screen.
Starts the printing.
The paper size, type, and layout you have set are displayed.
* Depending on the printer, certain settings may not be selectable.
Paper Settings
zz Select [Paper settings].
467
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
[Q] Setting the Paper Size
zz Select the size of the paper in the
printer.
[Y] Setting the Paper Type
zz Select the type of the paper in the
printer.
[U] Setting the Page Layout
zz Select the page layout.
Borderless
Prints with no borders. If your printer cannot print borderless
prints, the print will have borders.
Bordered
Prints with white borders along the edges.
xx-up
Option to print 2, 4, 8, 9, 16, 20 or 35 images on one sheet.
Default
The page layout varies depending on the printer model or its
settings.
oo Borderless printing may result in significant cropping if the aspect ratio of
the paper and image do not match. Images may also be printed at lower
resolution.
468
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
Setting the Date/File Number Imprinting
zz Select [I].
zz Select what to print.
Setting the Printing Effects (Image Optimization)
Contents displayed on the screen vary depending on the printer.
zz Select [E].
zz Select printing effects.
Option
Printing Effect
[E] Default
Printing effects differ depending on the printer. For details,
refer to the printer’s instruction manual.
[E] On
Prints in the printer’s standard colors. The image’s Exif
information is used to make automatic corrections.
[E] Off
No automatic correction is applied.
[E] Red-Eye1
Effective in flash images where the subject has red eye. The
red eye is reduced for printing.
oo If you imprint shooting information on an image shot at an expanded ISO
speed (H), the correct ISO speed may not be imprinted.
469
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
Setting the Number of Copies
zz Select [R].
zz Select the number of copies to print.
oo The [Default] setting for printing effects and other options are the printer’s
own default settings as set by the printer’s manufacturer. Refer to the printer’s
instruction manual to find out what the [Default] settings are.
470
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
Cropping the Image
Set cropping immediately before
printing. Changing other print settings after
you crop images may require you to crop
the images again.
1 On the print setting screen, select [Cropping].
the cropping frame size, position, and aspect ratio.
2 Set
zz The image area within the cropping frame will be printed. The shape
of the frame (aspect ratio) can be changed with [Paper settings].
Changing the Cropping Frame Size
Turn the <6> dial to change the cropping frame size.
Moving the Cropping Frame
Press the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z> keys to move the frame over the
image vertically or horizontally.
Switching the Orientation of the Cropping Frame
Pressing the <B> button will toggle the cropping frame between the
vertical and horizontal orientations.
3
Press <0> to exit the cropping.
zz You can check the cropped image area on the upper left of the print
setting screen.
471
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi
oo Depending on the printer, the cropped image area may not be printed as you
specified.
oo The smaller the cropping frame, the lower the resolution at which images are
printed.
Handling Printer Errors
oo If printing does not resume after you resolve a printer error (no ink, no paper,
etc.) and select [Continue], operate the buttons on the printer. For details on
resuming printing, refer to the printer’s instruction manual.
Error Messages
oo If a problem occurs during printing, an error message will appear on the
camera screen. After fixing the problem, resume printing. For details on how to
fix a printing problem, refer to the printer’s instruction manual.
Paper Error
oo Confirm that paper is loaded correctly.
Ink Error
oo Check the printer’s ink level and the waste ink tank.
Hardware Error
oo Check for any printer problems other than paper and ink problems.
File Error
oo The selected image cannot be printed. Images taken with a different camera
or images edited with a computer may not be printable.
472
Sending Images to a Web Service
This section describes how to use Web services to send images.
Registering Web Services
Use a smartphone or computer to add your Web services to the camera.
zz A smartphone or computer with a browser and Internet connection is
required to complete camera settings for CANON iMAGE GATEWAY and
other Web services.
zz Visit the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY website for details on versions of
browsers (such as Microsoft Internet Explorer) and settings required for
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY access.
zz For information on countries and regions where CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY is available, visit the Canon website (http://www.canon.com/
cig/).
zz For CANON iMAGE GATEWAY instructions and setting details, refer to
the help information for CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
zz If you also intend to use Web services other than CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY, you must have an account with the services you intend to
use. For further details, check the websites for each Web service you will
register.
zz Fees to connect to your provider and communication fees to access your
provider’s access point are charged separately.
473
Sending Images to a Web Service
Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
Link the camera and CANON iMAGE GATEWAY by adding CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY as a destination Web service on the camera.
You will need to enter an email address used on your computer or
smartphone.
Steps on the Camera (1)
[5: Wireless communication
1 Select
settings].
[Wi-Fi function].
2 Select
zz If the [Nickname] screen is displayed,
register a nickname (=422).
3 Select [R].
4 Select [I Agree].
474
Sending Images to a Web Service
a Wi-Fi Connection
5 Establishing
zz Connect to an access point via Wi-Fi.
Go to step 7 on =490.
your email address.
6 Enter
zz Enter your email address, then select
[OK].
a four-digit number.
7 Enter
zz Enter a four-digit number of your choice,
then select [OK].
[OK].
8 Select
gg The [R] icon changes to [
].
475
Sending Images to a Web Service
Steps on the Computer or Smartphone
up camera web link.
9 Set
zz Access the page in the notification
message.
zz Follow the instructions to complete the
settings on the camera web link settings
page.
Steps on the Camera (2)
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY as a
10Add
destination.
zz Select [ ].
gg CANON iMAGE GATEWAY is now
added.
476
Sending Images to a Web Service
Registering Other Web Services
Steps on the Computer or Smartphone
the Web service you
1 Configure
want to use.
zz Visit the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
website and access the camera web link
settings page.
zz Follow the on-screen instructions to
complete settings for Web services you
want to use.
Steps on the Camera
the Web service you
2 Add
configured as a destination.
zz On the [Wi-Fi function] screen, select
[ ].
477
Sending Images to a Web Service
Establishing a Wi-Fi Connection
[Wi-Fi function].
1 Select
zz Select [Wi-Fi function] on the [Wireless
communication settings] screen.
a Web service.
2 Select
zz If the history (=493) is displayed,
switch the screen with the <Y> <Z>
keys.
zz A screen to select a destination may be
displayed, depending on the type and
settings of the Web service (=492).
478
Sending Images to a Web Service
Sending Images to a Web Service
You can share images with your family and friends by sending images from
the camera to a Web service registered on the camera or by sending Web
links of the online albums.
Sending Images Individually
an image to send.
1 Select
zz Press the <Y> <Z> keys or turn the
<5> dial to select an image to send,
then press <0>.
zz You can press the <u> button and
turn the <6> dial counterclockwise to
select the image using the index display.
[Send img shown].
2 Select
zz In [Size to send], you can select the
image sending size.
zz On the screen after images are sent,
select [OK] to end the Wi-Fi connection.
zz When the [Terms of use] screen is
displayed, thoroughly read the message,
then select [I Agree].
zz To scroll the screen, use the <W> <X>
keys.
479
Sending Images to a Web Service
Sending Multiple Selected Images
1 Press <0>.
2 Select [Send selected].
images to send.
3 Select
zz Press the <Y> <Z> keys or turn the
<5> dial to select an image to send,
then press <0>.
zz You can press the <u> button and
turn the <6> dial counterclockwise
to switch to the three-image display to
select the images. To return to the single
image display, also press the <u>
button and operate the <6> dial.
zz After selecting the images to send, press
the <M> button.
480
Sending Images to a Web Service
[Size to send].
4 Select
zz When YouTube is selected as the
destination, [Size to send] is not
displayed.
zz On the displayed screen, select an
image size.
[Send].
5 Select
zz On the screen after images are sent,
select [OK] to end the Wi-Fi connection.
zz When the [Terms of use] screen is
displayed, thoroughly read the message,
then select [I Agree].
zz To scroll the screen, use the <W> <X>
keys.
481
Sending Images to a Web Service
Sending a Specified Range of Images
Specify the range of images to send all the images in the range at once.
1 Press <0>.
2 Select [Send range].
the range of images.
3 Specify
zz Select the first image (start point).
zz Select the last image (end point).
gg Images will be selected and [X] will
appear.
zz To cancel the selection, repeat this step.
zz You can press the <u> button and turn
the <6> dial to change the number of
images shown in the index display.
the range.
4 Confirm
zz Press the <M> button.
482
Sending Images to a Web Service
[Size to send].
5 Select
zz On the displayed screen, select an
image size.
[Send].
6 Select
zz On the screen after images are sent,
select [OK] to end the Wi-Fi connection.
zz When the [Terms of use] screen is
displayed, thoroughly read the message,
then select [I Agree].
zz To scroll the screen, use the <W> <X>
keys.
Sending All Images on the Card
1 Press <0>.
2 Select [Send all card].
483
Sending Images to a Web Service
[Size to send].
3 Select
zz On the displayed screen, select an
image size.
[Send].
4 Select
zz On the screen after images are sent,
select [OK] to end the Wi-Fi connection.
zz When the [Terms of use] screen is
displayed, thoroughly read the message,
then select [I Agree].
zz To scroll the screen, use the <W> <X>
keys.
484
Sending Images to a Web Service
Sending Images that Match the Search Conditions
Send all the images that match the search conditions set in [Set image
search conditions] at once.
For [Set image search conditions], refer to “Filtering Images for Playback”
(=345).
1 Press <0>.
2 Select [Send all found].
[Size to send].
3 Select
zz On the displayed screen, select an
image size.
485
Sending Images to a Web Service
[Send].
4 Select
zz On the screen after images are sent,
select [OK] to end the Wi-Fi connection.
zz When the [Terms of use] screen is
displayed, thoroughly read the message,
then select [I Agree].
zz To scroll the screen, use the <W> <X>
keys.
486
Sending Images to a Web Service
oo With a Wi-Fi connection to a Web service established, a picture cannot be
taken even if the camera’s shutter button is pressed.
oo When sending an image to a Web service other than CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY, a send error message may not be displayed even if the image has
not been sent to the Web service successfully. Since such send errors can be
checked on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY site, check the error content, then
try sending the image again.
oo Depending on the Web service, the type or number of images that can be sent
and the length of movies will be limited.
oo Certain images may not be able to be sent with [Send range], [Send all
card], or [Send all found].
oo When you reduce the image size, all images to be sent at the same time are
resized. Note that movies or b size still photos are not reduced.
oo [Reduced] is enabled only for still photos shot with cameras of the same
model as this camera. Still photos shot with other models are sent without
resizing.
oo When accessing CANON iMAGE GATEWAY from a computer or other device,
you can check the send history for the Web services that the images were
sent to.
oo To terminate the Wi-Fi connection without sending an image, press the
<M> button on the screen for step 1.
oo When you use a battery to power the camera, make sure it is fully charged.
487
Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points
This section describes how to join a Wi-Fi network via an access point
compatible with WPS (PCB mode).
First, check the position of the WPS button and how long to press it.
It may take approx. one minute to establish a Wi-Fi connection.
[5: Wireless communication
1 Select
settings].
[Wi-Fi function].
2 Select
zz If the [Nickname] screen is displayed,
register a nickname (=422).
an item.
3 Select
zz If the history (=493) is displayed,
switch the screen with the <Y> <Z>
keys.
zz Press the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z> keys
to select an item.
488
Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points
[Register a device for
4 Select
connection].
zz When [q] (Connect to smartphone)
is selected, the screen on the left is
displayed. If Camera Connect is already
installed, select [Do not display].
[Switch network].
5 Select
zz Displayed when [q], [D], or [l] is
selected.
6 Select [Connect with WPS].
oo For [Camera access point mode] displayed in step 6, see =492.
489
Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points
[WPS (PBC mode)].
7 Select
zz Select [OK].
to the access point via
8 Connect
Wi-Fi.
zz Press the access point’s WPS button.
zz Select [OK].
[Auto setting].
9 Select
zz Select [OK] to access the setting screen
for the Wi-Fi function.
zz If an error occurs with [Auto setting],
see =518.
490
Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points
the settings for the Wi-Fi
10Specify
function.
[qConnect to smartphone]
Go to step 7 on =435.
[DRemote control (EOS Utility)]
Go to step 8 or 9 on =455.
[lPrint from Wi-Fi printer]
Go to step 7 on =462.
Registering CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY
Go to step 6 on =475.
491
Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points
Send To Screen
A screen to select a destination may be displayed depending on the Web
service.
To register destinations or to specify the settings, you must use a computer.
For more information, refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual.
zz The [Send to] screen may be displayed.
zz Select the destination from the list of
registered destinations.
zz The procedures for setting up a
connection and sending images are the
same as those for other Web services.
Camera Access Point Mode
Camera access point mode is a connection
mode for connecting the camera directly to
each device via Wi-Fi.
Displayed when [q], [D], or [l] is
selected in [Wi-Fi function].
492
Reconnecting via Wi-Fi
Follow these steps to reconnect to devices or Web services with registered
connection settings.
[Wi-Fi function].
1 Select
zz Select [Wi-Fi function] on the [Wireless
communication settings] screen.
an item.
2 Select
zz Select the item to connect to via Wi-Fi
from the displayed history. If the item is
not displayed, use the <Y> <Z> keys
to switch screens.
zz If [Connection history] is set to
[Hide], the history will not be displayed
(=516).
the connected device.
3 Operate
[q] Smartphone
zz Activate the smartphone’s Wi-Fi function, then start Camera
Connect.
zz If the smartphone’s connection destination has been changed,
restore the setting to connect via Wi-Fi to the camera or the same
access point as the camera.
When directly connecting the camera to a smartphone via Wi-Fi,
“_ Canon0A” is displayed at the end of the SSID.
493
Reconnecting via Wi-Fi
[D] Computer
zz On the computer, start the EOS software.
zz If the computer’s connection destination has been changed, restore
the setting to connect via Wi-Fi to the camera or the same access
point as the camera.
When directly connecting the camera to a computer via Wi-Fi,
“_ Canon0A” is displayed at the end of the SSID.
[l] Printer
zz If the printer’s connection destination has been changed, restore the
setting to connect via Wi-Fi to the camera or the same access point
as the camera.
When directly connecting the camera to a printer via Wi-Fi,
“_ Canon0A” is displayed at the end of the SSID.
494
Reconnecting via Wi-Fi
Registering Multiple Connection Settings
You can register up to 20 connection settings for the Wi-Fi function.
[Wi-Fi function].
1 Select
zz Select [Wi-Fi function] on the [Wireless
communication settings] screen.
an item.
2 Select
zz When the screen on the left appears,
use the <Y> <Z> keys to switch
screens.
zz Select the item to newly connect to via
Wi-Fi from the screen on the left.
zz For details on [q] (Connect to
smartphone), see “Connecting to a
Smartphone via Wi-Fi from the [Wi-Fi
function] Menu” (=419).
zz For [D] (Remote control (EOS Utility)),
see “Connecting to a Computer via WiFi” (=453).
zz For details on [l] (Print from Wi-Fi
printer), see “Connecting to a Printer via
Wi-Fi” (=461).
zz When sending images to a Web service,
see “Sending Images to a Web Service”
(=473).
oo To delete connection settings, see =496.
495
Changing or Deleting Connection Settings
Change or delete connection settings saved on the camera. To change or
delete the connection settings, terminate the Wi-Fi connection first.
[Wi-Fi function].
1 Select
zz Select [Wi-Fi function] on the [Wireless
communication settings] screen.
an item.
2 Select
zz When the screen on the left appears,
use the <Y> <Z> keys to switch
screens.
zz From the screen on the left, select the
item for which to change or delete the
connection settings.
3 Select [Edit device information].
a device.
4 Select
zz Select the device for which to change or
delete the connection settings.
496
Changing or Deleting Connection Settings
or change the connection
5 Check
settings.
zz Select an item, then change or delete
the connection settings on the displayed
screen.
zzChange device nickname
You can change the nickname using the virtual keyboard (=517).
zzViewable imgs (=450)
Displayed when [q] (Connect to smartphone) is selected. Settings will
appear at the bottom of the screen.
zzErase connection information
You can delete connection settings saved on the camera.
For Web services, visit the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY website to delete
the connection settings.
497
Clearing Wireless Communication Settings
to Default
All wireless communication settings can be deleted. By deleting the wireless
communication settings, you can prevent their information from being
exposed when you lend or give your camera to other people.
1 Select [Clear settings].
[OK].
2 Select
gg Wireless communication settings are
cleared to default, and the [Wireless
communication settings] screen will
reappear.
oo Performing [5: Clear all camera settings] does not delete the wireless
communication setting information.
498
View Info Screen
On the [View info] screen, you can check error details and the camera’s
MAC address.
[Wi-Fi function].
1 Select
zz Select [Wi-Fi function] on the [Wireless
communication settings] screen.
the <B> button.
2 Press
gg The [View info] screen will appear.
zz When an error has occurred, press <0> to display the error content.
499
Responding to Error Messages
When an error occurs, display the details of the error by following one of the
procedures below. Then, eliminate the cause of the error by referring to the
examples shown in this chapter.
zz On the [View info] screen, press <0> (=499).
zz Select [Error details] on the [Wi-Fi on] screen.
Click the error code number’s page in the following chart to jump to the
corresponding page.
11 (=501)
12 (=501)
21 (=502)
22 (=503)
23 (=504)
61 (=505)
63 (=506)
64 (=506)
65 (=507)
66 (=507)
67 (=507)
68 (=508)
69 (=508)
91 (=508)
121 (=508)
125 (=509)
126 (=509)
127 (=509)
141 (=509)
142 (=509)
151 (=510)
152 (=510)
oo When an error occurs, [Err**] is displayed on the upper right of the [Wi-Fi
function] screen. It disappears when the camera’s power is set to <2>.
500
Responding to Error Messages
11: Connection target not found
zz In the case of [q], is Camera Connect running?
gg Establish a connection using Camera Connect (=435).
zz In the case of [l], is the power of the printer on?
gg Turn on the printer.
zz In the case of [D], is the EOS software running?
gg Start the EOS software and reestablish the connection (=455).
zz Are the camera and the access point set to use the same password for
authentication?
gg This error occurs if the passwords do not match when the
authentication method for encryption is set to [Open system].
The setting is case-sensitive, so check upper- and lower-case
characters. Make sure that the correct password for authentication is
set on the camera (=517).
12: Connection target not found
zz Is the power of the target device and access point on?
gg Turn on the target device and access point, then wait a while. If a
connection still cannot be established, perform the procedures to
establish the connection again.
501
Responding to Error Messages
21: No address assigned by DHCP server
What to check on the camera
zz On the camera, IP address is set to [Auto setting]. Is this the correct
setting?
gg If no DHCP server is used, specify the settings after setting the IP
address to [Manual setting] on the camera (=518).
What to check on the DHCP server
zz Is the power of the DHCP server on?
gg Turn on the DHCP server.
zz Are there enough addresses for assignment by the DHCP server?
gg Increase the number of addresses assigned by the DHCP server.
gg Remove devices assigned addresses by the DHCP server from the
network to reduce the number of addresses in use.
zz Is the DHCP server working correctly?
gg Check the DHCP server settings to make sure it is working correctly
as a DHCP server.
gg If applicable, ask your network administrator to ensure the DHCP
server is available.
502
Responding to Error Messages
22: No response from DNS server
What to check on the camera
zz On the camera, does the DNS server’s IP address setting match the
server’s actual address?
gg Set the IP address to [Manual setting]. Then, on the camera, set
the IP address that matches the address of the DNS server used
(=514, =518).
What to check on the DNS server
zz Is the power of the DNS server on?
gg Turn on the DNS server.
zz Are the DNS server settings for IP addresses and the corresponding
names correct?
gg On the DNS server, make sure IP addresses and the corresponding
names are entered correctly.
zz Is the DNS server working correctly?
gg Check the DNS server settings to make sure it is working correctly
as a DNS server.
gg If applicable, ask your network administrator to ensure the DNS
server is available.
What to check on the network as a whole
zz Does the network that you are trying to connect to via Wi-Fi include a
router or similar device that serves as a gateway?
gg If applicable, ask your network administrator for the network gateway
address and enter it on the camera (=514, =518).
gg Make sure that the gateway address setting is correctly entered on
all network devices including the camera.
503
Responding to Error Messages
23: Device with same IP address exists on selected network
What to check on the camera
zz Do the camera and another device connected via Wi-Fi to the same
network have the same IP address?
gg Change the camera’s IP address to avoid using the same address
as another device on the network. Otherwise, change the IP address
of the device that has a duplicate address.
gg If the camera’s IP address is set to [Manual setting] in network
environments using a DHCP server, change the setting to [Auto
setting] (=490).
Responding to Error Messages 21–23
oo Also check the following points when responding to errors numbered 21–23.
oo Are the camera and the access point set to use the same password for
authentication?
• This error occurs if the passwords do not match when the authentication
method for encryption is set to [Open system]. The setting is casesensitive, so check upper- and lower-case characters. Make sure that the
correct password for authentication is set on the camera (=517).
504
Responding to Error Messages
61: Selected SSID wireless LAN network not found
zz Are any obstacles blocking the line of sight between the camera and the
antenna of the access point?
gg Move the antenna of the access point to a position clearly visible
from the point of view of the camera (=511).
What to check on the camera
zz Does the SSID set on the camera match that of the access point?
gg Check the SSID at the access point, then set the same SSID on the
camera.
What to check at the access point
zz Is the access point turned on?
gg Turn on the power of the access point.
zz If filtering by MAC address is active, is the MAC address of the camera in
use registered at the access point?
gg Register the MAC address of the camera used to the access point.
The MAC address can be checked on the [View info] screen
(=499).
505
Responding to Error Messages
63: Wireless LAN authentication failed
zz Are the camera and the access point set to use the same authentication
method?
gg The camera supports the following authentication methods: [Open
system], [Shared key], and [WPA/WPA2-PSK].
zz Are the camera and the access point set to use the same password for
authentication?
gg The setting is case-sensitive, so check upper- and lower-case
characters. Make sure that the correct password for authentication is
set on the camera.
zz If filtering by MAC address is active, is the MAC address of the camera in
use registered at the access point?
gg Register the MAC address of the camera used to the access point.
The MAC address can be checked on the [View info] screen
(=499).
64: Cannot connect to wireless LAN terminal
zz Are the camera and the access point set to use the same encryption
method?
gg The camera supports the following encryption methods: WEP, TKIP,
and AES.
zz If filtering by MAC address is active, is the MAC address of the camera in
use registered at the access point?
gg Register the MAC address of the camera used to the access point.
The MAC address can be checked on the [View info] screen
(=499).
506
Responding to Error Messages
65: Wireless LAN connection lost
zz Are any obstacles blocking the line of sight between the camera and the
antenna of the access point?
gg Move the antenna of the access point to a position clearly visible
from the point of view of the camera (=511).
zz The Wi-Fi connection was lost for some reason, and the connection
cannot be restored.
gg The following are possible reasons: excessive access to the access
point from another device, a microwave oven or similar appliance in
use nearby (interfering with IEEE 802.11b/g/n (2.4 GHz band)), or
influence of rain or high humidity (=511).
66: Incorrect wireless LAN password
zz Are the camera and the access point set to use the same password for
authentication?
gg The setting is case-sensitive, so check upper- and lower-case
characters. Make sure that the correct password for authentication is
set on the camera.
67: Incorrect wireless LAN encryption method
zz Are the camera and the access point set to use the same encryption
method?
gg The camera supports the following encryption methods: WEP, TKIP,
and AES.
zz If filtering by MAC address is active, is the MAC address of the camera in
use registered at the access point?
gg Register the MAC address of the camera used to the access point.
The MAC address can be checked on the [View info] screen
(=499).
507
Responding to Error Messages
68: Cannot connect to wireless LAN terminal. Retry from the
beginning.
zz Did you hold down the access point’s WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)
button for the specified period of time?
gg Hold down the WPS button for the period of time specified in the
access point’s instruction manual.
zz Are you trying to establish a connection near the access point?
gg Try establishing the connection when both devices are within reach
of each other.
69: Multiple wireless LAN terminals have been found. Cannot
connect. Retry from the beginning.
zz Connection is in progress by other access points in Pushbutton
Connection mode (PBC mode) of WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup).
gg Wait a while before trying to establish the connection.
91: Other error
zz A problem other than error code number 11 to 69 occurred.
gg Turn the camera’s power switch off and on.
121: Not enough free space on server
zz The target Web server does not have enough free space.
gg Delete unnecessary images on the Web server, check the free space
on the Web server, then try sending the data again.
508
Responding to Error Messages
125: Check the network settings
zz Is the network connected?
gg Check the connection status of the network.
126: Could not connect to server
zz CANON iMAGE GATEWAY is under maintenance or load is concentrated
temporarily.
gg Try connecting to the Web service again later.
127: An error has occurred
zz A problem other than error code number 121 to 126 occurred while the
camera is connected to the Web service.
gg Try again to establish the Wi-Fi connection to the Web service.
141: Printer is busy. Reconnect to try again.
zz Is the printer performing a printing process?
gg Try again to establish the Wi-Fi connection to the printer after the
printing process is finished.
zz Is another camera connected to the printer via Wi-Fi?
gg Try again to establish the Wi-Fi connection to the printer after the WiFi connection to the other camera has been terminated.
142: C ould not acquire printer information. Reconnect to try
again.
zz Is the power of the printer on?
gg Try again to establish the Wi-Fi connection after turning on the
printer.
509
Responding to Error Messages
151: Transmission canceled
zz Automatic image transfer to the computer was somehow interrupted.
gg To resume automatic image transfer, set the camera’s power switch
to <2>, and then set it to <1>.
152: Card’s write protect switch is set to lock
zz Is the card’s write protect switch set to the locked position?
gg Slide the card’s write protect switch to the writing position.
510
Wireless Communication Function Notes
If the transmission rate drops, the connection is lost, or other problems
occur when using the wireless communication functions, try the following
corrective actions.
Distance Between the Camera and the Smartphone
If the camera is too far from the smartphone, a Wi-Fi connection may not
be established even when Bluetooth connection is possible. In this case,
bring the camera and the smartphone closer together, then establish a WiFi connection.
Installation Location of Access Point Antenna
zz When using indoors, install the device in the room where you are using
the camera.
zz Install the device where people or objects do not come between the
device and the camera.
Nearby Electronic Devices
If the Wi-Fi transmission rate drops because of the influence of the following
electronic devices, stop using them or move further away from the devices
to transmit communication.
zz The camera communicates over Wi-Fi via IEEE 802.11b/g/n using radio
waves in the 2.4 GHz band. For this reason, the Wi-Fi transmission
rate will drop if there are Bluetooth devices, microwave ovens, cordless
telephones, microphones, smartphones, other cameras, or similar
devices operating on the same frequency band nearby.
Cautions for Using Multiple Cameras
zz When connecting multiple cameras to one access point via Wi-Fi, make
sure the cameras’ IP addresses are different.
zz When multiple cameras are connected to one access point via Wi-Fi, the
transmission rate drops.
zz When there are multiple IEEE 802.11b/g/n (2.4 GHz band) access points,
leave a gap of five channels between each Wi-Fi channel to reduce radio
wave interference. For example, use channels 1, 6, and 11, channels 2
and 7, or channels 3 and 8.
511
Wireless Communication Function Notes
Using the Wireless Remote Control BR-E1
zz When [Bluetooth function] is set to [Remote] to use the Wireless
Remote Control BR-E1, the camera cannot be connected to a
smartphone via Bluetooth.
512
Security
If security settings have not been properly set, the following problems may
occur.
zzTransmission monitoring
Third parties with malicious intent may monitor the Wi-Fi transmissions
and attempt to acquire the data you are sending.
zzUnauthorized network access
Third parties with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to
the network you are using to steal, modify, or destroy information.
Additionally, you could fall victim to other types of unauthorized access
such as impersonation (where someone assumes an identity to gain
access to unauthorized information) or springboard attacks (where
someone gains unauthorized access to your network as a springboard to
cover their tracks when infiltrating other systems).
It is recommended to make use of the systems and functions to thoroughly
secure your network, preventing these types of problems from occurring.
513
Checking Network Settings
zzWindows
Open the Windows [Command Prompt], then type ipconfig/all and press
the <Enter> key.
In addition to the IP address assigned to the computer, the subnet mask,
gateway, and DNS server information are also displayed.
zzMac OS
In Mac OS X, open the [Terminal] application, enter ifconfig -a, and press
the <Return> key. The IP address assigned to the computer is indicated
in the [en0] item next to [inet], in the format “***.***.***.***”.
* For information about the [Terminal] application, refer to the Mac OS X help.
To avoid using the same IP address for the computer and other devices on
the network, change the rightmost number when setting up the IP address
assigned to the camera in the processes described on =518.
Example: 192.168.1.10
514
[Wireless communication settings] Screen
On the [Wireless communication settings] screen, you can change the
wireless communication function settings.
Select [5: Wireless communication settings].
Wi-Fi settings
zz See the next page.
Wi-Fi function
The following Wi-Fi functions are available:
zz Communicate with smartphone
zz Remote control (EOS Utility)
zz Print from Wi-Fi printer
zz Send images to Web service
Bluetooth function (=429)
Displays the [Bluetooth function]
screen on which you can set or check the
Bluetooth functions.
Nickname
You can change the nickname using the
virtual keyboard (=517).
Clear settings (=498)
Clear all wireless communication settings.
515
[Wi-Fi settings] Screen
Wi-Fi
When the use of electronic devices and
wireless devices is prohibited, such as on
board airplanes or in hospitals, set it to
[Disable].
Password
Set to [None] to allow a Wi-Fi connection to
be established without a password (except
when connecting to an access point via WiFi).
Connection history
You can set whether to [Show] or [Hide]
the history of the Wi-Fi connected devices.
Auto send images to computer
With the dedicated software Image
Transfer Utility 2, you can send images on
the camera to a computer automatically
(=458).
Send to smartphone after shot
Your shots can be sent to a smartphone
automatically (=439).
MAC address
You can check the MAC address of the
camera.
516
Virtual Keyboard Operation
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7) (8)
Input area, for entering text
Cursor keys, for moving in the
input area
Current no. of characters/no.
available
Keyboard
Switch input modes
(9)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
Space
Delete a character in the input
area
Change the type of keyboard
Finish the text entry
zz Use the <W> <X> <Y> <Z> keys to move within 2 and 4–8.
zz Press <0> to confirm input or when switching input modes.
517
Setting the IP Address Manually
Set up the IP address settings manually. The items displayed vary
depending on the Wi-Fi function.
[Manual setting].
1 Select
zz Select [OK].
an item.
2 Select
zz Select an item to access the screen for
numerical input.
zz To use a gateway, select [Enable], then
select [Address].
the desired values.
3 Enter
zz Turn the <6> dial to move the input
position in the upper area and turn the
<5> dial to select the number. Press
<0> to enter the selected number.
zz To set the entered values and return to
the screen for step 2, press the <M>
button.
518
Setting the IP Address Manually
[OK].
4 Select
zz When you have completed setting the
necessary items, select [OK].
zz If you are not sure what to enter, see
“Checking Network Settings” (=514),
or ask the network administrator or
another person knowledgeable about
the network.
519
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Status Display
Wireless communication status can be checked on the camera screen.
(2)
(1)
(3)
(3)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(2)
Wi-Fi function
Bluetooth function
Wireless signal strength
Communication status
Not
connected
Wi-Fi function
Wi-Fi: Disable
Off
Wi-Fi: Enable
Connecting
(Blinking)
Connected
Sending data
Connection error
520
Wireless signal
strength
(fg)
(Blinking)
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Status Display
Bluetooth Function Indicator
Bluetooth function
Other than [Disable]
[Disable]
Connection status
Screen
Bluetooth connected
Bluetooth not connected
Bluetooth not connected
Not displayed
521
522
Custom Functions / My Menu
You can fine-tune camera functions and change the functionality of
buttons and dials to suit your shooting preferences. You can also
add menu items and Custom Functions that you adjust frequently
to My Menu tabs.
523
Tab Menus: Customization
=526
=530
=536
=546
=546
524
Setting Custom Functions
1
(1)
N
Select [C.Fn I: Exposure], [C.Fn II:
Autofocus], or [C.Fn III: Operation/
Others].
a Custom Function number.
2 Select
zz Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select the
Custom Function number (1) to set up.
the setting as desired.
3 Change
zz Use the <W> <X> keys to select a
setting (number).
zz To set up another Custom Function,
repeat steps 2–3.
zz At the bottom of the screen, the current
Custom Function settings are indicated
below the respective function numbers.
zz Any options changed from defaults are
displayed in blue.
the setting.
4 Exit
zz Press the <M> button.
gg The screen in step 1 is displayed again.
525
Custom Function Settings
N
You can customize camera features on the [8] tab to suit your shooting
preferences.
C.Fn I: Exposure
C.Fn I-1: Exposure level increments
Sets 1/2-stop increments for the shutter speed, aperture, exposure
compensation, AEB, flash exposure compensation, etc.
zz 0: 1/3-stop
zz 1: 1/2-stop
oo When [1/2-stop] is set, the display will be as shown below.
C.Fn I-2: ISO speed setting increments
You can change the manual ISO speed setting increments to a whole-stop.
zz 0: 1/3-stop
zz 1: 1-stop
oo Even if [1-stop] is set, ISO speed will be automatically set in 1/3-stop
increments when ISO Auto is set.
oo Even when [1-stop] is set, you can set ISO 40000 (for still photo shooting).
526
Custom Function Settings
C.Fn I-3: Bracketing auto cancel
You can specify to cancel AEB and white balance bracketing when the
power switch is set to <2>.
zz 0: Enable
zz 1: Disable
C.Fn I-4: Bracketing sequence
The AEB shooting sequence and white balance bracketing sequence can
be changed.
zz 0: 0 → – → +
zz 1: – → 0 → +
zz 2: + → 0 → –
White Balance Bracketing
AEB
0
: Standard exposure
B/A Direction
0
M/G Direction
: Standard white balance 0
: Standard white balance
–
: Decreased exposure –
: Blue bias
–
: Magenta bias
+
: Increased exposure
: Amber bias
+
: Green bias
+
527
Custom Function Settings
C.Fn I-5: Number of bracketed shots
The number of shots taken with AEB and white balance bracketing can be
changed.
When [Bracketing sequence] is set to [0, –, +], the bracketed shots will be
taken as shown in the table below.
zz 0: 3 shots
zz 1: 2 shots
zz 2: 5 shots
zz 3: 7 shots
(1-stop/step increments)
1st Shot
2nd Shot 3rd Shot 4th Shot 5th Shot 6th Shot 7th Shot
3: 3 shots
Standard (0)
–1
2: 2 shots
Standard (0)
±1
+1
5: 5 shots
Standard (0)
–2
–1
+1
+2
7: 7 shots
Standard (0)
–3
–2
–1
+1
+2
+3
oo If [2 shots] is set, you can select the + or – side when setting the AEB range.
With WB bracketing, the 2nd shot will be adjusted toward either the B/A or M/
G direction.
528
Custom Function Settings
C.Fn I-6: Safety shift
If the subject brightness changes and the standard exposure cannot be
obtained within the autoexposure range, the camera will automatically
change the manually selected setting to obtain the standard exposure.
When set to [Shutter speed/Aperture], this setting applies to <s> and
<f> mode. When set to [ISO speed], this setting applies to <d>, <s>,
and <f> mode.
zz 0: Disable
zz 1: Shutter speed/Aperture
zz 2: ISO speed
oo Under [z: zISO speed settings], even if [ISO speed range] or [Min.
shutter spd.] is changed from the default setting, safety shift will override it if
the standard exposure cannot be obtained.
oo The minimum and maximum limits for the safety shift with the ISO speed are
determined by [Auto range] (=134). However, if the manually set ISO
speed exceeds the [Auto range], the safety shift will take effect up or down to
the manually set ISO speed.
oo Safety shift will take effect as necessary even when flash is used.
C.Fn I-7: AE lock metering mode after focus
For each metering mode, you can specify
whether to lock the exposure (AE lock)
once subjects are in focus with One-Shot
AF. The exposure will be locked while you
keep pressing the shutter button halfway.
Select metering modes for AE lock and add
a checkmark [X]. Select [OK] to register
the setting.
529
Custom Function Settings
C.Fn II: Autofocus
C.Fn II-1: Tracking sensitivity
You can set the subject-tracking sensitivity, which affects responsiveness to
interfering objects that move across AF points or subjects that stray from AF
points during Servo AF.
zz 0
Standard setting. Suitable for moving subjects in general.
zz Locked on: –2 / Locked on: –1
The camera will try to continue focusing on the subject even if an obstacle
cuts across the AF points or if the subject strays from the AF points. The
–2 setting makes the camera keep tracking the target subject longer than
the –1 setting.
However, if the camera focuses on a wrong subject, it may take slightly
longer to switch and focus on the target subject.
zz Responsive: +2 / Responsive: +1
The camera can focus consecutively on subjects at different distances
that are covered by the AF points. Also effective when you want to always
focus on the closest subject. The +2 setting is more responsive than the
+1 setting when focusing on the next subject.
However, the camera will be more prone to focus on an unintended
subject.
530
Custom Function Settings
C.Fn II-2: Acceleration/deceleration tracking
Sets the Servo AF tracking sensitivity for subjects that change speed
suddenly, as by suddenly moving or stopping.
zz 0
Suited for subjects that move at a steady speed (minor changes in
moving speed).
zz –2 / –1
Suited for subjects that move at a steady speed (minor changes in
moving speed). Effective when a setting of 0 makes focus unstable, due
to slight subject movement or an obstruction in front of the subject.
zz +2 / +1
Effective for subjects having sudden movements, sudden acceleration/
deceleration, or sudden stops. Even if the moving subject’s speed
suddenly changes dramatically, the camera continues to focus on
the target subject. For example, the camera is less likely to focus
behind a subject that suddenly starts approaching you, or in front of an
approaching subject that suddenly stops moving. Setting +2 can track
dramatic changes in the moving subject’s speed better than with +1.
However, since the camera will be sensitive to even slight movements of
the subject, focusing may become unstable for short periods.
531
Custom Function Settings
C.Fn II-3: AF point auto switching
This sets the switching sensitivity of the AF points as they track the subject
moving dramatically up, down, left, or right.
Takes effect when [z: AF method] is set to [u+Tracking], [Expand AF
area: Z], [Expand AF area: Around], or [Zone AF].
zz 0
Standard setting for gradual AF point switching.
zz +2 / +1
Even if the target subject moves dramatically up, down, left, or right
and moves away from the AF point, the camera switches its focus to
neighboring AF points to continue focusing on the subject. The camera
switches to the AF point deemed most likely to focus on the subject
based on the subject’s continual movement, contrast, etc. Setting +2
makes the camera more prone to switch the AF point than with +1.
However, with a wide-angle lens having a wide depth of field or if
the subject is too small in the frame, the camera may focus with an
unintended AF point.
532
Custom Function Settings
C.Fn II-4: Lens drive when AF impossible
You can specify lens operation in cases when the camera cannot autofocus
on a subject.
zz 0: Continue focus search
If focus cannot be achieved with autofocus, the lens is driven to search
for the precise focus.
zz 1: Stop focus search
If autofocus starts and the focus is far off or if focus cannot be achieved,
the lens drive will not be performed. This prevents the lens from
becoming grossly out of focus due to the focus search drive.
oo [1: Stop focus search] is recommended for super telephoto lenses or other
lens that cover a large area, to avoid significant delay from focus search drive
if the lens becomes greatly out of focus.
C.Fn II-5: Limit AF methods
You can limit the AF methods available to
those that you will use.
For details on AF methods, see =188–
=190.
Add a checkmark [X] to the AF methods to
make available. Select [OK] to register the
setting.
oo The [X] mark cannot be removed from [1-point AF].
533
Custom Function Settings
C.Fn II-6: Orientation linked AF point
You can assign AF points or Zone AF frames to different positions based on
whether you are shooting vertically or horizontally.
zz 0: Same for both vertic./horiz.
AF points or Zone AF frames in the same position are used for both
vertical and horizontal shooting.
zz 1: Separate AF pts: pt only
Separate AF point or Zone AF frame positions can be assigned for
each camera orientation (1. Horizontal, 2. Vertical with the camera grip
above, 3. Vertical with the camera grip below). Useful when switching to
AF points or Zone AF frames in other positions automatically based on
camera orientation.
AF points or Zone AF frames assigned to each of the three camera
orientations are retained.
534
Custom Function Settings
C.Fn II-7: Initial Servo AF pt for c
You can set the initial AF point for Servo AF when the AF method is set to
[u+Tracking].
zz 0: Automatic
The initial AF point of Servo AF for [u+Tracking] is set automatically to
suit the shooting conditions.
zz 1: Initial AF pt set for c
Servo AF starts from the manually set AF point when AF operation is set
to [Servo AF] and the AF method is set to [u+Tracking].
zz 2: AF pt set for
If you switch from Spot AF, 1-point AF, Expand AF area :Z, or Expand AF
area: Around to [u+Tracking], Servo AF starts from the manually set AF
point. Useful for starting Servo AF from the AF point set before switching
to [u+Tracking].
535
Custom Function Settings
C.Fn III: Operation/Others
C.Fn III-1: Dial direction during Tv/Av
Dial turning direction when setting the shutter speed and aperture can be
reversed.
In the <a> shooting mode, the turning direction of the <6> and <5>
dials will be reversed. In other shooting modes, the turning direction of only
the <6> dial will be reversed. The direction of the <5> dial in <a>
mode matches the direction to set exposure compensation in <d>, <s>,
and <f> modes.
zz 0: Normal
zz 1: Reverse direction
C.Fn III-2: Control ring rotation
RF lens and mount adapter control ring turning direction when setting the
shutter speed and aperture can be reversed.
zz 0: Normal
zz 1: Reverse direction
C.Fn III-3: Focus ring rotation
RF lens focusing ring turning direction can be reversed.
zz 0: Normal
zz 1: Reverse direction
C.Fn III-4: RF lens MF focus ring sensitivity
RF lens focusing ring sensitivity can be set.
zz 0: Varies with rotation speed
zz 1: Linked to rotation degree
536
Custom Function Settings
C.Fn III-5: Customize buttons
You can assign frequently used functions to buttons, such as <V> or <p>.
Different functions, for use when shooting still photos or movies, can be
assigned to the same button.
1 Select a part of the bar.
a function to assign.
2 Select
zz Press <0> to set it.
537
Custom Function Settings
Functions Available for Buttons
Function
L
Metering and AF start
k
k
k
AF stop
k
k
AF point selection
k
k
AF
Direct AF point selection
Set AF point to center
k
k
One-Shot AFzServo AF*1
k
k
Touch & drag AF
k
k
Eye Detection AF*1
k
k
AE lock
k
k
AE lock (hold)
k
k
k
k
Flash function settings*1
k
k
FE lock*1
k
k
Movies
k
k
Metering start
Exposure
AE lock (while button pressed)
k
AE Lock/FE Lock*1
Exposure compensation (hold button, turn
Set ISO speed (hold button, turn
Movie
538
k
k
Pause Movie Servo AF
)
)
k
Custom Function Settings
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
539
Custom Function Settings
Function
L
Press buttons directly
Menu
Dial function settings
k
k
Depth-of-field preview*1
k
k
Reset selected item in Fv mode*1
k
k
/ISO in Fv mode*1
k
k
Quick Control screen
k
k
Magnify/Reduce
k
k
Menu display
k
k
Image quality*1
k
k
Picture Style
k
k
Select folder
k
k
Create folder
k
k
Maximize screen brightness (temporary)
k
k
Display off
k
k
Switch between viewfinder/screen
k
k
Eco mode
k
k
Wi-Fi function
k
k
No function (disabled)
k
k
Reset Tv/Av/
*1: Cannot be assigned as a function available when recording movies.
540
Custom Function Settings
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
> stands for “AF stop button” provided on super telephoto lenses
oo <
equipped with Image Stabilizer.
541
Custom Function Settings
C.Fn III-6: Customize dials
Assign functions to the <5>, <6> dials or control ring <T>.
1 Select a part of the bar.
a function to assign.
2 Select
zz Press <0> to set it.
542
Custom Function Settings
Functions Available for Dials
Function
6
5
Shutter speed setting in M mode
k
k
Aperture setting in M mode
k
k
T
Change aperture (hold metering button)
k
Change shutter speed (hold metering button)
k
Set ISO speed (hold metering button)
k
Exposure compensation (hold metering
button)
k
Change aperture value
k
Change shutter speed
k
Set ISO Speed
k
Exposure compensation
No function (disabled)
k
k
k
k
oo <T>: Control ring on RF lenses and mount adapters
543
Custom Function Settings
C.Fn III-7: Release shutter without lens
You can specify whether shooting still photos or movies is possible without
a lens attached to the camera.
zz 0: Disable
zz 1: Enable
C.Fn III-8: Retract lens on power off
You can set whether to retract gear-type STM lenses (such as EF40mm
f/2.8 STM) automatically when the camera’s power switch is set to <2>.
zz 0: Enable
zz 1: Disable
oo With auto power off, the lens will not retract regardless of the setting.
oo Before detaching the lens, make sure that it is retracted.
oo When [0: Enable] is set, this function takes effect regardless of the lens’s
focus mode switch setting (AF or MF).
544
Custom Function Settings
C.Fn III-9: Audio compression
Sets audio compression for movie recording. [1: Disable] allows higher
audio quality than when audio is compressed, but file sizes are larger.
zz 0: Enable
zz 1: Disable
oo Editing movie files recorded with [1: Disable] and then saving them with
compression will also compress the audio.
oo Audio is compressed even if [1: Disable] is selected when [Movie rec. size]
is set to L6V (NTSC) or L5V (PAL).
oo Audio for video snapshots is compressed even when [1: Disable] is selected.
545
Clearing Custom Function Settings
zzClearing all Custom Function settings
By selecting [8: Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)], you can clear
all Custom Function settings other than [Customize buttons] and
[Customize dials] settings.
zzClearing [Customize buttons] and [Customize dials] settings
By selecting [8: Clear customized settings], you can clear [Customize
buttons] and [Customize dials] settings.
546
Tab Menus: My Menu
=548
=551
=551
=552
547
Registering My Menu
N
Under My Menu tab, you can register menu items and Custom Functions
whose settings you change frequently.
Creating and Adding My Menu Tab
1 Select [Add My Menu tab].
[OK].
2 Select
zz You can create up to five My Menu tabs
by repeating steps 1 and 2.
Registering Menu Items under the My Menu Tab(s)
1 Select [MY MENU*: Configure].
548
Registering My Menu
2 Select [Select items to register].
the desired items.
3 Register
zz Select the item to be set, then press
<0>.
zz Select [OK] on the confirmation dialog.
zz You can register up to six items.
zz To return to the screen in step 2, press
the <M> button.
My Menu Tab Settings
You can sort and delete items under the
menu tab, and rename or delete the menu
tab.
zzSort registered items
You can change the order of the registered items in My Menu. Select
[Sort registered items], select an item to rearrange, then press <0>.
With [z] displayed, use the <W> <X> keys to move the item, then press
<0>.
zzDelete selected items / Delete all items on tab
You can delete any of the registered items. [Delete selected items]
deletes one item at a time, and [Delete all items on tab] deletes all the
registered items under the tab.
549
Registering My Menu
zzDelete tab
You can delete the current My Menu tab. Select [Delete tab] to delete the
[MY MENU*] tab.
zzRename tab
You can rename the My Menu tab from [MY MENU*].
1 Select [Rename tab].
text.
2 Enter
zz Select [ ] or press the <L> button to
delete any unneeded characters.
zz Use the <V> cross keys or <5> dial
to select a character, then press <0>.
zz By selecting [ ], you can change the
input mode.
input.
3 Confirm
zz Press the <M> button, then press
[OK].
550
Registering My Menu
Deleting all My Menu tabs / Deleting all items
You can delete all the created My Menu
tabs or My Menu items registered under
them.
zzDelete all My Menu tabs
You can delete all My Menu tabs you created. When you select [Delete
all My Menu tabs], all the tabs from [MY MENU1] to [MY MENU5] will
be deleted and the [9] tab will revert to its default.
zzDelete all items
You can delete all the items registered under the [MY MENU1] to
[MY MENU5] tabs. The tab(s) will remain. When [Delete all items]
is selected, all the items registered under all the created tabs will be
deleted.
oo If you perform [Delete tab] or [Delete all My Menu tabs], tab names renamed
with [Rename tab] will also be deleted.
551
Registering My Menu
Menu Display Settings
You can select [Menu display] to set the
menu screen that is to appear first when
you press the <M> button.
zzNormal display
Displays the last displayed menu screen.
zzDisplay from My Menu tab
Displays with the [9] tab selected.
zzDisplay only My Menu tab
Only the [9] tab is displayed. (The [z], [3], [5], and [8] tabs will
not be displayed.)
552
Reference
This chapter provides reference information on camera features.
553
Software Overview
Downloading and Installing the Software
When using EOS software or other dedicated software, use the latest
version available. To download it, you will need to enter the serial number
on the bottom of the camera.
oo Do not connect the camera to a computer before you install the software. The
software will not be installed correctly.
oo You cannot install the EOS software to a computer without an Internet
connection.
oo Previous versions cannot display images from this camera correctly. Also,
processing RAW images from this camera is not possible.
oo Always update any previous version of the software that is installed (by
overwriting it with the latest version).
the software.
1 Download
zz Connect to the Internet from a computer and access the following
Canon website.
www.canon.com/icpd
zz Select your country or region of residence and download the
software.
zz Decompress it on the computer.
For Windows
Click the displayed installer file to start the installer.
For Macintosh
A dmg file will be created and displayed. Follow the steps below to
startup the installer.
554
Software Overview
(1) Double-click the dmg file.
gg A drive icon and installer file will appear on the desktop.
If the installer file does not appear, double-click the drive icon
to display it.
(2) Double-click the installer file.
gg The installer starts.
2 Follow the on-screen instructions to install the software.
Downloading the Software Instruction Manuals
Software Instruction Manuals (PDF files) can be downloaded from the
Canon website to your computer.
zzSoftware Instruction Manual Download Site
www.canon.com/icpd
oo To view the Instruction Manuals (PDF files), an Adobe PDF viewing
software such as Adobe Acrobat Reader DC (most recent version
recommended) is required.
oo Adobe Acrobat Reader DC can be downloaded for free from the Internet.
oo Double-click the downloaded Instruction Manual (PDF file) to open it.
oo To learn how to use PDF viewing software, refer to the software’s Help section.
555
Importing Images to a Computer
You can use EOS software to import images from the camera to a computer.
There are two ways to do this.
Importing by Connecting the Camera to the Computer
1 Install the software (=554).
the camera to the
2 Connect
computer with Interface Cable IFC100U (sold separately, computer
end: USB Type-C).
zz Insert the plug into the camera’s digital
terminal.
zz Insert the other end of the cable into the
computer’s USB terminal.
EOS Utility to import the
3 Use
images.
zz Refer to the EOS Utility Instruction
Manual.
oo With Wi-Fi connection established, the camera cannot communicate with the
computer even if they are connected with an interface cable.
556
Importing Images to a Computer
Importing Images with a Card Reader
You can use a card reader to import images to a computer.
1 Install the software (=554).
2 Insert the card into the card reader.
Digital Photo Professional to
3 Use
import the images.
zz Refer to the Digital Photo Professional
Instruction Manual.
oo When importing images from the camera to a computer with a card reader
without using EOS software, copy the DCIM folder on the card to the
computer.
557
Charging a Battery in the Camera
Using USB Power Adapter PD-E1 (sold separately), you can charge Battery
Pack LP-E17 without removing it from the camera. Charging stops if you
operate the camera.
the USB power adapter.
1 Connect
zz With the camera’s power switch set to
<2>, insert the USB power adapter
plug fully into the digital terminal.
the power cord.
2 Connect
zz Connect the power cord to the USB
power adapter and plug the other end
into a power outlet.
gg Charging begins, and the access lamp
(1) is lit in green.
zz When charging is finished, the access
lamp turns off. Unplug the power cord
and disconnect the USB power adapter
from the camera.
(1)
oo To protect batteries and keep them in optimal condition, do not charge
continuously for more than 24 hours.
oo In case of charging problems, the access lamp blinks in green and a protective
circuit stops charging. In this case, unplug the power cord, reattach the battery,
and wait a few minutes before plugging it in again. If the problem persists,
contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center.
558
Charging a Battery in the Camera
oo If the access lamp does not light up, try unplugging the USB power adapter
and plugging it in again.
oo The charging time required and the amount charged vary depending on
ambient temperature and remaining capacity.
oo For safety reasons, recharging in low temperatures (5–10°C / 41–50°F) will
take longer.
oo Batteries are not charged when the camera is connected via Wi-Fi or when the
card slot/battery compartment cover is open.
559
Using an Extension Grip
Extension Grip EG-E1 (sold separately) is a dedicated accessory that
makes EOS RP cameras even easier to hold. The battery and card can be
inserted or removed while the extension grip is attached to the camera.
the card slot/battery
1 Remove
compartment cover.
zz Turn the camera off and remove the
cover. Be careful not to lose the cover
after removal.
the extension grip.
2 Attach
zz Attach as shown at left and turn the
attach/detach dial to lock in place.
560
Using an Extension Grip
the extension grip cover.
3 Open
zz For instructions on inserting or removing
the battery and card, see “Inserting/
Removing the Battery and Card”
(=42).
oo When reattaching the card slot/battery compartment cover to the camera,
attach it opened to at least 90°.
561
Troubleshooting
If a problem occurs with the camera, first refer to this Troubleshooting
Guide. If this Troubleshooting Guide does not resolve the problem, contact
your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center.
Power-Related Problems
Batteries cannot be charged with the charger.
zz Do not use any battery packs other than a genuine Canon Battery Pack
LP-E17.
The charger’s lamp blinks at high speed.
zz If (1) the battery charger or battery has a problem or (2) communication
with the battery failed (with a non-Canon battery pack), the protection
circuit will stop charging, and the charge lamp will blink in orange. In
the case of (1), unplug the charger’s power plug from the power outlet.
Detach and reattach the battery to the charger. Wait a few minutes, then
reconnect the power plug to the power outlet. If the problem persists,
contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center.
The charger’s lamp does not blink.
zz If the internal temperature of the battery attached to the charger is
high, the charger will not charge the battery for safety reasons (lamp
off). During charging, if the battery’s temperature becomes high for any
reason, charging will stop automatically (lamp blinks). When the battery
temperature goes down, charging will resume automatically.
562
Troubleshooting
Batteries cannot be charged with the USB power adapter (sold
separately).
zz Batteries are not charged while the camera’s power switch is set to
<1>.
zz Operating the camera will stop charging in progress.
The access lamp blinks during charging with the USB power
adapter.
zz In case of charging problems, the access lamp blinks in green and a
protective circuit stops charging. In this case, unplug the power cord,
reattach the battery, and wait a few minutes before plugging it in again.
If the problem persists, contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service
Center.
The access lamp is not lit during charging with the USB power
adapter.
zz Try unplugging the USB power adapter and plugging it in again.
The camera is not activated even when the power switch is set
to <1>.
zz Make sure the card slot/battery compartment cover is closed (=42).
zz Make sure the battery is installed properly in the camera (=42).
zz Charge the battery (=40).
The access lamp still lights or blinks even when the power
switch is set to <2>.
zz If the power is turned off while an image is being recorded to the card, the
access lamp will remain on or continue to blink for a few seconds. When
the image recording is complete, the power will turn off automatically.
563
Troubleshooting
[Does this battery/do these batteries display the Canon logo?] is
displayed.
zz Do not use any battery packs other than a genuine Canon Battery Pack
LP-E17.
zz Remove and install the battery again (=42).
zz If the electrical contacts are dirty, use a soft cloth to clean them.
The battery becomes exhausted quickly.
zz Use a fully charged battery (=40).
zz The battery performance may have degraded. See [5: Battery info.] to
check the battery’s recharge performance level (=381). If the battery
performance is poor, replace the battery with a new one.
zz The number of possible shots will decrease with any of the following
operations:
Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.
Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture.
Using the lens’s Image Stabilizer.
Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth (wireless communication) function.
The camera turns off by itself.
zz Auto power off is in effect. To deactivate auto power off, set [Auto power
off] under [5: Power saving] to [Disable] (=372).
zz Even if [Auto power off] is set to [Disable], the screen and viewfinder
will still turn off after the camera is left idle for the time set in [Display off]
and [Viewfinder off], but the camera will remain on.
zz Set [5: Eco mode] to [Off].
564
Troubleshooting
Shooting-Related Problems
The lens cannot be attached.
zz To attach EF or EF-S lenses, you will need a mount adapter. The camera
cannot be used with EF-M lenses.
No images can be shot or recorded.
zz Make sure the card is properly inserted (=42).
zz Slide the card’s write-protect switch to the Write/Erase setting (=42).
zz If the card is full, replace the card or delete unnecessary images to make
space (=42, =314).
zz Shooting is not possible if the AF point turns orange when you attempt to
focus. Press the shutter button halfway again to refocus automatically, or
focus manually (=54, =214).
The card cannot be used.
zz If a card error message is displayed, see =44 or =581.
An error message is displayed when the card is inserted in
another camera.
zz Since SDXC cards are formatted in exFAT, if you format a card with this
camera and then insert it into another camera, an error may be displayed
and it may not be possible to use the card.
565
Troubleshooting
The image is out of focus or blurred.
zz Set the lens’s focus mode switch to <AF> (=48, =51).
zz Press the shutter button gently to prevent camera shake (=54).
zz With a lens equipped with an Image Stabilizer, set the IS switch to <1>.
zz In low light, the shutter speed may become slow. Use a faster shutter
speed (=98), set a higher ISO speed (=131), use flash (=222),
or use a tripod.
zz See “Minimizing Blurred Photos” on =70.
I cannot lock the focus and recompose the shot.
zz Set the AF operation to One-Shot AF. Shooting with the focus locked is
not possible with Servo AF (=71, =185).
The continuous shooting speed is slow.
zz The continuous shooting speed for high-speed continuous shooting
may be lower, depending on conditions such as these: battery level,
temperature, flicker reduction, shutter speed, aperture, subject conditions,
brightness, AF operation, type of lens, use of flash, and shooting settings
(=208).
566
Troubleshooting
The maximum burst during continuous shooting is lower.
zz If you shoot a subject that has fine detail such as a field of grass, the file
size will be larger, and the actual maximum burst may be lower than the
number listed on =583.
Even after I change the card, the maximum burst displayed for
continuous shooting does not change.
zz The maximum burst displayed does not change when you switch cards,
even if you switch to a high-speed card. The maximum burst shown in
the table on =583 is based on Canon’s testing card. (The faster the
card’s writing speed, the higher the actual maximum burst will be.) For
this reason, the maximum burst displayed may differ from the actual
maximum burst.
High-speed display is not available during high-speed
continuous shooting.
zz Refer to the high-speed display requirements on =181.
Some image quality options are not available with cropped
shooting.
zz 74/84/7a/8a image quality options are not available when [1.6x
(crop)] is set, or with EF-S lenses.
The aspect ratio cannot be set.
zz With EF-S lenses, [1.6x (crop)] is set automatically, and no other aspect
ratios are available.
567
Troubleshooting
ISO 100 cannot be set. ISO speed expansion cannot be selected.
zz Check the [ISO speed range] setting under [z: zISO speed
settings].
zz When [z: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable] or [Enhanced],
the available ISO speed range is ISO 200–40000 for still photo shooting.
Even if you set [ISO speed range] under [z: ISO speed settings] to
expand the setting range, you cannot select L (equivalent to ISO 50), H1
(equivalent to ISO 51200), or H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400). When [z:
Highlight tone priority] is set to [Disable] (=137), you can set ISO
100/125/160, L, or H1/H2.
Even if I set a decreased exposure compensation, the image
comes out bright.
zz Set [z: Auto Lighting Optimizer] to [Disable] (=136). When [Low],
[Standard], or [High] is set, even if you set a decreased exposure
compensation or flash exposure compensation, the image may come out
bright.
I cannot set the exposure compensation when both manual
exposure and ISO Auto are set.
zz See =103 to set the exposure compensation.
Not all the lens aberration correction options are displayed.
zz Although [Chromatic aberr corr] and [Diffraction correction] are
not displayed when [Digital Lens Optimizer] is set to [Enable], both
functions are applied in shooting, as when set to [Enable].
zz During movie recording, [Digital Lens Optimizer] or [Diffraction
correction] will not be displayed.
568
Troubleshooting
Using flash in <f> or <d> mode lowers the shutter speed.
zz Under [z: External Speedlite control], set [Slow synchro] to [1/1801/60sec. auto] or [1/180 sec. (fixed)] (=224).
The flash does not fire.
zz Make sure the flash is securely attached to the camera.
The flash always fires at full output.
zz Flash units other than EL/EX series Speedlites used in autoflash mode
always fire at full output (=221).
zz When the flash Custom Function setting for [Flash metering mode] is
set to [TTL] (autoflash), the flash will always fire at full output (=230).
Flash exposure compensation cannot be set.
zz If flash exposure compensation is already set with the Speedlite, flash
exposure compensation cannot be set with the camera. When the
external Speedlite’s flash exposure compensation is canceled (set to 0),
flash exposure compensation can be set with the camera.
569
Troubleshooting
High-speed sync cannot be set in <f> or <d> mode.
zz Under [z: External Speedlite control], set [Slow synchro] to [1/18030sec. auto] or [1/180-1/60sec. auto] (=224).
Remote control shooting is not possible.
zz When taking still photos, set the drive mode to <Q> or <k> (=209).
When recording movies, set [z: Remote control] to [Enable] (=285).
zz Check the position of the remote control’s release timing switch.
zz If you are using Wireless Remote Control BR-E1, see =217 or =399.
zz To use a remote control for time-lapse movie recording, see =273.
A white s or red E icon is displayed during shooting.
zz It indicates that the camera’s internal temperature is high. Image quality
of still photos may be worse when a white <s> icon is displayed. If
a red <E> icon is displayed, it indicates that shooting will soon stop
automatically (=291).
During movie recording, the red E icon is displayed.
zz It indicates that the camera’s internal temperature is high. If the red <E>
icon is displayed, it indicates that the movie recording will soon stop
automatically (=291).
570
Troubleshooting
Movie recording stops by itself.
zz If the card’s writing speed is slow, movie recording may stop
automatically. For cards that can record movies, see =585. To find out
the card’s writing speed, refer to the card manufacturer’s website, etc.
zz If you shoot a movie for 29 min. 59 sec., the movie recording will stop
automatically.
The ISO speed cannot be set for movie recording.
zz In shooting modes other than [M], the ISO speed is set automatically. In
[M] mode, you can manually set the ISO speed (=589).
ISO 100 cannot be set or ISO speed expansion cannot be
selected during movie recording.
zz Check the [ISO speed range] and [Range for H] setting under [z:
kISO speed settings].
zz When [z: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable], the available ISO
speed range starts at ISO 200. Expanded ISO speed cannot be selected
even if you set an expanded range for [ISO speed range] or [Range
for H] under [z: kISO speed settings]. When [z: Highlight tone
priority] is set to [Disable] (=137), you can set ISO 100/125/160 or an
expanded ISO speed.
571
Troubleshooting
The exposure changes during movie recording.
zz If you change the shutter speed or aperture during movie recording, the
changes in the exposure may be recorded.
zz Shooting a few test movies is recommended if you intend to perform
zooming during movie recording. Zooming as you record movies may
cause exposure changes or lens sounds to be recorded, an uneven audio
level, or loss of focus.
The image flickers or horizontal stripes appear during movie
recording.
zz Flickering, horizontal stripes (noise), or irregular exposures can be
caused by fluorescent lighting, LED lighting, or other light sources during
movie recording. Also, changes in the exposure (brightness) or color
tone may be recorded. In [M] mode, a slow shutter speed may reduce
the problem. The problem may be more noticeable in time-lapse movie
recording.
The subject looks distorted during movie recording.
zz If you move the camera to the left or right (panning) or shoot a moving
subject, the image may look distorted. The problem may be more
noticeable in time-lapse movie recording.
I cannot take still photos during movie recording.
zz Still photos cannot be taken during movie recording. Before taking still
photos, stop recording the movie, then select a shooting mode for still
photos.
572
Troubleshooting
Problems with Wireless Features
Cannot pair with a smartphone.
zz Use a smartphone compliant with Bluetooth Specification Version 4.1 or
later.
zz Turn on Bluetooth from the smartphone settings screen.
zz Pairing with the camera is not possible from the smartphone’s Bluetooth
settings screen. Install the dedicated app Camera Connect (free of
charge) on the smartphone (=420).
zz A previously paired smartphone cannot be paired with the camera again
if the camera’s registration is retained on the smartphone. In this case,
remove the camera’s registration retained in the Bluetooth settings on the
smartphone and try pairing again (=432).
Wi-Fi function cannot be set.
zz If the camera is connected to a computer or another device with an
interface cable, Wi-Fi functions cannot be set. Disconnect the interface
cable before setting any functions (=418).
A device connected with an interface cable cannot be used.
zz Other devices, such as computers, cannot be used with the camera by
connecting them with an interface cable while the camera is connected to
devices via Wi-Fi. Terminate the Wi-Fi connection before connecting the
interface cable.
Operations such as shooting and playback are not possible.
zz With a Wi-Fi connection established, operations such as shooting and
playback may not be possible.
Terminate the Wi-Fi connection, then perform the operation.
573
Troubleshooting
Cannot reconnect to a smartphone.
zz Even with a combination of the same camera and smartphone, if you
have changed the settings or selected a different setting, reconnection
may not be established even after selecting the same SSID. In this case,
delete the camera connection settings from the Wi-Fi settings on the
smartphone and set up a connection again.
zz A connection may not be established if Camera Connect is running when
you reconfigure connection settings. In this case, quit Camera Connect
for a moment and then restart it.
Operation Problems
I cannot change the setting with <6>, <5>, <d>, or <T>.
zz Use the <R> switch to unlock the controls (=58).
zz Check the [5: Multi function lock] setting (=407).
Touch operation is not possible.
zz Make sure [5: Touch control] is set to [Standard] or [Sensitive]
(=379).
A camera button or dial does not work as expected.
zz For movie recording, check the [5: Shutter btn function for movies]
setting (=395).
zz Check [8C.Fn III-5: Customize buttons] and [8C.Fn III-6: Customize
dials] settings (=537, =542).
574
Troubleshooting
Display Problems
The menu screen shows fewer tabs and items.
zz In Basic Zone modes, some tabs and items are not displayed. Tabs and
items on the menu screen also vary for still photos and movies.
The display starts with [9] My Menu, or the [9] tab alone is
displayed.
zz [Menu display] on the [9] tab is set to [Display from My Menu tab] or
[Display only My Menu tab]. Set [Normal display] (=552).
The file name’s first character is an underscore (“_”).
zz Set [z: Color space] to [sRGB]. If [Adobe RGB] is set, the first
character will be an underscore (=147).
The file name starts with “MVI_”.
zz It is a movie file.
The file numbering does not start from 0001.
zz If the card already contains recorded images, the image number may not
start from 0001 (=363).
575
Troubleshooting
The shooting date and time displayed are incorrect.
zz Make sure the correct date and time are set (=374).
zz Check the time zone and daylight saving time (=374).
The date and time are not in the image.
zz The shooting date and time do not appear in the image. The date and
time are recorded in the image data as shooting information. When
printing, you can imprint the date and time in the picture, using the date
and time recorded in the shooting information (=318).
[###] is displayed.
zz If the number of images recorded on the card exceeds the number the
camera can display, [###] will be displayed.
The screen does not display a clear image.
zz If the screen is dirty, use a soft cloth to clean it.
zz The screen display may seem slightly slow in low temperatures or
may look black in high temperatures. It will return to normal at room
temperature.
576
Troubleshooting
Playback Problems
Part of the image blinks in black.
zz [3: Highlight alert] is set to [Enable] (=351).
A red box is displayed on the image.
zz [3: AF point disp.] is set to [Enable] (=352).
During image playback, the AF points are not displayed.
zz The AF points are not displayed when the following types of images are
played back:
Images captured in <8: F> or <8: G> mode.
Images taken with Multi Shot Noise Reduction applied.
Cropped images.
Images captured with [Auto Image Align] set to [Enable] in HDR
shooting.
The image cannot be erased.
zz If the image is protected, it cannot be erased (=310).
Still photos and movies cannot be played back.
zz The camera may not be able to play back images taken with another
camera.
zz Movies edited with a computer cannot be played back with the camera.
Only few images can be played back.
zz The images have been filtered for playback with [3: Set image search
conditions] (=345). Clear the image search conditions.
577
Troubleshooting
Operation sound and mechanical sound can be heard during
movie playback.
zz If you operate the camera’s dials or lens during movie recording, the
operation sound will also be recorded. Using the Directional Stereo
Microphone DM-E1 (sold separately) is recommended (=258).
The movie appears to freeze momentarily.
zz If there is a drastic change in the exposure level during autoexposure
movie recording, the recording will stop momentarily until the brightness
stabilizes. In this case, shoot in the [M] mode (=241).
No picture appears on the television.
zz Make sure [5: Video system] is set to [For NTSC] or [For PAL]
correctly for the video system of your television (=378).
zz Make sure the HDMI cable’s plug is inserted all the way in (=308).
There are multiple movie files for a single movie recording.
zz If the movie file size reaches 4 GB, another movie file will be created
automatically (=254). However, if you use an SDXC card formatted
with the camera, you can record a movie in a single file even if it exceeds
4 GB.
578
Troubleshooting
My card reader does not recognize the card.
zz Depending on the card reader used and the computer’s operating system,
SDXC cards may not be correctly recognized. In this case, connect your
camera to the computer with the interface cable, then import the images
to the computer using EOS Utility (EOS software).
The image cannot be resized.
zz With this camera, you cannot resize JPEG b and RAW images (=339).
The image cannot be cropped.
zz With this camera, you cannot crop RAW images (=337).
Dots of light appear on the image.
zz White, red, or blue dots of light may appear in captured images or on the
shooting screen if the sensor is affected by cosmic rays or similar factors.
Their appearance may be reduced by performing [Clean nowf] under
[5: Sensor cleaning] (=382).
579
Troubleshooting
Sensor Cleaning Problems
The shutter makes a sound during sensor cleaning.
zz Under [5: Sensor cleaning], when you select [Clean nowf], the
shutter will make a mechanical sound during the cleaning, but no picture
will be recorded to the card (=382).
Automatic sensor cleaning does not work.
zz If you repeatedly turn the power switch <1> and <2> within a short
time period, the <f> icon may not be displayed (=46).
Computer Connection Problems
I cannot import images to a computer.
zz Install EOS Utility (EOS software) in the computer (=554).
zz If the camera is already connected via Wi-Fi, it cannot communicate with
any computer connected with an interface cable.
Communication between the connected camera and computer
does not work.
zz When using EOS Utility (EOS software), set [z: Time-lapse movie] to
[Disable] (=262).
580
Error Codes
(1)
If there is a problem with the camera, an
error message will appear. Follow the onscreen instructions. If the problem persists,
write down the error code (Errxx) and
contact a Customer Support Help Desk.
(1)
(2)
Error number
Cause and countermeasures
(2)
581
Performance Data
Still Photo Shooting
zzNumber of Possible Shots
Temperature
Room Temperature
(23°C / 73°F)
Low Temperature
(0°C / 32°F)
Possible shots
Approx. 250 shots
Approx. 240 shots
• Based on using the screen and a fully charged Battery Pack LP-E17, and following
CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing standards.
zzISO Auto Range
Shooting Mode
ISO Speed
No Flash
With Flash
t/d/s/f/a
ISO 100–40000*
ISO 100–1600*
F
ISO 400*
ISO 400*
* The actual ISO speed range depends on the [Minimum] and [Maximum] set with
[Auto range].
• In Basic Zone modes, ISO speed is set automatically.
582
Performance Data
zzGuide to Image Quality Settings
Image
Quality
Pixels
Recorded
(Approx.)
Maximum Burst
File Size
(MB)
Possible
Shots
Standard
High Speed
9.1
3320
Full
Full
4.9
6060
Full
Full
5.1
5820
Full
Full
2.9
10280
Full
Full
3.4
8750
Full
Full
2.0
14620
Full
Full
1.9
15760
Full
Full
JPEG
73
26M
83
74
84
7a
8a
12M
6.5M
3.8M
b
RAW
1
26M
29.1
1040
50
Full
F
26M
17.1
1780
130
Full
1
73
26M
26M
29.1+9.1
790
42
98
F
73
26M
26M
17.1+9.1
1160
66
170
RAW+JPEG
• The number of possible shots is based on Canon’s testing standards and an 32 GB
card.
• Maximum burst measured under conditions and with an SD card conforming to Canon
testing standards (32 GB standard/UHS-II card, <o> High-speed continuous
shooting, Full-frame still photo cropping/aspect ratio, ISO 100, Standard Picture
Style).
• The file size, number of possible shots, and maximum burst will vary depending
on the subject, card brand, still photo cropping/aspect ratio, ISO speed, Picture
Style, Custom Functions, and other settings.
• “Full” indicates that shooting is possible until the card becomes full with the listed
conditions.
oo Even if you use a high-speed SD card, maximum burst indicator will not
change. The maximum burst in the table will apply instead.
583
Performance Data
zzPixel Count When Still Photo Cropping/Aspect Ratio is Set
(Approx. pixels)
Image Quality
Full-frame (3:2)
1.6x (crop)
3/1/F
6240×4160
(Approx. 26.0 megapixels)
3888×2592
(Approx. 10.1 megapixels)
a
4160×2768*
(Approx. 11.5 megapixels)
–
a
3120×2080
(Approx. 6.5 megapixels)
–
b
2400×1600
(Approx. 3.8 megapixels)
2400×1600
(Approx. 3.8 megapixels)
Image Quality
1:1 (aspect ratio)
4:3 (aspect ratio)
16:9 (aspect ratio)
3/1/F
5536×4160*
6240×3504*
4160×4160
(Approx. 17.3 megapixels) (Approx. 23.0 megapixels) (Approx. 21.9 megapixels)
a
3680×2768*
4160×2336*
2768×2768
(Approx. 7.7 megapixels) (Approx. 10.2 megapixels) (Approx. 9.7 megapixels)
a
2768×2080*
3120×1752*
2080×2080
(Approx. 4.3 megapixels) (Approx. 5.8 megapixels) (Approx. 5.5 megapixels)
b
2112×1600*
2400×1344*
1600×1600
(Approx. 2.6 megapixels) (Approx. 3.4 megapixels) (Approx. 3.2 megapixels)
oo The actual aspect ratio of images in the sizes marked with an asterisk “*” will
differ from the aspect ratio indicated.
oo For details on JPEG file sizes, see the values for full-frame recording on
=583. Under equivalent shooting conditions, file sizes will be smaller than
when [z: zCropping/aspect ratio] is set to [Full-frame].
584
Performance Data
Movie Recording
zzCards that Can Record Movies
Movie Recording Size
H
L
w
SD Card
X
UHS-I, UHS Speed Class 3 or higher
87
X
SD Speed Class 10 or higher
65
X
45
HDR movie
65
V
87
65
X
SD Speed Class 4 or higher
• When movie cropping and Movie digital IS are disabled.
• This table indicates the card’s writing and reading speeds required for recording
movies (card performance requirements). However, card performance requirements
for 4K/Full HD time-lapse movies apply to reading speed.
585
Performance Data
zzTotal Movie Recording Time and File Size Per Minute
Movie Recording Size
Total Possible Recording Time on Card
8 GB
32 GB
128 GB
(Approx.)
File Size
45
X
8 min.
35 min.
2 hr. 20 min.
869 MB/min.
87
X
17 min.
1 hr. 09 min.
4 hr. 37 min.
440 MB/min.
L 65 X
5
HDR movie
33 min.
2 hr. 15 min.
9 hr. 01 min.
225 MB/min.
H
1 hr. 26 min.
5 hr. 47 min.
23 hr. 11 min.
87 MB/min.
87
X
38 min.
2 hr. 34 min.
10 hr. 19 min.
196 MB/min.
65
X
1 hr. 13 min.
4 hr. 53 min.
19 hr. 34 min.
103 MB/min.
65 V
w
• When movie cropping and Movie digital IS are disabled.
oo An increase of the camera’s internal temperature may cause movie recording
to stop before the total recording time shown in the table (=291).
zzTotal Possible Time for Movie Recording
(Approx.)
Temperature
Room Temperature
(23°C / 73°F)
Low Temperature
(0°C / 32°F)
Possible recording time
1 hr. 40 min.
1 hr. 30 min.
• With a fully charged Battery Pack LP-E17.
• With [z: Movie rec. size] set to L6X (NTSC)/L5X (PAL) and
[z: Movie Servo AF] set to [Enable].
586
Performance Data
zzTotal Possible Time for Time-lapse Movie Recording
Time-lapse Movie Recording
Interval
2 sec.
10 sec.
Screen Auto Off
Room Temperature
(23°C / 73°F)
(Approx.)
Low Temperature
(0°C / 32°F)
Disable
Approx. 2 hr. 40 min. Approx. 2 hr. 30 min.
Enable
Approx. 2 hr. 50 min. Approx. 2 hr. 40 min.
Disable
Approx. 2 hr. 20 min. Approx. 2 hr. 10 min.
Enable
Approx. 4 hr. 40 min. Approx. 4 hr. 30 min.
• With a fully charged Battery Pack LP-E17.
• The possible movie recording time varies depending on the shooting conditions.
587
Performance Data
ISO Speed in Movie Recording
In [k] Mode
zz For Full HD/HD movies, ISO speed is automatically set in a range of ISO
100–25600.
zz For 4K movies, ISO speed is automatically set in a range of ISO 100–
12800.
zz Under [z: kISO speed settings], setting [Max for Auto] or [H Max
for Auto] to [H2(102400)] (=286) expands the maximum limit of the
automatic ISO speed setting range to H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400). You
can lower the maximum value to narrow the automatic ISO speed setting
range.
zz With [z: Highlight tone priority] set to [Enable] (=137), the
automatic ISO speed setting range is ISO 200–25600 for Full HD/HD
movies and ISO 200–12800 for 4K movies.
588
Performance Data
In [M] Mode
zz For Full HD/HD movies with ISO speed set to [AUTO], ISO speed is
automatically set in a range of ISO 100–25600.
zz For 4K movies with ISO speed set to [AUTO], ISO speed is automatically
set in a range of ISO 100–12800.
zz When setting ISO Auto, setting [Max for Auto] or [H Max for Auto]
under [z: kISO speed settings] to [H2(102400)] (=286) expands
the maximum limit of the automatic ISO speed setting range to H2
(equivalent to ISO 102400). You can lower the maximum value to narrow
the automatic ISO speed setting range.
zz You can set the ISO speed manually in a range of ISO 100–25600 for
Full HD/HD movies and ISO 100–12800 for 4K movies. Note that under
[z: kISO speed settings], setting [ISO speed range] or [Range for
H] to [H2(102400)] (=286) expands the maximum limit of the manual
ISO speed setting range to H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400). Note that you
can also set the [Maximum] and [Minimum] to a range narrower than
the default range.
zz If [z: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable] (=137), the
automatic and manual ISO speed setting range’s minimum limit will be
ISO 200. Even when ISO speed expansion is set, the maximum limit will
not be expanded.
589
Performance Data
Image Playback
zzResize Options by Original Image Quality
Available Resize Settings
Original Image
Quality
4
a
3*
k
k
k
k
k
4
b
k
a
* Only b is available for images shot with [z: zCropping/aspect ratio] set to [1.6x
(crop)].
zzSize for Resized Images
(Approx. pixels)
Image
Quality
Full-frame (3:2)
1.6x (crop)
4
4160×2768*
(Approx. 11.5 megapixels)
–
a
3120×2080
(Approx. 6.5 megapixels)
–
b
2400×1600
(Approx. 3.8 megapixels)
2400×1600
(Approx. 3.8 megapixels)
Image
Quality
1:1 (aspect ratio)
4:3 (aspect ratio)
16:9 (aspect ratio)
4
3680×2768*
4160×2336*
2768×2768
(Approx. 7.7 megapixels) (Approx. 10.2 megapixels) (Approx. 9.7 megapixels)
a
2768×2080*
3120×1752*
2080×2080
(Approx. 4.3 megapixels) (Approx. 5.8 megapixels) (Approx. 5.5 megapixels)
b
2112×1600*
2400×1344*
1600×1600
(Approx. 2.6 megapixels) (Approx. 3.4 megapixels) (Approx. 3.2 megapixels)
oo The actual aspect ratio of images in the sizes marked with an asterisk “*” will
differ from the aspect ratio indicated.
oo The image may be cropped slightly depending on the resizing conditions.
590
Information Display
Still Photo Shooting Screen
Each time you press the <B> button, the information display will change.
zz Viewfinder display positions vary for some items.
zz The display will show only the settings currently applied.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(1)
(2)
(3)
Movie recording time available
Maximum burst
Possible shots/Sec. until selftimer shoots
(4) Focus bracketing/HDR/Multiple
exposures/Multi Shot Noise
Reduction/Bulb timer/Interval
timer
(5) Shooting mode/Scene icon
(6) AF method
(7) AF operation
(8) Drive mode
(9) Metering mode
(10) Image quality
(11) Movie recording size
(12) AF point (1-point AF)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(13) Battery level
(14) No. of shots left for focus
bracketing/multiple exposures/
interval timer
(15) Temperature warning
(16) Electronic level
(17) Histogram
(18) Quick Control button
(19) Anti-flicker shooting
(20) White balance/White balance
correction
(21) Picture Style
(22) Auto Lighting Optimizer
(23) Still photo cropping/aspect ratio
(24) Create folder
591
Information Display
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
(33)
(34)
(25) Flash ready/FE Lock/High-speed
sync
(26) Wi-Fi signal strength
(27) Wi-Fi function
(28) Touch Shutter
(29) AE lock
(30) Shutter speed/Multi-function lock
warning
(31) Bluetooth function
(32) Aperture
(42)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
(42)
Flash exposure compensation
Exposure level indicator
Focus distance display
Magnify button
ISO speed
Highlight tone priority
Exposure simulation
Exposure compensation
AEB/FEB
GPS acquisition status
oo You can set what is displayed for when you press the <B> button (=388).
oo The electronic level is not displayed when the AF method is set to
[u+Tracking] or the camera is connected via HDMI to a television.
oo Other icons may be displayed temporarily after setting adjustments.
592
Information Display
Movie Recording Screen
Each time you press the <B> button, the information display will change.
zz Viewfinder display positions vary for some items.
zz The display will show only the settings currently applied.
(1)
(11)
(12)
(2)
(3)
(13)
(14)
(4)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(10)
(20)
Electronic level
Battery level
Movie recording time available/
Elapsed recording time
(4) Movie recording mode/Time-lapse
movie/Scene icon
(5) AF method
(6) Movie recording size
(7) Sound-recording level (manual)
(8) Headphone volume
(9) Movie digital IS
(10) Movie Servo AF
(19)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
Temperature warning
AF point (1-point AF)
Histogram (for manual exposure)
Movie recording in progress
White balance/White balance
correction
Picture Style
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Video snapshot
GPS acquisition status
Magnify button
593
Information Display
(21)
(22)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(21) Sound-recording level indicator
(manual)
(22) Wi-Fi function
(23) AE lock
(24) Shutter speed
(25) Aperture
(26) Wi-Fi signal strength
(27) Bluetooth function
(31)
(32)
(33)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
Exposure level indicator
GPS acquisition status
ISO speed
Highlight tone priority
Exposure compensation
Focus distance display
oo You can set what is displayed for when you press the <B> button (=388).
oo The electronic level is not displayed when the AF method is set to
[u+Tracking] or the camera is connected via HDMI to a television.
oo The electronic level, grid lines, or histogram cannot be displayed during movie
recording. (The display will disappear when you start recording a movie.)
oo When movie recording starts, the movie recording remaining time will change
to the elapsed time.
oo Other icons may be displayed temporarily after setting adjustments.
594
Information Display
Scene Icons
In the <A> shooting mode, the camera detects the scene type and sets
everything automatically to suit the scene. The detected scene type is
indicated on the upper left of the screen.
Subject
Portrait
Non-Portrait
In Motion*1
Background
Nature and
Outdoor
Scene
In
Motion*1
Close*2
Bright
Background
Color
Gray
Backlit
Blue Sky
Included
Light blue
Backlit
*3
Sunset
*3
Orange
Spotlight
Dark
With
Tripod*1
Dark blue
4 5
**
*
3
4 5
**
*
3
*1: Not displayed during movie recording.
*2: Displayed when the attached lens has distance information. With an extension
tube or close-up lens, the icon displayed may not match the actual scene.
*3: The icon of the scene selected from the detectable scenes will be displayed.
oo For certain scenes or shooting conditions, the icon displayed may not match
the actual scene.
595
Information Display
*4: Displayed when all the following conditions apply:
The shooting scene is dark, it is a night scene, and the camera is mounted on a
tripod.
*5: Displayed with any of the lenses below:
• EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM
• EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM
• EF600mm f/4L IS II USM
• EF500mm f/4L IS II USM
• Image Stabilizer lenses released in and after 2012.
*4+*5: If the conditions in both *4 and *5 are met, the shutter speed will slow down.
596
Information Display
Playback Screen
zzBasic information display for still photos
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(13)
(14)
(15)
Wi-Fi function
Wi-Fi signal strength
Battery level
Playback No./Total images/
Number of found images
Shutter speed
Aperture
Exposure compensation amount
Bluetooth function
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
Already sent to a computer/
smartphone
Rating
Image protection
Folder number-File number
Image quality/Edited image/
Cropping
Highlight tone priority
ISO speed
oo If the image was taken by another camera, certain shooting information may
not be displayed.
oo It may not be possible to play back images taken with this camera on other
cameras.
597
Information Display
zzDetailed information display for still photos
(8)
(1)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(16)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
Aperture
Shutter speed
Shooting mode/Multiple exposure
White balance
Auto Lighting Optimizer
White balance correction
Picture Style/Settings
Exposure compensation amount
Shooting date and time
Histogram (Brightness/RGB)
(17)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
ISO speed
Highlight tone priority
Scroll bar
Flash exposure compensation/
Bounce/HDR shooting/Multi Shot
Noise Reduction
(15) Metering mode
(16) File size
(17) Image quality/Edited image/
Cropping
* When you shoot in RAW+JPEG image quality, the RAW image file size will be displayed.
* Lines indicating the image area will be displayed for images taken with the aspect
ratio set (=119) and with RAW or RAW+JPEG set for image quality.
* During flash photography without flash exposure compensation, <0> will be displayed.
* < > will be displayed for images shot with bounce flash photography.
* An icon for the effect (=172) and the dynamic range adjustment amount will be
displayed for images shot with HDR shooting.
* <P> will be displayed for images shot with multiple-exposure shooting.
* <M> will be displayed for images shot with Multi Shot Noise Reduction.
* <u> will be displayed for images created and saved after performing RAW image
processing, resizing, cropping, or Creative Assist.
* <N> will be displayed for images cropped and then saved.
598
Information Display
zzDetailed information display for movies
(1)
(2)
(6)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Movie playback
Movie recording mode/Time-lapse
movie/Video snapshot
Image size
Frame rate
(7)
(8)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
Compression method
Movie digital IS
Recording time
Movie recording format
* <G> will be displayed for still photos taken as test shots for time-lapse movies.
oo During movie playback, “*, *” will be displayed for [Fineness] and [Threshold]
of [Picture Style]’s [Sharpness].
599
Trademarks
oo Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
oo Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
oo Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and
other countries.
oo SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
oo HDMI, HDMI logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or
registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
oo The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo and the Wi-Fi Protected Setup mark are trademarks
of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
oo WPS used on camera settings screens and in this manual stands for Wi-Fi
Protected Setup.
oo The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Canon Inc. is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
oo All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
About MPEG-4 Licensing
“This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard and
may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding MPEG-4
compliant video that was encoded only (1) for a personal and non-commercial
purpose or (2) by a video provider licensed under the AT&T patents to provide
MPEG-4 compliant video. No license is granted or implied for any other use
for MPEG-4 standard.”
600
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO
LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL USE OF A CONSUMER OR OTHER USES
IN WHICH IT DOES NOT RECEIVE REMUNERATION TO (i) ENCODE
VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (''AVC VIDEO'') AND/
OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER
ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A
VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS
GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C.
SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM
* Notice displayed in English as required.
Third party software
This product includes third party software.
● AES-128 Library
Copyright (c) 1998-2008, Brian Gladman, Worcester, UK. All rights
reserved.
LICENSE TERMS
The redistribution and use of this software (with or without changes) is allowed
without the payment of fees or royalties provided that:
1. source code distributions include the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer;
2. binary distributions include the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer in their documentation;
3. the name of the copyright holder is not used to endorse products built using this
software without specific written permission.
DISCLAIMER
This software is provided 'as is' with no explicit or implied warranties in respect of its
properties, including, but not limited to, correctness and/or fitness for purpose.
601
Use of Genuine Canon Accessories Is Recommended
This product is designed to achieve optimum performance when used with
genuine Canon accessories. Therefore, using this product with genuine
accessories is highly recommended.
Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents
such as malfunction, fire, etc. caused by the failure of non-genuine Canon
accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery). Please note that
repairs arising out of the malfunction of non-genuine accessories will not be
covered by the warranty for repairs, although you may request such repairs
on a chargeable basis.
oo Battery Pack LP-E17 is dedicated to Canon products only. Using it with an
incompatible battery charger or product may result in malfunction or accidents
for which Canon cannot be held liable.
602
Only for European Union and EEA (Norway, Iceland and
Liechtenstein)
These symbols indicate that this product is not to be
disposed of with your household waste, according to
the WEEE Directive (2012/19/EU), the Battery Directive
(2006/66/EC) and/or national legislation implementing
those Directives.
If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol
shown above, in accordance with the Battery Directive, this indicates that
a heavy metal (Hg = Mercury, Cd = Cadmium, Pb = Lead) is present in this
battery or accumulator at a concentration above an applicable threshold
specified in the Battery Directive.
This product should be handed over to a designated collection point, e.g.,
on an authorized one-for-one basis when you buy a new similar product or
to an authorized collection site for recycling waste electrical and electronic
equipment (EEE) and batteries and accumulators. Improper handling of this
type of waste could have a possible impact on the environment and human
health due to potentially hazardous substances that are generally associated
with EEE. Your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will
contribute to the effective usage of natural resources.
For more information about the recycling of this product, please contact
your local city office, waste authority, approved scheme or your household
waste disposal service or visit www.canon-europe.com/weee,
or www.canon-europe.com/battery.
603
CAUTION
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE.
DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO LOCAL REGULATION.
604
Index
Numbers
1-point AF : 188, 193
[4K] 3840×2160 (Movie) : 249
ALL-I : 265
Ambience priority (AWB) : 142
Anti-flicker shooting : 179
4K frame capture : 306
Aperture-priority AE : 100
A
<A+> (Scene Intelligent Auto) : 68
Area AF frame : 80, 81, 192
Acceleration/deceleration tracking : 531
Aspect ratio → Still photo cropping/
Access lamp : 43
aspect ratio
Accessories : 3
Attenuator : 258
Adobe RGB : 147
Autofocus → AF
AEB (Auto Exposure Bracketing) : 129
Auto Lighting Optimizer : 136
AE lock : 213
Auto power off : 372
AF
Auto reset : 365
AF-assist beam : 187, 201
Auto rotate : 366
AF method : 188
Av (Aperture-priority AE) : 100
AF operation : 185, 196
AF point selection : 193
AF speed : 283
Area AF frame : 80, 81, 192
Beep (Beeper) : 380
Continuous AF : 199
Eye detection AF : 198
Lens drive when AF impossible : 533
Lens electronic MF : 200
Limit AF methods : 533
Manual focusing : 214
Orientation linked AF point : 534
Recomposing : 71
Touch & drag AF : 183
AF point auto switching : 532
AF point expansion : 189, 193
AF start button : 55
Album (video snapshot) : 274, 334
B
Background music : 336
Basic information display : 597
Basic Zone : 34
Battery → Power
B (Bulb) : 106
Beep (Beeper) : 380
Bluetooth function : 399, 418
Address : 429
Connecting : 421
Bracketing
AEB (Auto Exposure Bracketing) : 129
FEB (Flash Exposure Bracketing) :
229
Focus bracketing : 202
White balance bracketing : 146
Bulb exposures : 106
605
Index
Bulb timer : 107
BUSY : 118
Contrast : 136, 153
Control ring : 58
Copyright information : 411
C
<C1>/<C2>/<C3> (Custom shooting) :
408
Camera
Camera vibration blur : 107, 210
Default settings : 410
Holding the camera : 53
Camera shake : 54, 70
Creative Assist : 73, 331
Creative Zone : 35
Cropping (images) : 337
Custom Functions : 523
Customize buttons : 538
Custom shooting mode : 408
Custom white balance : 143
Card requirements : 253, 585
D
Cards : 10, 30, 42
Date/time : 374
Card reminder : 182
Daylight saving time : 375
Formatting : 367
Default settings : 410
Low-level formatting : 367
Custom Functions : 546
Troubleshooting : 44, 565
Customizing operations : 546
Write protection : 42
Custom shooting mode : 408
Center-weighted average metering : 211
Certification logo : 413
Flash function settings : 230
My Menu : 551
Charger : 37, 40
Depth-of-field preview : 101
Charging : 40, 558
Diffraction correction : 126, 330
Chromatic aberration correction : 126,
Digital Lens Optimizer : 125, 329
330
Digital terminal : 32, 556
Cleaning (image sensor) : 382
Dioptric adjustment : 52
Clipped highlights : 351
Display off : 372
Close-up : 84
Display settings : 394
Color space : 147, 329
Distortion correction : 124, 329
Color temperature : 144
Double-tap : 298
Color tone : 153
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) : 318
Combination IS : 261
Dragging : 64
Continuous (file numbering) : 364
Drive mode : 206
Continuous shooting : 206
Dust Delete Data : 161
606
Index
E
Flash (Speedlite) : 220
Custom Functions : 230
Eco mode : 371
FEB (Flash Exposure Bracketing) :
Electronic level : 388
229
Erasing (images) : 314
FE lock : 220
Err (error codes) : 581
Flash control (function settings) : 222
Evaluative metering : 211
Flash exposure compensation : 220,
exFAT : 254, 368
229
Expanded ISO speed : 131, 133, 286,
Flash sync speed : 221
588
Manual flash : 226
Exposure compensation : 129
Safety FE : 225
Exposure compensation in M mode with
Shutter synchronization (1st/2nd
ISO Auto : 103
curtain) : 228
Exposure level increments : 526
Slow synchro : 224
Exposure level indicator : 102, 592
Exposure simulation : 139
Extension grip : 560
External microphone : 258
Wireless : 227
Flash sync contacts : 31
Flexible-priority AE : 104
External Speedlite → Flash
Focus bracketing : 202
F
Focus lock : 71
Focusing → AF
Face+Tracking : 188, 191
Focus mode switch : 48, 51
FAT32 : 254, 368
Folder creation/selection : 361
Feature guide : 370
Food : 85
FEB (Flash Exposure Bracketing) : 229
Formatting (card initialization) : 367
FE lock : 220
Frame Grab : 306
File extension : 116, 252
Frame rate : 252, 378
File size : 254, 583, 586
Full High-Definition (Full HD) (movie) :
Filter effect (Monochrome) : 154
249
Fine (Image quality) : 116
Fv (Flexible-priority AE) : 104
Firmware : 413
First-curtain synchronization : 228
Flash exposure compensation : 220, 229
Flash mode : 226
G
GPS : 402
Grid display : 353, 390
607
Index
Group Photo : 78
Continuous (file numbering) : 364
Erasing : 314
H
File numbering : 363
H1/H2 (Expanded ISO speed) : 133
Highlight alert : 351
Handheld night scene : 87
Histogram : 349
[HD] 1280×720 (Movie) : 249
Importing (to computer) : 556
HDMI : 290, 308, 386
Index display : 300
HDMI HDR : 387
Jump display (image browsing) : 347
HDMI output : 290
Magnifying images : 299
HDR Backlight Control : 88
Manual reset : 365
HDR movie recording : 247
Manual rotation : 313
HDR shooting : 171
Playback : 293
Headphones : 258
Protecting images : 310
Help : 396
Rating : 340
Text size : 397
Search conditions : 345
High dynamic range → HDR
High ISO speed noise reduction : 157
Highlight alert : 351
Highlight tone priority : 137
High-speed continuous shooting : 206
High-speed display : 181
Histogram : 349, 391
Hot shoe : 31
I
Shooting information : 297, 598
Image search : 345
Importing images to a computer : 556
Index display : 300
INFO button : 59
Initial magnification ratio/position : 355
Interval timer : 176
IPB : 252
ISO speed : 131, 286
ICC profile : 147
Auto range (Still photos) : 134
Icons : 8
ISO Auto range : 134, 582
Image browsing (jump display) : 347
ISO speed range : 133, 286
Image quality : 116, 583
Minimum shutter speed for ISO Auto
Image review time : 122
(Still photos) : 135
Images
AF point display : 352
Auto reset : 365
Auto rotation : 366
608
J
JPEG : 116, 583
Jump display : 347
Index
Maximum burst : 118, 583
K
Kids : 81
Medium (image quality) : 116
L
Menu : 60
Memory cards → Cards
Landscape : 79
Custom Functions : 524
Language : 377
Dimmed menu items : 63
Large (image quality) : 116
Function settings : 358
Lens : 48, 50
Movie shooting : 236
Chromatic aberration correction : 126,
My Menu : 548
330
Playback : 294
Diffraction correction : 126, 330
Setting procedure : 61
Digital Lens Optimizer : 125, 329
Still photo shooting : 111
Distortion correction : 124, 329
Metering mode : 211
Focus mode switch : 48, 51
Metering timer : 138
Lock release : 49, 51
MF (Manual focusing) : 214
Optical aberration correction : 123,
M-Fn button : 55
329
MF peaking : 216
Peripheral illumination correction :
Microphone : 258
124, 329
M (Manual exposure) : 102
Lens electronic MF : 200
Mode dial : 34
Location information : 402
Mode guide : 369
LOCK : 58, 407
Monochrome : 150
Long (bulb) exposures : 106
Movies : 235
Long Exposure Noise Reduction : 159
AE lock : 240
Low-speed continuous shooting : 207
AF speed during Movie Servo AF :
M
283
Magnifying images : 195, 214, 299
Main dial : 56
Malfunction : 562
Manual exposure : 102
Manual focus : 214
Manual focusing : 214
Manual reset : 365
Attenuator : 258
Autoexposure shooting : 239
Auto slow shutter : 288
Av 1/8-stop increments : 289
Cards that can record movies : 585
Compression method : 252
Cropped shooting : 256
609
Index
Editing : 304
Editing out first and last scenes : 304
External microphone : 258
File size : 254, 586
N
Night Portrait : 86
Noise reduction
High ISO speed : 157
Frame Grab : 306
Frame rate : 252
HDMI output : 290, 386
HDR movie recording : 247
Headphones : 258
Long exposures : 159
Non-Canon flash units : 221
Normal (Image quality) : 116
NTSC : 252, 378
Information display : 593
O
Manual exposure shooting : 241
One-Shot AF : 186
Microphone : 258
Orientation linked AF point : 534
Movie digital IS : 260
P
Movie recording size : 249
Movie Servo AF : 280, 282, 283
Movie Servo AF tracking sensitivity :
282
Movie shooting button : 31
Playback : 301
Recording time : 255, 586
Shooting area : 251
Sound recording/Sound-recording
level : 257
Time-lapse movie : 262
Video snapshots : 274
Wind filter : 257
MP4 : 252
Multi function : 55
Multi-function lock : 58, 407
Multiple exposure : 165
Multi Shot Noise Reduction : 157
My Menu : 548
PAL : 252, 378
Panning : 82
Partial metering : 211
Part names : 31
Peripheral illumination correction : 124,
329
Photobook set-up : 322
Picture Style : 148, 152, 155
Pixel count : 116, 583
Playback : 293
Portrait : 77
Positioning hole : 33
Possible recording time (movie) : 586
Possible shots : 582
Power : 46
Auto power off : 372
Battery information : 381
Battery level : 47
Charging : 40, 558
Possible shots : 582
610
Index
Power saving : 372
Scene icons : 72, 595
P (Program AE) : 96
Scene Intelligent Auto : 68
Pressing completely : 54, 395
<SCN> (Special scene) : 34, 75
Pressing halfway : 54, 395
Screen : 30, 45
Printing
Photobook set-up : 322
Print order (DPOF) : 318
Program AE : 96
Program shift : 97
Protecting images : 310
Q
[Q] (Quick Control) : 65
Quick Control : 65
Quick control dial : 57
R
Angle adjustment : 45
Brightness : 373
SD/SDHC/SDXC cards → Cards
Second-curtain synchronization : 228
Self-timer : 209
Sensitivity → ISO speed
Sensor cleaning : 382
Serial number : 33
Servo AF
Initial AF Point : 535
Movie Servo AF : 280, 282, 283
SERVO : 186
Rating : 340
SERVO (Servo AF) : 186
Rating mark : 340
Sharpness : 153
RAW : 116, 117
Shooting information display : 388, 591
RAW image processing : 325
Shooting mode
RAW+JPEG : 116, 583
<A+> (Scene Intelligent Auto) : 68
Reduced display : 300
Av (Aperture-priority AE) : 100
Release shutter without card : 182
B (Bulb) : 106
Remote control : 217
<C1>/<C2>/<C3> (Custom shooting) :
Remote control terminal : 32, 219
408
Remote switch : 219
Fv (Flexible-priority AE) : 104
Resizing : 339
M (Manual exposure) : 102
Rotating (images) : 313, 366
P (Program AE) : 96
S
Safety instructions : 25
Safety shift : 529
Saturation : 153
SCN (Special scene mode) : 75
Tv (Shutter-priority AE) : 98
Shooting range : 391
Shutter button : 54
Shutter button functions : 395
611
Index
Shutter-priority AE : 98
Troubleshooting : 562
Shutter synchronization : 228
TV display : 308
Silent mode : 89
Tv (Shutter-priority AE) : 98
Single-image display : 296
Single shooting : 206
Slide show : 343
Small (image quality) : 116
Software : 554
Instruction Manual : 555
U
UHS-II/UHS-I : 10
USB (digital) terminal : 32, 556
UTC (Coordinated Universal Time) : 406
V
Sound recording/Sound-recording level :
Video snapshots : 274
257
Video system : 378
Speaker : 33
Viewfinder
Special scene mode (SCN) : 75
Dioptric adjustment : 52
Sports : 80
Display format : 393
Spot AF : 188, 193
Grid display : 390
Spot metering : 211
Information display : 389
sRGB : 147
Vertical display : 390
Still photo cropping/aspect ratio : 119,
Viewfinder off : 372
584
Volume (movie playback) : 302, 303
Strap : 38
T
W
White balance : 140
Temperature warning : 232, 291
Auto : 142
Tilt correction : 338
Bracketing : 146
Time-lapse movie : 262
Color temperature setting : 144
Time zone : 374
Correction : 145
Tone priority : 137
Custom : 143
Toning effect (Monochrome) : 154
White priority (AWB) : 142
Touch beeping : 380
Wi-Fi function : 415
Touch operation : 64, 298, 379
Android : 420
Touch Shutter : 163
Camera access point mode : 492
Tracking sensitivity : 530
Camera Connect : 420, 437
Tripod socket : 33
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY : 473
612
Index
Clearing wireless communication
Virtual keyboard : 517
settings : 498
Wi-Fi settings : 516
Connection history : 493, 516
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) : 488
Edit device information : 450, 496
Wind filter : 257
EOS Utility : 453
Wireless communication settings : 398,
Erase connection information : 497
415
Image Transfer Utility 2 : 458
iOS : 420
IP address : 518
Z
Zone AF : 189, 193
MAC address : 499
Network : 434, 454, 462
Network settings : 514
Nickname : 497
Notes : 511
Pairing : 422
Password : 516
PictBridge : 463
Printer : 461
Printing : 464
Print order : 467
Reconnecting : 493
Remote operation : 437
Resize image : 440, 445, 481
Sending all images on the card : 446,
483
Sending images that match search
conditions : 447, 485
Send selected : 443, 480
SSID : 434, 454, 462
Switch network : 489
Viewable images : 450
View info screen : 499
Viewing images : 437
613
CANON INC.
30-2 Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan
Europe, Africa & Middle East
CANON EUROPA N.V.
Bovenkerkerweg 59, 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands
For your local Canon office, please refer to your warranty card or to www.canon-europe.com/Support
The product and associated warranty are provided in European countries by Canon Europa N.V.
The descriptions in this Instruction Manual are current as of June 2019.
For information on the compatibility with any products introduced after this date,
contact any Canon Service Center. For the latest version Instruction Manual,
refer to the Canon website.
CEL-SX6JA211
© CANON INC. 2019
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising